STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS

Programming

Set-up A Operating
Grinding

StuderWin
B Process screen
from Release F029

C Set-up

D Corrections

E Programming

F Settings

G Diagnosis

H M commands / B/H commands

I Studer messages
10035212 / 01 / en-English
PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

Fritz Studer AG
CH-3602 Thun
Tel. +41-33-439 11 11
Fax +41-33-439 11 12
www.studer.com

Translation of the original user’s manual

KEEP FOR FUTURE USE!

The copyright to this user’s manual, which is entrusted
personally to the recipient, is retained by the STUDER
company at all times.
The contents of this manual must never be communicated
to or made available to third parties without the express
permission of the STUDER company.
This user’s manual must be read and applied by all per-
sons carrying out work with or on the described items of
equipment.
In particular, every such person must acquaint themselves
with the safety regulations.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / INDEX

Index
A StuderWIN Operating Instructions
A.1 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Control panels Fanuc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Machine control panel Fanuc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 1
A.4 Control panel Fanuc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.5 Machine control panel Fanuc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.6 Control panel Siemens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.7 Machine control panel Siemens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.8 Process Control Unit PCU II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A.9 Description of the control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.10 Focus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A.11 Formula parser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27

B Process screen
B.1 Standard Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
B.2 Multi-channel Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
B.3 Block start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
B.4 Reworking individual workpiece sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
B.5 MDI Process Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
B.6 Logging measurement data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
B.7 Process Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
B.8 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42

C Setting up
C.1 General set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
C.2 Set up without QUICK-SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-48
C.3 Setting up with QUICK-SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49
C.4 Machine Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-51
C.5 Assigning turning tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-66
C.6 Quickset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-73
C.7 Update data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-73
C.8 Set-up program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-75
C.9 Set up Quickset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-77
C.10 Register dressing tool / calibrate grinding wheel on the
dressing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-82
C.11 Profile roll (roller-burnishing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-87
C.12 Register workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-94
C.13 Configuring the workpiece with internal grinding wheel . . . . . . . C-103
C.14 Register workpiece with the touch probe (optional) . . . . . . . . . . C-106
C.15 Configure workpiece with turning tool turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-110
C.16 Measurement of the grinding wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-116
C.17 Setting up special positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-121
C.18 Set-up swivel position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-122
C.19 Retraction position in X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-124
C.20 Retraction position in Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-126
C.21 Accessories set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-128
C.22 Integrated measurement control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-129
C.23 Circumferential Positioning Passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-130
C.24 Length Positioning Passive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-131
C.25 Longitudinal positioning active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-132
C.26 Search target position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-135
C.27 Longitudinal positioning using Sensitron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-137
C.28 Setting up touch dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-140
C.29 Set up NC-tailstock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-144

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab F029 / 13.03.2012 I
INDEX / STUDERWIN
C.30 Set up tool measurement device (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-147
C.31 Set up loader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-148
C.32 Assisted manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-153
C.33 Grinding the first workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-158
C.34 Series production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-160

D Corrections
D.1 Workpiece Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-165
D.2 Corrections for specific fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-167
D.3 Grinding wheel corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-169
D.4 Turning Tool corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-176
D.5 Dressing tool corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-178
D.6 Cylindricity correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-181
D.7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-182

E Programming
E.1 General programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-183
E.2 Define workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-196
E.3 Geometry editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-199
E.4 Define grinding wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-203
E.5 Grinding wheel editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-206
E.6 G9400 Setting the wheel reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-219
E.7 Special wheel shapes (examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-221
E.8 Defining a dressing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-224
E.9 Pictogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-227
E.10 Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-236
E.11 Edit default values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-237
E.12 GRINDING CYCLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-238
E.13 Multi-Profile Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-238
E.14 G9201 Plunge without oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-245
E.15 G9202 Plunging with oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-246
E.16 G9203 Angular plunge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-247
E.17 G9204 Plunge on taper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-248
E.18 G9205 Multi-plunge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-249
E.19 G9206 Traverse grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-251
E.20 G9207 Multi-plunge on taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-253
E.21 G9208 Shoulder plunge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-255
E.22 G9209 Transverse Shoulder Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-257
E.23 G9210 Contour cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-259
E.24 G9211 Contour traverse grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-260
E.25 G9212 Shoulder plunging with oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-261
E.26 G9214 Plunging with oscillation on taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-263
E.27 G9215 Diameter/Shoulder preparatory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-265
E.28 G9217 Longitudinal grinding on taper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-266
E.29 G9220 Plunge form grinding with WRC (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . E-268
E.30 G9225 Multi-plunging form cycle with WRC (option) . . . . . . . . . E-269
E.31 G9228 Shoulder form grinding (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-271
E.32 G9230 Thread grinding (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-272
E.33 G9235 Preparatory function thread grinding (option) . . . . . . . . . E-277
E.34 G9236 Thread grinding (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-278
E.35 G9237 Thread grinding (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-281
E.36 G9239 Thread lead-in / run-out grinding (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . E-284
E.37 G9245 Additional definition for form grinding (option). . . . . . . . . E-287
E.38 G9250 Removal of a specific amount in X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-288
E.39 G9251 Removal of a specific amount in Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-289

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

II Release ab F029 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / INDEX
E.40 G9730 Highspeed shape grinding (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-291
E.41 G9270 Grind longitudinal grooves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-295
E.42 G9272 Deep-pass grinding: plunging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-297
E.43 G9276 Deep-pass grinding: Multi-plunging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-299
E.44 MEASURING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-301
E.45 G204 Activating measurement control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-301
E.46 G205 Longditudinal Positioning Passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-303 1
E.47 G206 Longitudinal positioning active (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-306
E.48 G207 Longitudinal positioning with Sensitron (option) . . . . . . . . E-311
E.49 G208 Initialize measurement control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-313
E.50 G211 Control measurement (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-315
E.51 G212 Circumferential positioning passive (option) . . . . . . . . . . E-321
E.52 G213 Zeroing measuring circuit (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-323
E.53 G215 Logging measurement data (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-324
E.54 G230 Read in external measurement values (option) . . . . . . . . E-324
E.55 G231 Calculate external measurement value as LP value
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-325
E.56 G232 Process external values (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-325
E.57 G233 Write external values to the measurement control
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-326
E.58 G240 Read in values from integrated measurement control
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-327
E.59 G9261 Positioning pre-machined threads (option) . . . . . . . . . . . E-328
E.60 G9603 Circumferential positioning with active touch probe
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-332
E.61 G9780 Calibrate touch probe in X (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-336
E.62 G9781 Calibrate touch probe in Z (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-338
E.63 G9782 Control measurement X (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-340
E.64 G9783 Control measurement Z (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-344
E.65 AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-347
E.66 G200 Activate Sensitron (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-347
E.67 G201 Deactivate Sensitron. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-349
E.68 G202 Dressing outwith the grinding cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-350
E.69 G203 Dressing after n pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-353
E.70 G216 Cylindricity correction (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-357
E.71 G9313 Peripheral speed for grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-359
E.72 G9500 Swiveling of the workhead (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-360
E.73 G9600 Wheel selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-363
E.74 G9601 Change grinding arbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-365
E.75 G9602 Set actual value for C axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-366
E.76 G9605 Reprofiling the current grinding wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-367
E.77 G9606 Pre-profiling of grinding wheels set at an angle . . . . . . . E-369
E.78 G9607 Arbor deflection compensation (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-370
E.79 G9610 Selection lathe tool (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-371
E.80 G9611 Turning-tool correction (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-373
E.81 G9612 Tool working life (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-373
E.82 G9677 function “automatic restart after closing door” (option) . . E-374
E.83 G9678 Move to approach position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-376
E.84 G9679 Retract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-379
E.85 G9680 Activate customer correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-382
E.86 G9825 Autom. cylindricity correction (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-383
E.87 G9826 Open and close NC barrel (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-385
E.88 G9862 Coordination of program start (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-386
E.89 G9863 Coordination of operation sequence /option . . . . . . . . . . E-386
E.90 G9864 Program call (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-386

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab F029 / 13.03.2012 III
INDEX / STUDERWIN
E.91 MICRO-FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-387
E.92 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-387
E.93 G9700 Approaching the Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-391
E.94 G9701 Plunging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-393
E.95 G9702 Approaching the workpiece with Sensitron . . . . . . . . . . . E-394
E.96 G9703 Spark-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-395
E.97 G9704 Lifting from the workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-396
E.98 G9705 Multi Plunging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-397
E.99 G9706 Oscillating Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-399
E.100 G9708 Transition radii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-401
E.101 G9710 Contour grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-403
E.102 G9740 Approach thread start position (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-405
E.103 G9741 Thread plunging (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-408
E.104 G9742 Approaching threads with Sensitron (option) . . . . . . . . . E-409
E.105 G9746 Thread traverse grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-410
E.106 G9750 Start / Stop Oscillation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-411
E.107 G9752 Start / Stop workpiece spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-412
E.108 G9753 Positioning C axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-413
E.109 G9754 Programmed stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-414
E.110 G9756 Measurement Control Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-415
E.111 G9770 Clamping force regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-415
E.112 G9771 Plunge grinding with measurement control . . . . . . . . . . . E-416
E.113 Special Grinding Wheel Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-417

F Settings
F.1 Initialization values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-420
F.2 PCU Function key assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-423
F.3 Start-up timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-425
F.4 Safety settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-427
F.5 Options Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-428
F.6 Defining the High-frequency Spindles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-429
F.7 Assigning the high-frequency spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-431
F.8 Definition of the clamping devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-432
F.9 System backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-433

G Diagnosis
G.1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-436

H M commands / B/H commands for machine

H.1 Index of all M and B/H commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-437
H.2 M-Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-443
H.3 B/H-Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-465

I Messages
I.1 Studer Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-467

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

IV Release ab F029 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A StuderWIN Operating Instructions

StuderWIN can be operated using the keyboard or the mouse.

This chapter covers the following topics amongst others:
A
  A.1 "Operating modes",  A-2
  A.2 "Control panels Fanuc",  A-3
  A.8 "Process Control Unit PCU II",  A-12
  A.9 "Description of the control elements",  A-18
  A.10 "Focus control",  A-25
  A.11 "Formula parser",  A-27

Fig. A-1 main_setup

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A-1
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

A.1 Operating modes

Each CNC control system has various operating modes. Different functions are
available, depending on the operating mode. These are also described in the con-
trol system user manual.

JOG In this mode the axes can be handled manually, for example.
Manual mode

EDIT In this mode there is the option to write workpiece programs, grinding wheels and
Programming dressing tools or modify data.
mode, data input

REF The reference points only have to be approached after service assignments.
Reference point
traversing

SET In this mode the machine can be set up. Functions like manual grinding can also be
Setting-up mode carried out in this mode.

MEM Workpiece programs are executed in this mode.

Automatic mode

MDI In this mode M commands can be activated or small program sentences can be
Semi-automatic directly executed.
mode

NOTE!
Not all program functions are functional in MDI mode.

WARNING!
The risk of a misentry is particularly large in MDI mode.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A-2 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A.2 Control panels Fanuc

too S12 / S22 / S242

Fig. A-2 Fanuc310i_Legende

A 15” LCD screen

B Hotkeys for rapid access to the different menus e.g. programming, set-up or
processing

C Numeric keypad with special characters, which can be called with “SHIFT” (G)

D Insert key with special characters

D Enter key

E Escape key

E Tab key

E Print key

100115922/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A-3
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN
E Space key

E Alt key

E Control key

E Delete key

E Page-up key; scrolling backwards through the pages

E Backspace key

E Home key; the cursor jumps to the beginning of the line

E Page-down key; scrolling forwards through the pages

E End key; the cursor jumps to the end of the line

F Arrow keys for moving the cursor

G Shift key to insert special characters

H USB interfaces for connecting USB memory sticks and other USB devices

K F keys (softkeys F1 - F12) and letters, switching over using “ABC / Fn” key ( L)

L Switching between F keys (softkeys) or letters

M Caps Lock key for upper case

N Slot for PC cards

O Help key for calling up StuderWIN online help

P Reset key for deleting errors and messages on the CNC

100115922/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A-4 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A.3 Machine control panel Fanuc

Fig. A-3 Maschinen_Steuertafel_Fanuc_Legende

Description of the individual elements and keys  A.9 "Description of the control
elements",  A-18

100115922/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A-5
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

A.4 Control panel Fanuc

too S33 / S41

Fig. A-4 00i_1

100115924/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A-6 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Fig. A-5 00i_3

A LCD touch screen 15”

C Numeric keypad with special characters, which can be called with “SHIFT” (G) A

E Alt key

E Control key

E Tab key

E Page-up key; scrolling backwards through the pages

E Page-down key; scrolling forwards through the pages

F Arrow keys for moving the cursor

N Slot for PC cards

H USB interfaces for connecting USB memory sticks and other USB devices

100115924/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A-7
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

A.5 Machine control panel Fanuc

zu S33

Fig. A-6 00i_2

Description of the individual elements and keys  A.9 "Description of the control
elements",  A-18

100115925/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A-8 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A.6 Control panel Siemens

too S12

Fig. A-7 Siemens_Legende

A 15” LCD screen

B Hotkeys for rapid access to the different menus e.g. programming, set-up or
processing

C Deleting error messages

C Channel switching, only with multiple channel control

C Help key for calling up StuderWIN online help

D Keypad with special characters which can be called using “Shift”

D Space key

E Numeric keypad with special characters which can be called using “Shift”

100115926/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A-9
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

F Arrow keys for moving the cursor

F Shift key for entering special characters

F Backspace key

F Tab key

F Insert key

F Page-up key; scrolling backwards through the pages

F Page-down key; scrolling forwards through the pages

F End key; the cursor jumps to the end of the line

F Select key, without function

G Control key

G Alt key

G USB interfaces for connecting USB memory sticks and other USB devices

H Mouse with right and left mouse button  “Description of the operating controls”
(M1, M2, M3)

K Menu selection key (Siemens user interface)

K Switching to a lower softkey level

L Soft keys

M One softkey level up

M Switch to StuderWIN

N USB interfaces for connecting USB memory sticks and other USB devices

100115926/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 10 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A.7 Machine control panel Siemens

Fig. A-8 Maschinen_Steuertafel_Siemens_Legende

Description of the individual elements and keys  A.9 "Description of the control
elements",  A-18

100115926/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 11
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

A.8 Process Control Unit PCU II

The Process Control Unit, PCU for short, was developed so that the grinding proc-
ess can be more closely and therefore better controlled.
Activating different kinds of functions and also altering values is a helpful support for
all users, thanks to the PCU.

Fig. A-9 PCU II

Main functions  Axis selection

 Selection of operating mode
 Cycle Start/ Interruption/ Stop1)
 M commands activated using the function softkeys (see settings)
 Handwheel for the selected axis
 Override switch for axis feed and workpiece rotational speed

Auxiliary functions  Sensitron operation

 Alter quantity of coolant
 Operate integrated measurement control

Selection of oper- It is possible to select the operating modes stated below using the PCU.
ating mode
The selected operating mode is indicated by the illuminated key.
 JOG (manual mode)
 MEM (automatic mode)
Can also be selected on the machine control panel 1)
 SET (Setting-up mode)
Can also be selected on the machine control panel 1)

button pre-selec- In order to reduce the possibility of an operating error, most functions are carried out
tor using preselection. This kind of key flashes when first pressed: the function must
then be confirmed using the OK key or deleted using the QUIT key.

1) nicht auf PCU II

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 12 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Axes selection In order to handle an axis manually, the operating mode JOG (manual mode) and
the axis must be selected. The X and Z axes can be selected directly; all further
axes such as C, B, Q or V are selected by repeatedly pressing the relevant AXIS
key.
When the desired axis has been selected, it can be moved using the handwheel or
the direction key.
A
NOTE!
Make sure that the FEED OVERRIDE (straight line velocity) is at the necessary
position. Using the handwheel, the step size for each resolution can be selected
using the INC key. (0,1µ .. 100µ)

A.8.1 PCU II

The new PCU II manual control unit is functionally compatible with the predecessor
model but the device is operated differently. This chapter should help you to
become familiar with the new control unit quickly.
By reducing the number of keys we have made operation clearer and more reliable
(larger keys). However this means that individual functions are executed or selected
directly using soft keys or by means of the menu.
Use the handwheel to navigate through the menu and select using its integrated
push button.

1001115929/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 13
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN
A.8.1.1 Control elements

Fig. A-10 PCU 1

Legend

A Color display

B Functions

C Handwheel function selection

D JOG rotary switch

E Accept key on underside

F Soft keys

G Function keys

H Feed Override

I Handwheel

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 14 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Color display The display shows all the familiar information from the predecessor PCU model. In
addition, 3 soft keys are located at the bottom of the display.

Soft keys Normally the middle key is used to select

the menu and pressing it again closes this A
once more. The right and left soft keys
are provided with various functions
depending on the display.

Handwheel This group of keys is used to select the

function selection function using the handwheel.

S%
Change spindle override (Spindle revolution)

Alter coolant quantity (Coolant)

reinforcement Sensitron Modify (Dependent on option)

The handwheel function key is used to display a menu and the desired
function selected by means of the handwheel

Spindle override (spindle revolution)

The spindle override function has also been moved to the handwheel.

Increment assessment (Increments)

In JOG and SET modes the INC function can be executed directly using the right
soft key or can be selected in the basic menu. This selection opens a menu where
the required assessment can be selected directly.

1001115929/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 15
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

Zeroing the C axis display (Zero Axis)

This function can be found in the menu.

Reverse
This function can be found in the menu.

In-process gauging resolution (IPG)

This function can be found in the menu.

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 16 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.8.1.2 Manual mode (Handcycle)

Shoulder machining (Shoulder)

Diameter machining (Diameter)

A

Reverse position A (Pos A OK)

Reverse position B (Pos B OK)

Operation in minus and plus directions

The traversing movements are no longer selected using keys but with a rotary
switch. The direction and speed are set using the input device developed by Studer
by turning the knob either clockwise or anti-clockwise. The maximum speed is lim-
ited by the feed override.

LED
The LED indicates that the handwheel is activated for navigating in the menu or for
settings and is therefore disabled for CNC machine function (axis movements).

1001115929/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 17
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

A.9 Description of the control elements

The individual keys and indicators are described below. The location of each of
these is given at the end in brackets. The following abbreviations are used.
 MSST: Machine control panel
 PCU: Process-Control-Unit

Keys not described here have no function for the time being.

A1 OK (Accept)
This is used to confirm the preselected key.
Positions for setting up can also be imported with this key in the PCU_0.

A2 MEM (automatic operating mode)

Switching to operating mode MEM (automatic). (MSST, PCU) 1)

A3-E4 F1 - F10 (function keys)

The function keys F1 to F10 can be allocated M command functions (see settings)
(PCU)

A5 Dressing key
This key is used for automatically dressing the current grinding wheel. It is a condi-
tion that the machine is in the automatic operating mode (MEM) and the doors are
shut. (MSST, PCU)

A6 Channel - switch-over
Is only used for multiple channel machines or integrated loader control.

A7 X-axis selection
The axis-specific functions act on the X-axis (JOG mode, handwheel override).
(MSST, PCU)

A8 Z-axis selection
The axis-specific functions act on the Z axis (JOG mode, handwheel override).
(MSST, PCU)

A9 Select additional axes

Optional axes can be selected here. Each time this key is pressed, an additional
axis is selected. The position value is shown in the general display (PCU display).
See also X-axis selection (PCU)

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 18 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A10 C-axis selection

The axis-specific functions act on the C axis (JOG mode, handwheel override). 1)

B1 QUIT (Cancel, do not accept) A

This is used to delete the preselection key. (PCU)

B2 JOG (Hand operation mode)

Switch-over to the JOG operation mode (manual). (MSST, PCU)

B5
reverse

B6 Measurement control resolution

After selection of this key the current value of the measurement control can be dis-
played. (PCU) 1)

C1 Cycle start
The currently selected workpiece program is started. (MSST, PCU) 1)

C2 SET (Set-up operating mode)

Switch-over to the SET operating mode (Set-up) (MSST, PCU)1)

C5
not assigned 1)

C6 Alter coolant quantity (optional)

The current quantity is displayed in percent on the lowest line (PCU display). This
can be altered between a defined minimum and maximum using the handwheel. If
this function is selected, then no new quantity of coolant can be set with the B com-
mand B20. The INC key is not assigned any function. (PCU) 1)

D1 Cycle interrupt
The currently selected workpiece program is stopped. (MSST, PCU) 1)

1001115929/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 19
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

D2 Selection and deselection of “Program.Check with Handwheel”

This key allows you to stop a program running in automatic mode. Although a resid-
ual value is displayed, the machine does not run. With the handwheel you can give
a feed motion. The moving speed of the axis concerned depends on how fast you
turn the handwheel. Additionally, you can change the resolution of the handwheel
by means of the INC key.
By pressing the D2 key again the machine will return to automatic mode. This func-
tion enables a program or the settings (dressing, tool pos. etc.) to be checked sim-
ply and reliably.

D5 Shoulder machining
This key is for selecting the shoulder machining for the manual cycle. (PCU) 1)

D6 Reverse position
Set the reverse position on the left or in front (manual cycle). (PCU) 1)

E1 Cycle stop
The currently selected workpiece program is terminated and the axes are moved to
the retract position (as a rule 1mm in front of the software limit switch in X) It can
also be used as a reset key. (MSST, PCU) 1)

E2 INC
Changing the step size of the handwheel resolution. The current value is displayed
in the lowest line of the PCU display. The resolution of the integrated measurement
control can likewise be altered with this key. (PCU) 1)

E5 Diameter machining
This key is used to select the diameter machining for the manual cycle. (PCU) 1)

E6 Reverse position
Set the reverse position to the right or behind (manual cycle). 1)

E7 Altering the Sensitron sensitivity

The current sensitivity is displayed on the lowest line on the PCU display. This can
be altered using the handwheel; between 0 and 99 percent. The INC key is not
assigned any function. (PCU) 1)

E8 Zeroing the display of C-axis

If a workpiece is manually aligned on the circumference (form grinding), you need to
zero the axis before releasing the acknowledge key. This is only possible if no pro-
gram is running. 1)

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 20 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

E9 Inching the workpiece spindle

The workpiece spindle rotates slowly as long as the key is pressed. When the doors
are open, the accept key must also be pressed. For safety reasons, the workpiece
spindle rotates at a maximum speed of 50 m/min. (PCU)

H1 Workpiece / Machine coordinates A

Changes the display of the positions between the workpiece and machine coordi-
nate systems (Siemens user interface). (MSST) 1)

K1 Spindle Stop
Switches off grinding spindle 1. (MSST)

K2 Spindle Start
Switches on grinding spindle 1. (MSST)

K3 Feed Stop
Stops the axis feed (MSST)

K4 Feed Start
Starts the axis feed (MSST)

L0 Emergency Stop
Switches off all power. (MSST)

L1 Power off in machine room

This display lights up GREEN when power is switched off in the machine room. You
can therefore be certain that no movement is being carried out in the machine room.
(MSST)

L2 Acknowledge Button
This key must be pressed to move an axis or to carry out M commands if the oper-
ating doors are open. The key on the other side of the PCU has the same function.
(MSST, PCU)

L3 Input enable (key-operated switch)

In the 0 position all inputs are blocked with the exception of some corrections.
(MSST)

1001115929/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 21
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

L4 Block enable (key-operated switch)

 B-axis
 Operating modes
 F keys
 C-axis function
 etc.

L5 Block enable (key-operated switch)

 B-axis
 Operating modes
 F keys
 C-axis function
 etc.

M1 Mouse
In order to move the mouse cursor, move the button in the appropriate direction.

M2 Left mouse button

M3 Right mouse button

N1 Reset button
Deletes error messages and alarms (MSST)

R1 Reference point traversing (operating mode) is only necessary for an incre-

mental measurement system.
See message screen
Switch-over to the operating mode reference point traversing. (MSST)

R2 MDI (operating mode)

Switch-over to the MDI operating mode. (MSST)

R3 Switch optional programmed stop on/off

 The workpiece program will be stopped for all programmed M1. (MSST)
 Switching the Hide Block function on/off. Program sentences with “/” at the
beginning of the line will be skipped.

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 22 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING!
If a program block with the remove block function “/” is skipped, then the above-
mentioned key “Optional programmed stop” must definitely be switched on. If
the key is not switched on, then the remove block function “/” is not active.
A
R4 Switch power on and off
When the doors are shut, then all power systems are switched on (hydraulic sys-
tem, pneumatics, lighting,...). If the key is pressed for more than 3 seconds, then the
power systems switch off.

R5 EDIT (operating mode)

Switch-over to the EDIT operating mode. (MSST)

R6 Switching a single block on/off

The machine stops after each program block. (MSST)

R6 + R3 Expanded message display

When the key combination “Optional programmed Stop On” and “Single block
On” is pressed simultaneously, then additional messages can be displayed on the
“Custom” screen. With “RESET” the messages are hidden again.

R7 Release operating doors

The operating doors are automatically locked when the power systems are switched
on. After each release, the doors must be opened: this is indicated by the key flash-
ing. The kind of flashing also gives information about the status of the machine at
the moment when the key “release operating doors” is pressed:
 Illuminated key flashes slowly: . . . ....
Doors can be opened.
 Illuminated key flashes quickly: -----------
The status of the machine does not permit the doors to be opened, e.g. contact
guard open.
 Permanently lit: __________
The doors are open

G1 Operation in minus direction

In JOG mode the currently selected axis is moved in a minus direction. (MSST,
PCU)

G2 Operation in plus direction

In JOG mode the currently selected axis is moved in a plus direction. (MSST, PCU)

1001115929/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 23
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

G3 Rapid traverse overlay

When this key is pressed at the same time as a direction key, then the travel speed
is increased (Job mode). The handwheel rating is temporarily set to maximum.
When the operating doors are open or as long as not all the axes have been refer-
enced, the maximum travel speed is limited to 1000 mm/min. (MSST, PCU)

G4 Handwheel
If the X, Z or other axis has been selected, then the handwheel can be used for
operation. The step size for each handwheel resolution can therefore be altered
using the INC key. (PCU)

G6 Spindle Override (altering the workpiece spindle speed)

The currently programmed spindle speed can be altered here in percent. This takes
the minimum and maximum workpiece spindle speeds into account. (MSST, PCU)

G7 Feed Override (altering the travel and fast feed speeds)

The currently programmed travel and fast feed speeds can be altered here in per-
cent (the maximum speed is reduced when the operating doors are open). In the 0
percent position the axes are stopped. (MSST, PCU)
Using the M782 command, the rating of the override switch for rapid traversing (G0)
can be reduced from normal 1% step sizes to 0.1% step sizes.
The M783 command selects the normal 1% rating again.

NOTE!
Override in Siemens-controlled machines
When using machines with Siemens control, two Feed Override option switches
(MSST and PCU) are available. Only the one which was moved last is used.
If a Feed Override option switch is turned to the 0 percent position, then the axes
are stopped.
If neither of the option switches reacts any more, then the switches must be syn-
chronized by turning both to the 0 position.

1. not on PCU II

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 24 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A.10 Focus control

This section gives an explanation of how the window modules react in relation to a
click of the mouse or use of the keyboard and how operation of StuderWIN is funda-
mentally set up.
A

Fig. A-11 program_new

The cursor moves to the next position using the up and down  arrow keys or the
Tab key. For example, in order to select a program, the cursor must be moved into
the program field using Page Down or Page Up. A program can be selected using
the up and down arrow keys.
To cancel the selection, press the ESC key.
The cursor behaves the same way in all fields.

1001115929/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 25
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

Fig. A-12 processview_details_leg

The individual views in a window can be selected using the Page Up / Page Down
keys. The active view always has a yellow frame.
The example of process visualization shows a window with six views (A, B, C, D, E
and F). View E has the entry focus.
Changing the active view displays new soft keys on the screen.

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 26 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A.11 Formula parser

The formula parser enables the input and evaluation of mathematical expressions in
an editing field.
An expression must always begin with a ‚=’ in order for it to be evaluated, otherwise
the text in the editing field remains unchanged. A
The formula is evaluated immediately if the editing field is exited and the formula
does not contain an error. If there are errors in the formula or in the editing field, the
field is marked red.

Examples 



The following operations, functions and constants are available:

Operations and Functions

+,- Addition, Subtraction
*,/ Multiplication, Division
^ Power
sin, asin sine, inverse sine
cos, acos cosine, inverse cosine
tan, atan tangent, inverse tangent
sqrt square root
abs value
ln natural logarithm
log common logarithm

Constants
pi Circle constant 

1001115929/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 A - 27
STUDERWIN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS / STUDERWIN

1001115929/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

A - 28 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROCESS SCREEN

B Process screen

The process view enables monitoring of the grinding process. The most important
information is displayed, such as axis positions, remaining distance, the program
running, integrated measurement control (optional), contact detection (optional) or
process details.
Various views are available. For multi channel machines, both channels can be dis-
played next to one another
 B.2 "Multi-channel Screen",  B-31
The individual views (A-F) are described in more detail in Chapter B.8 "Views",
 B-42 B

B.1 Standard Screen

Fig. B-1 details

Channel 1 / 2 Display of the first or second machine channel

Channel 1 + 2 Process screen for simultaneous view of machine channels 1 and 2

 B.2 "Multi-channel Screen",  B-31

Machine / Switching the coordinate display between absolute coordinates and machine coor-
Absolute dinates
 B.8.1 "View “A” Absolute positions / Machine positions",  B-42

Load Opens the dialog box for selecting a program in order to load it into the active chan-
nel on the control system.

Edit Opens the active program so that it can be edited.

100115933/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 B - 29
PROCESS SCREEN / STUDERWIN
Loader Displays the process view of the loader  StuderLOADER Operating Instructions.

Fig. B-2 details

Shows the standard screen

Shows the configuration screen

Shows the third screen

Sensitron The.

Settings Opens the settings for the views.

 B.7 "Process Screen Settings",  B-41

100115933/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

B - 30 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROCESS SCREEN

B.2 Multi-channel Screen

Fig. B-3

This screen enables the simultaneous display of both channels. The absolute posi-
tions and the remaining distances, both programs and the status of the channels are
displayed for both channels.
In View C can in channel Sensitron can also be displayed. (Option). Simultaneous
display in both channels is not possible.
Loading or opening a program for editing is not possible in this view.

100115934/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 B - 31
PROCESS SCREEN / STUDERWIN

B.3 Block start

Block start can be used to start a grinding program from a particular position.
Starting the block start function
Load the desired program in the program view.

Fig. B-4 processview_main

The “Process manipulation” soft key is used to enable the soft key register for the
required functions. In program view the required position for the block start must
now be selected in the grinding program.

Fig. B-5 processview_sk_pb

The program view is switched into block start mode using the “Block start” soft key.

100115934/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

B - 32 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROCESS SCREEN

Fig. B-6 processview_pictostart

Additional blocks can be displayed or hidden in the grinding program when pro-
gramming (Edit soft key) if required.

The program is started using start cycle.

The program remains in block start mode until the STOP soft key is pressed.

CAUTION!
This function does not check the initial conditions such as grinding wheel selec-
tion.

100115934/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 B - 33
PROCESS SCREEN / STUDERWIN

B.4 Reworking individual workpiece sections

Scope of application
When grinding workpieces a repeated problem is that individual workpiece sections
need to be reworked because the dimensions are not correct. For this reason, a sin-
gle grinding cycle can be started again using this function without the program hav-
ing to be modified.

Starting the regrinding function

Load the program with the cycle for regrinding in the program view.

Fig. B-7 processview_main

The “Process manipulation” soft key is used to enable the soft key register for the
required functions. Now select the cycle for regrinding in the program view.

Fig. B-8 processview_sk_pb

Switch the screen into the regrinding mode using the “Regrinding” soft key.

100115934/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

B - 34 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROCESS SCREEN

Fig. B-9 processview_regrind

Regrinding mode
If required, additional blocks can be displayed or hidden in the grinding program
when programming (Edit soft key).
The following process manipulations can be carried out in regrinding mode:

 Cycles can be displayed or hidden manually

 Corrections for specific fits on the cycle for regrinding

 Temporary corrections on the cycle for regrinding

 The allowance can be changed for the cycle for regrinding

The program is started using start cycle.

The program remains in regrinding mode until the STOP soft key is pressed.
Applications
Two different applications are distinguished when reworking:

 The dimensions are incorrect, because deformations in the workpiece result

in an
error.
In this case a permanent correction should be made and the workpiece section
should be reworked. Permanent corrections can only be undertaken if the
affected grinding cycle contains a valid block number for specific fit corrections.

 For very expensive workpieces or in the case of very narrow tolerances, a work-
piece section is intentionally ground too large. In this case a temporary correc-
tion should be made which should be reset to zero after the reworking so that
the next workpiece is also ground too large.

100115934/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 B - 35
PROCESS SCREEN / STUDERWIN
Temporary corrections are reset after exiting the regrinding mode using the STOP
soft key.

CAUTION!
Longitudinal positioning is never carried out as it is assumed that it is always the
same workpiece that is being machined.

Restrictions
Non-supported cycles
Contour cycle G9210
Form grinding Straight plunge
Form grinding Multi plunge G9225
Form grinding Shoulder plunge G9228
Form grinding High-speed G9730

NOTE!
If an ISO block is programmed before the grinding cycle that is to be reground,
then regrinding cannot be selected.

100115934/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

B - 36 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROCESS SCREEN

B.5 MDI Process Screen

If the operating mode MDI is selected, then the MDI process screen appears in
Process. This allows input of short programs or commands.
Repeated commands or instructions can be assigned to five different softkeys 
B.5.1 "MDI templates",  B-38

Fig. B-10 process_mdi

Edit Submenu for creating and managing MDI templates

Curve Switching from MDI edit field to curve

MDI Switching from curve to MDI edit field

Load The entries are loaded onto the control system

M commands A list of the M commands is displayed. If the number (without M) is now entered,
then the M command function is displayed.
After the program has been written in the edit field, it must be transferred to the con-
trol system using the [Load] softkey.
If a program or command is restarted, then it can be selected once more from the
curve. To do this, press the [Curve] soft key and select using the arrow keys ( ,).
Using [ENTER] the program can be loaded in the edit field once more.

Important!
The entries which deviate from the standard ISO codes must be entered specifi-
cally to the control system.
In MDI mode there is no input help available on syntax

100115934/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 B - 37
PROCESS SCREEN / STUDERWIN

B.5.1 MDI templates

Fig. B-11 process_mdi2

MDI 1-5 Calls the program or command assigned to the softkey

The cursor jumps up one softkey

The cursor jumps down one softkey

Assign The program is assigned to the selected softkey from the edit field
The program or command must be written in the edit field. The required soft key can
now be selected using the [Assign ,] soft key and assigned using [Assign].
The program can now be loaded onto the control system with the softkey [MDI 1-5].

100115934/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

B - 38 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROCESS SCREEN

B.6 Logging measurement data

Logging makes it possible for measurement data to be recorded during machining.

The measurement values which are measured by the control measurement cycles
can be recorded in the machining program.

 Logging cycle G215

 E.53 "G215 Logging measurement data (option)",  E-324

 Control measurement with in-process gauging G211

 E.50 "G211 Control measurement (option)",  E-315

 Control measurement with active touch probe G9782 in X B

E.63 "G9782 Control measurement X (option)",  E-340

 Control measurement with active touch probe G9783 in Z

E.64 "G9783 Control measurement Z (option)",  E-344

Logging must be activated in the process screen by using the “Measurement log”
softkey.

Fig. B-12 processview_details2

Measuring Shows the screen for logging measurement data.

log

100115934/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 B - 39
PROCESS SCREEN / STUDERWIN

Fig. B-13 processview_protocol

Switch on: Switches on the data logging

Switch off: Switches off the data logging

Start: Resets the workpiece counter and begins a new record of measurement values
(lot).

Print The data will be generated in the form of a pdf file, which can then be printed out.
Either the current or the preceding record can be printed.

Fig. B-14 processview_protocol_charge

After this you can specify a name for the record, which will then appear in the log.

Fig. B-15 processview_protocol_charge2

100115934/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

B - 40 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROCESS SCREEN

B.7 Process Screen Settings

Fig. B-16 processview_settings

Hide axes If Hide axes is activated, then the axis is no longer displayed in the process
screens.

Current start dis- When the Process Screen is first displayed, the selected screen is shown
play

Screen to be dis- The selected screen is displayed.

played statically

100115934/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 B - 41
PROCESS SCREEN / STUDERWIN

B.8 Views

B.8.1 View “A” Absolute positions / Machine positions

Fig. B-17 processview_details_leg

The axis display can be switched from absolute positions to machine positions and
vice versa using the softkeys “Machine” or “Absolute” .

B.8.2 View “B” Remaining distance

Fig. B-18 processview_details_leg

The “Remaining distance” view displays the distance which the axes in this block
still have to travel.

B.8.3 View “C” Status / Cycle time

Fig. B-19 processview_details_leg

Displays the active M and G commands as well as the current grinding wheel, the
workpiece spindle speed and the feed.

Fig. B-20 process_konfig_time

The cycle times are listed in this view.

100115934/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

B - 42 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROCESS SCREEN

B.8.4 View “D” Dynamic view

Fig. B-21 processview_details_leg

The Dynamic view can show various views such as process information or the
measurement control.
B
B.8.5 View “E” Program

Fig. B-22 processview_details_leg

In automatic mode in Program view, the block which is being processed is dis-
played.

B.8.6 View “F” Process details / Load / Configuration

If this view is selected, then it is possible to switch between the different views using
the softkey Load / Process details / Configuration.

Fig. B-23 processview_details_leg

In Process details, information is displayed on dressing, number of parts ground etc.

The softkey “Reset” resets the workpiece counter.

100115934/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 B - 43
PROCESS SCREEN / STUDERWIN

Fig. B-24 process_load

The performance screen displays the axis loading as well as the tool drives.

Fig. B-25 process_konfig_time

The current machine configuration is displayed.

Fig. B-26 process_last_corr_val

The last correction value / measured values are displayed

100115934/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

B - 44 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C Setting up

This chapter covers the following topics:

  C.1 "General set-up",  C-45
  C.4 "Machine Configurator",  C-51
  C.8 "Set-up program",  C-75
  C.17 "Setting up special positions",  C-121
  C.21 "Accessories set-up",  C-128
  C.31 "Set up loader",  C-148
  C.32 "Assisted manual mode",  C-153

C.1 General set-up

The term “set-up” refers to the following:

C
 setting configuration values
 registering reference points

The user is guided and supported in these tasks by texts and graphics on the
machine controller.

All set-up activities are based on a clear set-up concept entailing the following key
principles:
 Separation of rare set-up procedures and common set-up activities
 Transparent programming with the aid of the multi-profile technique using grind-
ing wheel reference points
 Comprehensive and expedient correction facilities

Despite all the support provided, it must also be noted that the set-up process has a
major influence on the subsequent activities.

If accessories such as
  C.22 "Integrated measurement control",  C-129
  C.23 "Circumferential Positioning Passive",  C-130
  C.24 "Length Positioning Passive",  C-131
  C.25 "Longitudinal positioning active",  C-132
  C.27 "Longitudinal positioning using Sensitron",  C-137
  C.28 "Setting up touch dressing",  C-140
  C.29 "Set up NC-tailstock",  C-144
  C.30 "Set up tool measurement device (optional)",  C-147

are required for the grinding process, these must also be set up.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 45
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.1.1 Selecting Set-up mode

This chapter describes setting up without Quickset Programming the dressing units
and grinding wheels is described in the section “Programming”.

1. Select “Studer basic screen”

Fig. C-1 main_setup

2. Select the set-up menu using the keys [,] and [ENTER] or using the mouse
or the [Set-up] hotkey
3. Select the machine operating mode SET
4. Select the desired submenu

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 46 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-2 setup_mainmenu

CNC set-up  Setting up CNC without Quickset  C.2 "Set up without QUICK-SET",  C-48
 Setting up CNC with Quickset  C.3 "Setting up with QUICK-SET",  C-49

Set-up for spec.  Swivel position  C.18 "Set-up swivel position",  C-122
positions  Return position X  C.19 "Retraction position in X",  C-124
 Return position Z  C.20 "Retraction position in Z",  C-126

Accessories set-  Setting up measurement control

up  C.22 "Integrated measurement control",  C-129
 Longitudinal positioning passive
 C.24 "Length Positioning Passive",  C-131
 Longitudinal positioning active
 C.25 "Longitudinal positioning active",  C-132
 Longitudinal positioning using Sensitron
 C.27 "Longitudinal positioning using Sensitron",  C-137
 Setting up touch dressing  C.28 "Setting up touch dressing",  C-140
 Setting up NC tailstock  C.29 "Set up NC-tailstock",  C-144

Set up loader  Defining loader programs  C.31.1 "Defining the loader program",  C-149

Assisted manual  Manual mode  C.32 "Assisted manual mode",  C-153

mode

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 47
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.2 Set up without QUICK-SET

In order to have the machine working correctly, a number of values require to be

entered:
 Definition of where the grinding wheel is located on the grinding spindle head
(grinding spindle position)
 Geometric form of the grinding wheel
 Method and position for grinding wheel dressing
 Where the dressing tools are located, type and geometric form of the fitted
dressing tools

These data must be entered using the machine configurator.

For every grinding wheel involved in the grinding process, the machine requires a
precise knowledge of the interdependencies between the key reference points

These are:
 The position of the dressing tool (A) in relation to the reference point of the
grinding wheel (S).
 The position of the workpiece (W) in relation to the reference point of the grind-
ing wheel (S).

The dependencies are configured with the help of the guided set-up program.
These interdependencies result in the following scope of applications for the grind-
ing wheel:
With each grinding wheel, dressing and grinding can be carried out at an
angle. The dressing and grinding angles must not be identical, however.

Fig. C-3 gr85070

Key: M: Zero point of the machine coordinate system

W: Zero point of the workpiece coordinate system
A: Zero point of the dressing tool coordinate system
S(1): Reference point of the 1st grinding wheel
S(2): Reference point of the 2nd grinding wheel
S(3): Reference point of the 3nd grinding wheel
ABS_X:Value in the absolute coordinate system
ABS_Z:Z value in the absolute coordinate system

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 48 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
Basically, the machine needs to register these reference points once. Entering all
reference points in the correct sequence is termed “Basic set-up”.

If only individual reference points in the whole system are altered, such as:
 changing the grinding wheel
 changing or moving the dressing tool
 changing to another workpiece

there is no need to carry out a “basic set-up”. In this case only the modified refer-
ence points need to be reset. In order to avoid unnecessary set-up or reset effort,
we recommend that no more than one of these reference points should be modified.
This avoids having to carry out a basic set-up of the machine.

C.3 Setting up with QUICK-SET

In order to have the machine working correctly, a number of values require to be

entered: C
 geometric form of the grinding wheel and how it should be dressed
 type and geometric form of the mounted dressing tools
 Definition of where the grinding wheel is located on the grinding spindle head
(grinding spindle position)

For every grinding wheel involved in the grinding process, the machine requires a
precise knowledge of the interdependencies between the key reference points.

These are:
 Relationship of probe centre T to centre of rotation of wheelhead (H)
 Relationship of grinding wheel reference point (S) to centre of rotation of wheel-
head (H)
 Relationship of dressing tool (A) to centre of rotation of wheelhead (H)
 Relationship of workpiece (W) to centre of rotation of wheelhead (H)

As all relationships depend on the centre of rotation of the wheelhead (H), the fol-
lowing applications are available for the grinding wheel and the touch probe:
With each grinding wheel, dressing can be carried out at one angle and grind-
ing can be carried out at as many angles as wished.
The touch probe can also be used for set-up procedures.

Fig. C-4 gr85070a

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 49
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
Key: M: Zero point of the machine coordinate system
W: Zero point of the workpiece coordinate system
A: Zero point of the dressing tool coordinate system
S(1): Reference point of the 1st grinding wheel
S(2): Reference point of the 2nd grinding wheel
S(3): Reference point of the 3nd grinding wheel
H-T: Reference point for 3rd grinding wheel
H-S: Reference point for 3rd grinding wheel
H-A: Reference point for 3rd grinding wheel
H-W: Reference point for 3rd grinding wheel
ABS_X:Value in the absolute coordinate system
ABS_Z:Z value in the absolute coordinate system

Basically, the machine needs to register these reference points once. Entering all
reference points in the correct sequence is termed “Basic set-up”.

If only individual reference points in the whole system are modified, such as
 changing the grinding wheel
 changing or moving the dressing tool
 changing to another workpiece

there is no need to carry out a “basic set-up”. In this case only the modified refer-
ence points need to be reset. In order to avoid unnecessary set-up or reset effort,
we recommend that no more than one of these reference points should be modified.
This avoids having to carry out a basic set-up of the machine.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 50 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.4 Machine Configurator

The CNC machine can be configured by means of the Configurator. The desired
grinding wheels, dressing units and turning tools can be assigned and configured to
pre-defined positions. No CNC data is lost during configuration. The current CNC
configuration data is not overwritten until the CNC machine is updated. Renewed
set-up is then necessary. This enables configuration of a new machining during
ongoing machining, as the data on the CNC machine are only loaded when [Update
Data] is executed.
Configurator Assistant

Set-up menu

CNC set-up

Fig. C-5 setup_conf1

Close Back to Main menu “Set up”

Data Update data

Update

[Mach. config]

Fig. C-6 setup_conf2

Return to main menu

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 51
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
Reset

Fig. C-7 setup_conf3_1

Resets the configuration to the configuration set-up on the machine.

Move If a movable element is selected, this can be moved to the left.

Move If a movable element is selected, this can be moved to the right.

Synch. start The memory will be read again and the graphical display set up again.
Configurator CNC configuration
Switch over Assistant to CNC configuration using [Page Up]

Fig. C-8 setup_conf4

Close Back to Main menu “Set up”

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 52 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
[Axes]

Fig. C-9 setup_conf5

The different axes can be moved to “+” and “-” using the soft keys in the same way
as the actual machine room is configured.

[Graphic]

Fig. C-10 setup_conf6

Save the current graphic settings.

[Zoom]

Fig. C-11 setup_conf7

The two soft keys can be used to zoom in or zoom out.

C
[Move]

Fig. C-12 setup_conf10

The view can be moved in the direction of the arrows using the soft keys.

[Rotation]

Fig. C-13 setup_conf12

The view can be rotated in the direction of the arrows and axes using the soft keys.

[Save] Saves the current graphics settings.

[Reset] Resets the graphics.

[Info] If an element is selected in the machine room, then information on this element is
displayed. (Element selection using the mouse or “dressing tools” or “tool positions”
in the relevant field).

[Display relation- The relationships between the reference points are displayed, e.g. grinding wheel -
ships] dressing unit, wheelhead - workpiece. If the relationship is shown in red, then this
still needs to be set up, if it is blue, then it is already set up.

C.4.1 Assign workpiece

This step enables a workpiece to be assigned or the clamping device changed.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 53
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-14 setup_conf8

C.4.1.1 Assign new workpiece

Fig. C-15 setup_conf8

Geometry and machining information for the process to be set up can be defined by
assigning a new workpiece.
When the program is first started the “default.workpiece” is automatically used. A
new workpiece can be created using the “New” key or an existing one reassigned
using “Open”.
If there are several machining processes, then the required one must be selected.
This is normally done for workpieces which are machined on both sides.

Fig. C-16 setup_conf11

Which tools are to be used for configuring the workpiece?

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 54 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-17 setup_conf13

This can be used to select which tools to use for a new configuration of the work-
piece.

Cancel Cancelling the assignment and returning to the assistant. The changes are lost.

New Creating a new workpiece

Workpiece Editing an existing workpiece

editing a

Load Loading the new workpiece from the directory

C
Basic view Switching to basic view from expert view

OK Saves the entries and returns to the assistant

C.4.1.2 Modify clamping devices

Modify clamping
devices
Fig. C-18 setup_conf8

Fig. C-19 setup_conf14

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 55
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
Open clamping
device

Fig. C-20 setup_conf14

Fig. C-21 setup_conf20

The required clamping device can be selected from the clamping device catalog.

Combination

Fig. C-22 setup_conf21

Definition of which clamping device is first / second

Signal to loader

Fig. C-23 setup_conf21

In loader mode the user can specify which clamping device sends the clamped/
released signal to the loader.

Additional move-
ment

Fig. C-24 setup_conf21

2. Clamping device

Fig. C-25 setup_conf21

Delayed opening / closing: Time in milliseconds between the opening / closing

from first to second Clamping device.

Cancel Cancelling the assignment and returning to the assistant. The changes are lost.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 56 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
OK Saves the entries and returns to the assistant.

C.4.2 Assign dressing unit

Fig. C-26 setup_conf15

C
C.4.2.1 Assign new dressing unit
The position to be assigned to the dressing unit can be selected from the table using
the mouse or arrow keys. A dressing unit can be allocated using [ENTER].

Fig. C-27 setup_conf16

Cancel Cancelling the assignment and returning to the assistant. The changes are lost.

New Creating a new dressing unit

 E.1.3 "Creation of new programs",  E-191
 E.4.2.1 "Grinding Wheel Definition",  E-207

Load Select the dressing program with the mouse or arrow keys and open using the
[Open] key or [Enter]

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 57
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-28 program_open_dresser

Fig. C-29 setup_conf17

The dressing unit must be assigned to a dressing station in the machine room.
Depending on the options, more or fewer stations are available. A station can be
selected using the mouse or the arrow keys and [Enter].

OK Saves the entries and returns to the assistant.

Editing dressing Editing an existing dressing unit: only possible if a dressing unit is open
unit

C.4.2.2 Assign rotary dressing tools

Rotary dressing tools are assigned using the same principle. In addition to the
dressing unit there must be a valid spindle configuration assigned for the dressing
station. The spindle configuration contains the drive-specific data which are used to
run the dressing drive.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 58 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-30 setup_conf33

Click on the “Open” key on the dressing station which you wish to use. The following
dialog shows all available spindle configurations for dressing stations. Select the
configuration which matches the mounted spindle.

Fig. C-31 settings_open_dressspindle

This procedure only has to be performed once. The assignment is then retained.

CAUTION!
Ensure that the spindle configuration corresponds to the spindle which is actually
connected. Check the configuration if necessary to prevent any malfunction.
If you use different dressing spindles on the same dressing station, then these
must also be assigned immediately after the mechanical exchange in this view to
avoid errors and malfunction.

F6 Define high-frequency spindles C "Setting up",  C-45

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 59
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
F7 Assign high-frequency spindles C "Setting up",  C-45

C.4.2.3 Modify dressing unit

Fig. C-32 setup_conf18

Modifying a dressing unit which is already set up.

The position in which the dressing unit should be modified can be selected from the
table using the mouse or arrow keys. A dressing unit can be modified by pressing
[ENTER] or clicking.

Fig. C-33 setup_conf18

Fig. C-34 setup_conf19

Re-configure Re-configure dressing unit which is already set up

OK Saves the entries and returns to the assistant.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 60 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
The following steps can be carried out:
 Assign dressing unit to a new dressing station
Select new dressing station  OK
 Reregister dressing unit
Reregister click on  OK

C.4.2.4 Remove dressing unit

Fig. C-35 setup_conf18

Removing a dressing unit which is already set up.

The position can be selected in the table using the mouse or arrow keys. A dressing
unit can be removed by pressing [ENTER] or clicking.

Fig. C-36 setup_conf22

Confirm remove with Yes.

C.4.3 Assign grinding wheel

Fig. C-37 setup_conf27

The position can be selected in the table using the mouse or arrow keys. A grinding
wheel can be assigned by pressing [ENTER] or clicking.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 61
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.4.3.1 Assigning a new grinding wheel

Fig. C-38 setup_conf28

Cancel Cancelling the assignment and returning to the assistant. The changes are lost.

New Creating a new grinding wheel

 E.1.3 "Creation of new programs",  E-191
 E.4.2 "Grinding wheel editor",  E-206

Load Opening a saved grinding wheel

Fig. C-39 program_open_wheel

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 62 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-40 setup_conf29

The grinding wheel can be assigned to a defined dressing unit in the machine room
with which the grinding wheel is to be dressed. Different dressing units can be
defined for the left and right sides of the grinding wheel. A dressing unit can be
selected using the mouse or the arrow keys and [Enter].

If the symbol is selected, then the grinding wheel will not be dressed (e.g. diamond
wheel)

Grind. wheel Editing an existing grinding wheel

editing a

Remeasure Remeasure grinding wheel which is already set up. This will reset the zero point of
the grinding wheel.

OK Saves the entries and returns to the assistant.

C.4.3.2 Assign new internal grinding wheel

An internal grinding wheel is assigned according to the same principle as an exter-
nal grinding wheel. A spindle configuration can also be immediately assigned in
addition to the grinding wheel. The spindle configuration contains the drive-specific
data which are used to run the internal grinding drive.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 63
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-41 setup_conf34

Click on the “Open” key near assign internal grinding spindle. The following dialog
shows all available spindle configurations for grinding spindles. Select the configu-
ration which matches the mounted spindle.

Fig. C-42 Settings_spindle_open

This procedure only has to be performed once. The assignment is then retained.

CAUTION!
Ensure that the spindle configuration corresponds to the spindle which is actually
connected. Check the configuration if necessary to prevent any malfunction.
If you use different grinding spindles on the same tool position, then these must
also be assigned immediately after the mechanical exchange in this view to avoid
errors and malfunction.

F6 Define high-frequency spindles C "Setting up",  C-45

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 64 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
F7 Assign high-frequency spindles C "Setting up",  C-45

C.4.3.3 Modify grinding wheel

Fig. C-43 setup_conf30

Modifying a grinding wheel which is already set up.

The position can be selected in the table using the mouse or arrow keys. A grinding
wheel can be modified by pressing [ENTER] or clicking.

Fig. C-44 setup_conf29

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 65
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
Re-configure Re-configure grinding wheel which is already set up

OK Saves the entries and returns to the assistant.

The following steps can be carried out:

 Assign grinding wheel to a new dressing tool or leave unassigned
Select new dressing tool OK
 Remeasure grinding wheel Click on
Remeasure  OK

C.4.3.4 Remove grinding wheel

Fig. C-45 setup_conf30

Removing a grinding wheel which is already set up.

The position can be selected in the table using the mouse or arrow keys. A grinding
wheel can be removed by pressing [ENTER] or clicking.

Confirm remove using Yes.

C.5 Assigning turning tool

Fig. C-46 setup_conf23

The position can be selected in the table using the mouse or arrow keys. The turn-
ing tool turret can be equipped with a mouse click or by hitting the [ENTER] key.

C.5.1 Loading tool turret

A tool position to be assigned to a tool must be selected in the table using the
mouse or arrow keys.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 66 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-47 assign_turningtool1.bmp

Close Closing the assignment and returning to the assistant or configurator.

Groups Identical tools may be defined in tool groups.

 C.5.1.2 "Tool groups (option)",  C-70

Edit A new tool can be defined or the existing tool edited for the highlighted turret posi-
tion.

Select tool The tool selected in the table is swiveled into the working position.

Import A saved tool is imported.

Export The selected tool can be saved.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 67
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-48 assign_turningtool3.bmp

Cancel Changes to the turning tool are rejected and the focus is returned to the tool list.

New cutting edge Gives the tool a new cutting edge. Up to five cutting edges may be defined
(optional).

OK The changes are saved and the focus placed on the tool
list again.

Measure Tool Opens the dialog box for automatic measurement of turning tools
 C.5.1.1 "Turning tool measurement (option)",  C-69

Delete cutting If there is more than one cutting edge and the cursor is placed on the last cutting
edge edge, the latter can be deleted here (optional).

Tool type: The types of tool which can be mounted on this turret station are shown in the select
menu.

The following tools may be available for selection (depending on options):

 Turning steel for outer / internal application
 Horizontal / vertical measuring probe (only available at Position 1)
 Horizontal / vertical milling cutter
 Horizontal / vertical drill

Principal dimen- The tool dimensions in X and Z and the radius of the insert must be entered.
sions:

Orientation: The orientation must be specified so that the tool radius compensation can calculate
correctly, and no shape and weight errors arise due to the radius. With a mouse
click, or by hitting the Enter key, you can open the following window. Now the rele-
vant orientation can be selected using the arrow keys and confirmed using [Enter].
The window then closes again.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 68 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-49 assign_turningtool_orientation

Sister tool: No function at present.

C.5.1.1 Turning tool measurement (option)

Measuring the tools on the turning tool turret can be done directly on the machine if
the option is available.
For the measurement to work, the measuring probe must be mounted and set up on
the machine. If the probe is not set up, then the error message 1872 appears.
C.30 "Set up tool measurement device (optional)",  C-147
Depending on the selected orientation, measurement in direction “B” will be carried
out in Z+ or Z-. C
Measuring proce- It is possible to select which directions to measure in.
dure: For turning tools, it is recommended to always measure “A” and “B”.

Fig. C-50 assign_turningtool_measure

Cancel Closing the measurement and returning to assignment of the turning tools.

Pos. Search Exit

End Ending the measurement and returning to assignment

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 69
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
C.5.1.2 Tool groups (option)
Defining tool groups enables identical tools to be combined. If a tool from a group is
selected and its working life has expired, then the next tool is automatically called.
The working life can be controlled in the program using the G9612 cycle.

Fig. C-51 setup_conf24

Back Close tool group configuration and return to turning tool assignment

Save Saves the changes in the groups

Edit Edits the group

Insert Inserts a new group. A maximum of 6 (turret with 12 tool positions) or 4 (turret with
8 tool positions) groups can be created per turret.

Delete Deletes the selected group

Rename Renames the selected group

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 70 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
Edit group

Fig. C-52 setup_conf25

Cancel Cancels and rejects the changes to the group

Accept Saves the changes to the group

Upwards Moves the tool upwards

Downwards Moves the tool downwards

Insert Inserts a tool in the group

Fig. C-53 setup_conf26

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 71
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
If a tool has already been assigned to a group, then only tools of this type will
appear.

Remove Removes the selected tool from the group

Important!
Only tools with identical geometry may be mounted in the same group in order to
avoid damage to the machine.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 72 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.6 Quickset

Fig. C-54 setup_conf31

C.6.1 Reset active touch probe (option)

The active touch probe must be reset:

 When the machine is commissioned
 After the control memory has been completely deleted (e.g. after a Software
update) C
 If the touch probe has been modified mechanically (e.g. touch probe
exchanged)

Fig. C-55 setup_conf32

Confirm reset with Yes.

After resetting the touch probe it needs to be recalibrated.
 C.10 "Register dressing tool / calibrate grinding wheel on the dressing tool",
 C-82

C.7 Update data

When the machine configuration is complete the data on the CNC can be updated.
Individual points can also be configured separately. (e.g. grinding wheel, dressing
tool) The existing configuration will be over-written. The set-up page is started.

 C.8 "Set-up program",  C-75

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 73
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-56 setup_conf3

Start The data are written to the CNC

Fig. C-57 setup_conf3

The CNC program is executed automatically

The “Data update” program is closed automatically and the “Set-up program” screen
appears.

Important!
Set up relations are only set up as long as the configuration has not been altered
mechanically. Such alterations are not recognized by the software and thus
require to be carried out in the Configurator, too!

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 74 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.8 Set-up program

The set-up programs serve for the registration and setting up of the individual
machine components, such as
 Machining tools (grinding wheels, turning tools)
 dressing tools
 Workpiece
 Probe
 etc.

On updating of the data ( C.4 "Machine Configurator",  C-51), the required set-
up programs are automatically arranged together and marked as “not set up”. Com-
pleted set-up programs are marked as “set up” and cannot be carried out again.
The following set-up programs are available for configuring the grinding wheel, tool
turret, workpiece and dressing unit:

Quickset Registration and measurement of the Quickset probe

Setup:  C.7 "Update data",  C-73 C
Dressing tool Registration of the dressing tool with the grinding wheel
register:  C.10 "Register dressing tool / calibrate grinding wheel on the dressing tool",
 C-82

Workpiece Registration of the workpiece zero point with the grinding wheel
register:  C.12 "Register workpiece",  C-94

Grinding wheel Measuring the grinding wheel. Used when changing the grinding wheels or in con-
measurement: nection with the “Quickset” option.
 C.16 "Measurement of the grinding wheel",  C-116

Depending on requirements and on the available options, further set-up programs

will be displayed as well, such as

Swivel position Setting up the swivel and return position

Setting up:  C.18 "Set-up swivel position",  C-122

TOUCH-DRESS- Dressing with Touchdressing

ING  C.28 "Setting up touch dressing",  C-140
Setting up:

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 75
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-58 setup_setupprograms

CNC Config. Back to CNC configurator

Select tool Select different tool (grinding wheel) for set-up

Start Starting the selected set-up program

NOTE!

The [Status] information item specifies the current status of the set-up program:
 Not set up: The set-up program must be carried out
 Set up: The set-up program has been successfully completed
 Inactive: Not set up, but set-up is not compulsory
 Active: Set up / activated for the current tool.

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 76 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.9 Set up Quickset

Fig. C-59 setup_programs

For it to be possible to use the QUICKSET option, you must measure the exact
location of the probe ball in relation to the center of rotation of the grinding spindle
head.

This measuring operation must be carried out:

 when the machine is commissioned
 after the control memory has been completely deleted (e.g. after a software
update)
 if the touch probe has been modified mechanically (e.g. touch probe
exchanged)

Measuring can be executed at any position in the machine room. We recommend

you to use a clean ground workpiece. C
The workpiece must have a diameter and a shoulder. It must be possible to
approach both areas from a single point in X and Z.

C.9.1 Settings

Fig. C-60 setup_program1

Enter here the approach parameters on which the measurement should be based.
The approach movement is carried out as follows:
 Rapid approach to the area
 Lift-off
 Slow approach (5x approach and lift off)
100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 77
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
 Formation of the mean value for more precise measurement

[33] {Mean max. Peak to Valley Roughness Height (DIN 4768)} When lifting, make
sure that the touch probe really lifts off the area (retract amount).

Angle 1: first approach angle

Angle 2: second approach angle

Search Speed of searching for the shoulder and the diameter.

speed

Measuring This is the speed at which the position is measured

speed:

Search path: Maximum search path of the touch probe. If the search path is exceeded, an error
message will be issued.

Retract amount: Amount of lift-off in connection with each measurement.

Ball Diameter of the touch probe ball

diameter:

Probe travel: Travel distance of the touch probe between the rest position and the position where
the “touched” signal is generated. The travel distance can be directly determined on
the machine, by ticking the “Measurement” field.

Measurement: Select, to have the probe travel also measured. For this operation to be possible,
the workpiece must have a measured keyway.

Width of the key- If “Probe deflection” has been selected, the width of the keyway must have been
way: exactly measured and specified.

Overview Back to set-up program overview. Registration of the Quickset touch probe is can-
celed as a result.

Start of sequence. Save the data. The text “CLOSE DOOR AND START CYCLE”
will appear. After activation of CYCLE START, the grinding head will be moved into
the correct position and disengaged.

Continue to next step

Fig. C-61 close_door_cycle_start

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 78 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.9.2 Touch probe measurement: Approach of the first angle

If you selected to measure the probe travel, the probe ball is to be moved into a key-
way. In this case, the approach movement will be carried out on X, Z left shoulder
and Z right shoulder. The probe travel is calculated on the basis of the measured Z-
positions, ball diameter and keyway width.

Fig. C-62 setup_program2

Probe ON/OFF: Swivels the positioning finger in and out. Check to ensure that the touch probe can
swivel out without collision.

Search pos.: [33] {Original Grinding Wheel Diameter}

 Approach of the diameter

 Approach the left shoulder

 Possibly with approach to right shoulder (if “Measurement of probe travel” has
been selected)

 Swivel touch probe out

 Disengage and swivel grinding wheel to the 2nd measuring angle

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 79
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.9.3 Touch probe measurement: Approach of the second angle

Now place the probe ball in front of the same diameter and same shoulder as in the
first approach.

Fig. C-63 setup_program3

Search pos.: [33] {Original Grinding Wheel Diameter}

 Approach of the diameter

 Approach the left shoulder

 Disengage and swivel grinding wheel back to the 1st measuring angle

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 80 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.9.4 Final control

Now the measured values will be displayed on the screen. You can check to see
whether the measured values are correct.

Fig. C-64 setup_program4

End: Confirm final control and exit Quickset touch probe set-up.

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 81
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.10 Register dressing tool / calibrate grinding wheel on the dressing

tool

The set-up program for configuring the dressing tool is executed using the [START]
key. Depending on the kind of dressing tool, another set-up program is called:

NOTE!
FANUC controlled machines with angular X axis:
With angular axes no oscillating movements are carried out in X using this func-
tion. The X axis remains in the first position.

  C.10.1 "Fixed dressing tool and diamond wheel",  C-82

  C.11 "Profile roll (roller-burnishing)",  C-87
  C.9.3 "Touch probe measurement: Approach of the second angle",  C-80

C.10.1 Fixed dressing tool and diamond wheel

  C.10.1.1 "Entering start parameters",  C-82

  C.10.1.2 "Registering rough positioning in X and Z",  C-83
  C.10.1.3 "Registering the dressing tool positions",  C-85
  C.10.1.4 "Dressing",  C-86

When more than one dressing diamond is required in order to dress the grinding
wheel (left-hand side of grinding wheel and right-hand side of grinding wheel), then
these actions have to be carried out for each dressing diamond.

C.10.1.1 Entering start parameters

The settings for registration of the dressing tools are displayed. Please note in par-
ticular whether any values are shown for the swivel position (applies to swiveling
grinding heads only). If this is not the case, you must define the swivel position.
The values for Sensitron must be entered in this screen:

Parameter set Channel or set number of the Sensitron.

number:

Sensitron Sensitivity of Sensitron in [%].

sensitivity:

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 82 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-65 setup_dresser_inputdata

Overview Back to set-up program overview

Continue to next step

Fig. C-66 close_door_cycle_start

After actuating Cycle Start

 the grinding wheel is swiveled to the dressing angle, if necessary
 the grinding wheel drive is switched off and the contact guard is opened

C.10.1.2 Registering rough positioning in X and Z

For safety reasons, when the operating door is open the position of the dressing tool
is registered with the grinding wheel stationary.

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 83
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-67 setup_dresser_roughsetup

The positions displayed on the screen must now be approached. It is expedient to

position the grinding wheel as closely as possible to the dressing tool. The two posi-
tions on the diameter and on the shoulder respectively serve to execute an oscillat-
ing movement during registration of the exact positions. This can be used to extract
the grinding wheel cleanly. If this is not desired, the two positions can be defined at
the same point.

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

One step back

Old pos. If set-up has already been carried out once, then the old position can be imported,
e.g. after aborting

Pos OK Sets position and proceeds to the next step

CAUTION!
Grinding wheel start-up: Check the displayed values. If the values are not correct
(too high speed), the grinding wheel may break apart after switching on the drive.

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 84 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-68 wheel_start

After actuating Cycle Start

C
 the grinding wheel is moved into a clear position
 the grinding wheel drive is switched on and the touch guard is opened.
 the 1st rough position is approached and the coolant is activated.

C.10.1.3 Registering the dressing tool positions

The reference positions to be registered are displayed on the screen. The grinding
wheel oscillates between the two rough positions configured previously. The hand-
wheel can be used to approach the dressing tool according to the display on the
screen. The axis to be used for infeed is automatically selected on the PCU. When
the grinding wheel contacts the dressing tool (Sensitron signal), then the position
can be accepted using [Pos OK].

Fig. C-69 setup_dresser_finesetup

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 85
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Pos OK Sets the position. The next position to be set up is shown on the screen. Only when
all positions have been set up will the image “Dressing the grinding wheel” be
shown on the screen.

C.10.1.4 Dressing
After registering the grinding wheel at the dressing tool, the grinding wheel must be
dressed.

Fig. C-70 setup_dresser_dress

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Allowance Before dressing you can specify here a new profiling size for X and Z.
The dressing passes must then be recalculated.
Subsequent profiling of the grinding wheel will then be based on the changes to the
dressing passes.

Fig. C-71 dress_reprofile

Dressing On pressing this key, the grinding wheel will be dressed at least once. If a profiling
allowance has been defined, the grinding wheel will be dressed until the profiling
allowance has been machined off.

End End set-up program (finish) and return to overview.

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 86 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.11 Profile roll (roller-burnishing)

Search speed: Defines how fast the profile roll moves towards the grinding wheel.

Dressing speed X: Defines how fast the profile roll moves into the grinding wheel when dressing.

Run down time: The amount of time waited when the profile roll has reached the target position
before being lifted again.

Profiling depth: The amount by which the roll moves into the wheel during profiling.

Dressing tool: The profile roll lifts by this amount after dressing.

Workpiece: The grinding wheel lifts by this amount from the workpiece before dressing.

Fig. C-72 setup_prof_dresser1

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Continue to next step

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 87
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-73 wheel_start

After activating Cycle Start:

 the grinding wheel and the profile roll are started
 the coolant for dressing is switched on.

C.11.1 Approaching the grinding wheel

Fig. C-74 setup_prof_dresser2

Approaching The profile roll travels towards the wheel at the search speed until the Sensitron sig-
nal responds.

Profiling The profile roll travels at the dressing speed into the grinding wheel by the profile
amount.

End End set-up program (finish) and return to overview.

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 88 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.11.2 Registration with internal wheel

 “Enter start parameters”

 “Rough registration in X and Z”
 “Fine registration of the dressing tool positions”
 “Dressing”
When more than one dressing diamond is required in order to dress the grinding
wheel (left-hand side of grinding wheel and right-hand side of grinding wheel), then
these actions have to be carried out for each dressing diamond.
Entering start parameters
The settings for registration of the dressing tools are displayed. Please note in par-
ticular whether any values are shown for the swivel position (applies to swiveling
grinding heads only). If this is not the case, you must define the swivel position.
In this picture you can enter the values for Sensitron and the arbor length.

Parameter set Channel or set number of the Sensitron.

number:
C
Sensitron Sensitivity of Sensitron in [%].
sensitivity:

Arbor length: The length can be corrected.

Arbor diameter: The diameter can be corrected.

Fig. C-75 setup_dresser_inputdata2

Overview Back to set-up program overview

Continue to next step

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 89
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-76 close_door_cycle_start

After activating Cycle Start:

 the grinding wheel is swiveled to the dressing angle, if necessary
 the grinding wheel drive is switched off

C.11.2.1 Registering rough positioning in X and Z

Fig. C-77 setup_dresser_roughsetup2

The positions displayed on the screen must now be approached. It is expedient to

position the grinding wheel as closely as possible to the dressing tool. The two posi-
tions on the diameter and on the shoulder respectively serve to execute an oscillat-
ing movement during registration of the exact positions. This can be used to extract
the grinding wheel cleanly. If this is not desired, the two positions can be defined at
the same point.

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 90 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
One step back

Old pos. If set-up has already been carried out once, then the old position can be imported,
e.g. after aborting

Pos. OK Sets position and proceeds to the next step

Swiveling in and out of the swiveling dressing tool.

Set up retraction position in Z

Depending on the dressing direction, the retraction position in Z must be set up.
C.20 "Retraction position in Z",  C-126

Save Save the position.

Continue to grinding wheel start-up

CAUTION! C
Grinding wheel start-up: Check the displayed values. If the values are not correct
(too high speed), the grinding wheel may break apart after switching on the drive.

Fig. C-78 wheel_start_internal

After actuating Cycle Start

 the grinding wheel is moved into a clear position
 the grinding wheel drive is switched on
 the 1st rough position is approached and the coolant is activated

Fine registering of the dressing tool positions

The reference positions to be registered are displayed on the screen. The grinding
wheel oscillates between the two rough positions configured previously. The hand-
wheel can be used to approach the dressing tool according to the display on the
screen. The axis to be used for infeed is automatically selected on the PCU. When
the grinding wheel contacts the dressing tool (Sensitron signal), then the position
can be accepted using [Pos OK].

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 91
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-79 setup_dresser_finesetup2

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Pos. OK Sets the position. The next position

to be set up is shown on the screen

Dressing
After registering the grinding wheel at the dressing tool, the grinding wheel must be
dressed.

100115948/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 92 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-80 setup_dresser_dress

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Allowance A new profiling allowance for X and Z can be entered here. The dressing passes
must then be recalculated.

Fig. C-81 dress_reprofile

Dressing On pressing this key, the grinding wheel will be dressed at least once. If a profiling
allowance has been defined, the grinding wheel will be dressed until the profiling
allowance has been machined off.

End End set-up program (finish) and return to overview.

100115948/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 93
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.12 Register workpiece

The zero point of the workpiece is defined in order to facilitate definition of the posi-
tion values when programming the workpiece. The workpiece zero point is set with
“REGISTER WORKPIECE”. The following procedure varies according to the type of
grinding wheel and the machine equipment.

A distinction is made between the following cases:

  C.12.1 "Configuring workpiece with external grinding wheel",  C-94
  C.13 "Configuring the workpiece with internal grinding wheel",  C-103
  C.15 "Configure workpiece with turning tool turret",  C-110

C.12.1 Configuring workpiece with external grinding wheel

C.12.1.1 Data input

Tool: Selects the set-up tool. The finger can only be selected if the machine is equipped
with “QUICK-SET”. When QUICK-SET is available, then the probe is selected as
default setting.
(Reference !!!)

SHOULDER POSI- Selection of the position of the shoulder at which registration is to be carried out.
TION: “LEFT” is always preset as the default setting.

Input type: Selection of the input type. (External / Internal)

Re-configuring the It is possible to select how the workpiece should be registered. Only the relevant
workpiece: zero point will be reset.

Set-up angle If the machine has a swiveling grinding head, here the set-up angle for registration
B-axis: of the workpiece may be entered.

Fig. C-82 setup_workpiece_inputdata

100115952/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 94 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Next step in set-up program. The set-up procedure is continued.

C
Fig. C-83 close_door_cycle_start

After actuating Cycle Start

 the grinding wheel is swiveled through the set-up angle which has been entered
 the grinding wheel drive is switched off and the contact guard is opened.

C.12.1.2 Registering rough workpiece positions

For safety reasons, the rough positions are registered with the grinding wheel sta-
tionary, so that the safety doors can be kept open. The grinding wheel now has to
travel to the diameter which is to be ground. It is expedient to position the grinding
wheel as closely as possible to the diameter. The workpiece can be started using an
F key which has been programmed with M3 or M4 (when the doors are open, the
maximum rotational speed is 50min-1). This enables possible out-of-roundness on
the workpiece to be taken account of.

100115952/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 95
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-84 setup_workpiece_roughsetup

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

One step back

Pos OK The position is registered and the next position to be registered is shown on the
screen
The shoulder is configured in the same way as the diameter

100115952/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 96 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
C.12.1.3 Grinding wheel start-up
Check the displayed values. If the values are not correct (too high speed), the grind-
ing wheel may break apart after switching on the drive.

C
Fig. C-85 wheel_start

After actuating Cycle Start

 the grinding wheel is moved into a clear position
 the grinding wheel drive is switched on and the touch guard is opened
 the rough position on the diameter is approached and the coolant is activated.

100115952/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 97
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
C.12.1.4 Fine grinding of the diameter and the shoulder
The diameter and shoulder have to be ground clean so that the workpiece can be
measured and the workpiece zero-point set. The handwheel is used for the
approach. The relevant axis is automatically selected on the PCU.

Fig. C-86 setup_workpiece_finesetup

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

One step back

Pos OK The position is accepted, the grinding wheel is first released and then travels to the
rough position of the shoulder.
The next view “Configure shoulder” is displayed.

100115952/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 98 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
C.12.1.5 Entering the workpiece dimensions
Next the exact diameter and shoulder values have to be measured and entered on
the screen. Using the dimensions entered, the zero point for the workpiece is
defined. In programming the workpiece program, all dimensions are programmed in
relation to this zero point.

Fig. C-87 setup_workpiece_zero

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

100115952/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 99
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.12.2 Configuring the workpiece with internal grinding wheel

The zero point of the workpiece is defined in order to facilitate definition of the posi-
tion values when programming the workpiece. The workpiece zero point is set with
“REGISTER WORKPIECE”.

C.12.2.1 Data input

Tool: Selects the set-up tool. The finger can only be selected if the machine is equipped
with “QUICK-SET”. When QUICK-SET is available, the finger is the default preset.
(Reference !!!)

SHOULDER POSI- When the registration mode is set to “INTERNAL”, set-up can only be carried out at
TION: the left shoulder.

Input type: Selection of the registration mode. Internal grinding can only be selected if the
grinding wheel is mounted on an internal grinding spindle. In this case, “INTERNAL”
is preset.

Re-configuring the It is possible to select how the workpiece should be registered. Only the relevant
workpiece: zero point will be reset.

Set-up angle If the machine has a swiveling grinding head, here the set-up angle for registration
B-axis: of the workpiece may be entered.

Fig. C-88 setup_workpiece_inputdata_ID

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Next step in set-up program. The set-up procedure is continued.

100115952/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 100 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-89 close_door_cycle_start

After actuating Cycle Start

C
 the grinding wheel is swiveled through the set-up angle which has been entered
 the grinding wheel drive is switched off and the contact guard is opened.

C.12.2.2 Configuring the workpiece position

The positions are configured when the grinding wheel is stationary. The grinding
wheel must be moved to the diameter. It is a good idea to position the grinding
wheel as close as possible to the diameter to enable exact configuration. The work-
piece can be started using an F key which has been programmed with M3 or M4
(when the doors are open, the maximum rotational speed is 50min-1). This enables
possible out-of-roundness on the workpiece to be taken account of.

Fig. C-90 setup_workpiece_ID_x

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

100115952/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 101
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
One step back

Pos OK The position is registered and the next position to be registered is shown on the
screen
The shoulder is configured in the same way as the diameter

C.12.2.3 Entering the workpiece dimensions

Next the diameter and shoulder values have to be measured and entered on the
screen. Using the dimensions entered, the zero point for the workpiece is defined.
When programming the workpiece programs, all dimensions are programmed in
relation to this zero point.

Fig. C-91 setup_workpiece_id_zero

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

NOTE!
The diameter dimension must be entered as positive when configured behind the
rotation centre and negative when configured in front of the rotation centre.

100115952/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 102 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.13 Configuring the workpiece with internal grinding wheel

The zero point of the workpiece is defined in order to facilitate definition of the posi-
tion values when programming the workpiece. The workpiece zero point is set with
“REGISTER WORKPIECE”.

C.13.1 Data input

Tool: Selects the set-up tool. The finger can only be selected if the machine is equipped
with “QUICK-SET”. When QUICK-SET is available, the finger is the default preset.
(Reference !!!)

SHOULDER POSI- When the registration mode is set to “INTERNAL”, set-up can only be carried out at
TION: the left shoulder.

Input type: Selection of the registration mode. Internal grinding can only be selected if the
grinding wheel is mounted on an internal grinding spindle. In this case, “INTERNAL”
is preset.
C
Re-configuring the It is possible to select how the workpiece should be registered. Only the relevant
workpiece: zero point will be reset.

Set-up angle If the machine has a swiveling grinding head, here the set-up angle for registration
B-axis: of the workpiece may be entered.

Fig. C-92 setup_workpiece_inputdata_ID

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Next step in set-up program. The set-up procedure is continued.

100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 103
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-93 close_door_cycle_start

After actuating Cycle Start

 the grinding wheel is swiveled through the set-up angle which has been entered
 the grinding wheel drive is switched off and the contact guard is opened.

C.13.2 Configuring the workpiece position

The positions are configured when the grinding wheel is stationary. The grinding
wheel must be moved to the diameter. It is a good idea to position the grinding
wheel as close as possible to the diameter to enable exact configuration. The work-
piece can be started using an F key which has been programmed with M3 or M4
(when the doors are open, the maximum rotational speed is 50min-1). This enables
possible out-of-roundness on the workpiece to be taken account of.

Fig. C-94 setup_workpiece_ID_x

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 104 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

One step back

Pos OK The position is registered and the next position to be registered is shown on the
screen
The shoulder is configured in the same way as the diameter

C.13.3 Entering the workpiece dimensions

Next the diameter and shoulder values have to be measured and entered on the
screen. Using the dimensions entered, the zero point for the workpiece is defined.
When programming the workpiece programs, all dimensions are programmed in
relation to this zero point.

Fig. C-95 setup_workpiece_id_zero

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

NOTE!
The diameter dimension must be entered as positive when configured behind the
rotation centre and negative when configured in front of the rotation centre.

100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 105
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.14 Register workpiece with the touch probe (optional)

The Quickset option makes it possible for the workpiece to be registered with the
Quickset touch probe which has been set up.

C.14.1 Data input

Tool: The touch probe must be selected as the tool.

SHOULDER POSI- Select the position of the shoulder where registration should be carried out. LEFT is
TION: always selected as the default setting.

Re-configuring the It is possible to select how the workpiece should be configured. Only the relevant
workpiece: zero point is reset.

Fig. C-96 setup_workpiece_inputdata_probe

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Next step in set-up program. The set-up procedure is continued.

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 106 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-97 close_door_cycle_start

After actuating Cycle Start

 the wheelhead is swiveled to the touch probe angle,
 the grinding wheel drive is switched off and the contact guard is opened. C

C.14.2 Approach of a workpiece diameter

The touch probe must be positioned in front of the diameter in such a way that it can
reach the diameter within the defined search path.

NOTE!
The measurement will supply better results if the touch probe is not positioned
too close to the diameter. The X axis should have the possibility of accelerating to
the programmed speed before the touch probe responds.

Fig. C-98 setup_workpiece_probe_x

100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 107
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

One step back

Probe ON/OFF Swivel touch probe in/out

Pos OK Start of the search procedure

Fig. C-99 close_door_cycle_start

After actuating Cycle Start

 Rapid approach of the diameter until the touch probe responds
 Retract
 5x measurement of the diameter with positioning speed
 Calculation of mean value from the 5 measurements
 Switch to next picture

Approach of a workpiece shoulder

The same procedure is now repeated for a workpiece shoulder.

C.14.3 Entering the workpiece dimensions

Next the diameter and shoulder values have to be measured and entered on the
screen. Using the dimensions entered, the zero point for the workpiece is defined.
When programming the workpiece programs, all dimensions are programmed in
relation to this zero point.

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 108 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-100 setup_workpiece_zero

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 109
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.15 Configure workpiece with turning tool turret

In order to use the turning tool turret, the zero point must be set with reference to
the workpiece. This can be done with a tool where the dimensions have been
checked. The tool must be selected from the table of tools.

Fig. C-101 setup_turningtool1

Tool: The tool to be used for configuring can be selected from this list

Fig. C-102 select_turningtool

Rpm during con- The rotational speed which the workpiece should have when being configured must
figuration: be entered here.
If a positive rotational speed is entered, then the workpiece spindle starts with a
clockwise rotation, if a negative speed is entered, the workpiece spindle starts with
an anticlockwise rotation.

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 110 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
Re-configuring the It is possible to select how the workpiece should be configured. Only the relevant
workpiece: zero point is reset.

Cutting edge Specifies with which cutting edge the workpiece should be turned (optional)
number:

Overview Back to set-up program overview.

Continue to configuring workpiece

C.15.1 Configuring in X

The turning tool must be moved in front of the diameter so that this can be resur-
faced. When resurfacing, the handwheel is used for feeding.

Fig. C-103 setup_turningtool_x

One step back

Start Starts the configuring in X

100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 111
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-104 close_door_cycle_start

After the start of the cycle, the workpiece spindle begins to turn with the rotational
speed entered.

Re-set value: The re-set value defines how much the tool lifts up after [Pos OK] has been
pressed.

Re-set speed: The re-set speed defines how fast the tool lifts up after [Pos OK] has been pressed.

Fig. C-105 setup_turningtool_x_fine

Now the diameter must be resurfaced in the Z direction using the handwheel. If
resurfacing is adequate so that the diameter can be measured, then the soft key
[Pos OK] can be pressed. The tool now lifts up by the defined amount.

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 112 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.15.2 Configuring in Z

The turning tool must be moved in front of the shoulder so that this can be resur-
faced. When resurfacing, the handwheel is used for feeding.

Fig. C-106 setup_turningtool_z

One step back

Start Starts the configuring in Z

Fig. C-107 close_door_cycle_start

After the start of the cycle, the workpiece spindle begins to turn with the rotational
speed entered.

Re-set value: The re-set value defines how much the tool lifts up after [Pos OK] has been
pressed.

Re-set speed: The re-set speed defines how fast the tool lifts up after [Pos OK] has been pressed.
100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 113
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-108 setup_turningtool_z_fine

Now the shoulder must be resurfaced in the X direction using the handwheel. If
resurfacing is adequate so that the position can be measured, then the soft key [Pos
OK] can be pressed. The tool now lifts up by the defined amount.

C.15.3 Entering the workpiece dimensions

Next the exact diameter and shoulder values have to be measured and entered on
the screen. Using the dimensions entered, the zero point for the workpiece is
defined. In programming the workpiece program, all dimensions are programmed in
relation to this zero point.

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 114 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-109 setup_workpiece_turning_zero

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 115
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.16 Measurement of the grinding wheel

Measurement of the grinding wheel takes place in two different situations: when
changing a grinding wheel without Quickset, or when re-registering a grinding wheel
with Quickset.

C.16.1 Measurement of the grinding wheel (without Quickset)

When changing a grinding wheel, is zero point must be reset. As the dressing tool
or that (?) of the workpiece is already known, the grinding wheel can be measured
in the light of one of these two components. Here the sequence is the same as that
for “Register dressing tool” or “Register workpiece”. The only difference lies in the
calculation of the grinding wheel’s zero point shift.

Fig. C-110 setup_wheel_inputdata

Measure grinding Selects with which machine component the grinding wheel should be measured -
wheel with: with the dressing tool or with the workpiece.

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Next step in set-up program. If the dressing tool has been selected
C.6 "Quickset",  C-73
Workpiece selected
C.10 "Register dressing tool / calibrate grinding wheel on the dressing tool",  C-
82

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 116 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.16.2 Measurement of the grinding wheel (with Quickset)

Measurement of the grinding wheel (with Quickset)

This sequence should only be executed if your machine is equipped with the
“QUICKSET” option.
To enable you to benefit from all the advantages of your B axis machine, the CNC
controls must know the exact location of the grinding wheel in relation to the center
of rotation of the grinding spindle head. Only in this way can the grinding wheel be
swiveled to any angle you like and operated accordingly.
It is a precondition for measurement of the grinding wheel that the touch probe has
been measured already. (C.9 "Set up Quickset",  C-77).

Fig. C-111 setup_wheel_inputdata

Measure grinding Selects the machine component with which the grinding wheel should be measured:
wheel with: with the dressing tool or with the workpiece.

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

Next step in set-up program. If the dressing tool has been selected
C.9 "Set up Quickset",  C-77
The following description serves for the measurement of the grinding wheel on the
workpiece using Quickset.
Here the settings are displayed with which the grinding wheel is to be measured.
Please ensure that all entry fields display a correct value.

100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 117
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-112 setup_wheel_inputdata_wp

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

One step back

Next step in set-up program. The set-up procedure is continued.

Fig. C-113 close_door_cycle_start

After actuating Cycle Start

 the grinding wheel is swiveled through the set-up angle which has been entered
 the grinding wheel drive is switched off and the contact guard is opened

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 118 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-114 setup_wheel_roughsetup

The sequence in connection with rough and detailed registration of the grinding
wheel on the workpiece is exactly the same as that used for C.12.1 "Configuring
workpiece with external grinding wheel",  C-94
Now the ground diameter must be approached with the touch probe. Position the
touch probe in front of the diameter in such a way that it can find the diameter within
the defined search path.

Fig. C-115 setup_wheel_probe

100115953/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 119
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

NOTE!
The measurement supplies better results if the touch probe is positioned not too
close to the diameter. The X axis should have the possibility of accelerating to the
programmed speed before the touch probe responds.

For control purposes, the measured values are displayed. Please check to see that
the values are within a plausible range.

Fig. C-116 setup_wheel_showdata

If you have carried out the measurement of the grinding wheel on a workpiece and
the workpiece has not yet been registered, you can now at the same time determine
the workpiece zero-point. This means that an additional set-up of the workpiece will
no longer be necessary. C.12 "Register workpiece",  C-94

Overview Cancel and return to set-up program overview

End Closes the Set-up program

Zero point Input of the workpiece dimensions, if the workpiece has not yet been set up.

100115953/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 120 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.17 Setting up special positions

The machine requires special positions for certain functions, to enable it to perform
movements without collisions. These positions generally require to be defined once
only, but can be altered at any juncture. The system prompts the user to set these
positions in each of the set-up actions.

The machine requires the following positions:

  C.18 "Set-up swivel position",  C-122
  C.19 "Retraction position in X",  C-124
  C.20 "Retraction position in Z",  C-126

Fig. C-117 setup_mainmenu_spezpos

100115959/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 121
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.18 Set-up swivel position

To enable automatic swiveling of the grinding spindle head, the machine must know
a position in which swiveling can be carried out without collisions.
A corresponding position is approached manually and registered. It is also possible
to enter the position via the keyboard.
The swivel position must be set up once per tool head. The tool head can be
selected using the softkey [Tool head]

Important!
This position is a machine position.

Fig. C-118 setup_swivelpos

Main menu Back to Main menu “Set up spec. positions”.

Tool head Selecting the tool head. Selecting using the Mouse or keyboard.

100115959/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 122 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-119 setup_swivelpos_toolhead

C
Pos OK Registers the current position and displays it on the screen

Save Saves the position. Each head must be saved separately.

End Closes the Set-up program

100115959/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 123
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.19 Retraction position in X

On set-up, this position is set by default to the retract position so that obstacles can
always be bypassed. If it is wished to pass closer to the obstacle then this position
can also be changed e.g. to save time.
The grinding wheel normally moves to the X position and then to the Z position of
the dressing tool. When a dressing retraction position is defined, this position is
approached prior to the Z movement.
A corresponding position is approached manually and registered. It is also possible
to enter the position via the keyboard.

Important!
This position is a machine position.

Fig. C-120 setup_retractpos_x

Main menu Back to Main menu “Set up spec. positions”.

Grinding The grinding wheel can be selected using the mouse or keyboard.
wheel

100115959/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 124 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-121 setup_retractpos_wheel

C
Pos OK Accepting the current position and displaying it on the screen.

Save Saves the position. Each wheel must be saved separately.

End Closes the Set-up program

100115959/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 125
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.20 Retraction position in Z

This position must be set when a machine carries out grinding and dressing in the
positive direction of the X axis during internal grinding
This position is used for all approach and withdrawal movements. A corresponding
position must be approached and accepted manually. It is also possible to enter the
position via the keyboard.

Important!
This position is a machine position.

Fig. C-122 setup_retractpos_z

Main menu Back to Main menu “Set up spec. positions”.

Grinding wheel The grinding wheel can be selected using the mouse or keyboard.

100115959/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 126 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-123 setup_retractpos_wheel

C
Pos OK Accepting the current position and displaying it on the screen.

End Saves the position. Each wheel must be saved separately.

100115959/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 127
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.21 Accessories set-up

When additional accessories are employed for the grinding process, these must
also be set up.

Possible accessories are:

  C.22 "Integrated measurement control",  C-129
  C.23 "Circumferential Positioning Passive",  C-130
  C.24 "Length Positioning Passive",  C-131
  C.25 "Longitudinal positioning active",  C-132
  C.27 "Longitudinal positioning using Sensitron",  C-137
  C.28 "Setting up touch dressing",  C-140
  C.29 "Set up NC-tailstock",  C-144
  C.30 "Set up tool measurement device (optional)",  C-147

Fig. C-124 setup_mainmenu_auxdevices

100115963/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 128 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.22 Integrated measurement control

This type of measurement control is operated entirely via the machine controller.
As diameter measurement controllers only measure relative to a reference diame-
ter, the measuring head must be calibrated on the basis of a reference diameter. It
is most expedient to use a diameter which has already been ground to the required
nominal dimension for setting purposes.

Measuring pro- Selection of the measuring program (Parameter W in G204)

gram number:

Measuring circuit Measuring circuit number (parameter B in G204)

number:

Fig. C-125 setup_ip_measuring

Main menu Back to main menu: “Set-up accessories”

Gauge slide ON/ The gauge slide moves to the workpiece / back. This soft key only functions when
OFF the operator door is closed or the permission key has been pressed. The controller
supports up to 3 gauge slides. These are indicated by the colors yellow, red and
green. To extend and retract the correct gauge slide, select the softkey with the
appropriate color.

Probe open/closed Lowers the measuring probe onto the diameter or raises it again

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

Continue to mechanical and electrical zeroing (only for integrated measuring control
system without control panel)

100115963/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 129
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.23 Circumferential Positioning Passive

The set-up function Circumferential Positioning Passive is used to register the nec-
essary set-up values for function G212 ( E.9.4.4 "G212 Circumferential position-
ing passive",  E-283).
The necessary data are the workpiece diameter and the starting angle of the C axis
for approaching the gauge slide. The values can be entered manually or, in the case
of the C axis position, can be imported by the machine by pressing “Pos ok”.

Fig. C-126 setup_up_measuring

Main menu Back to Main menu: “Accessories set-up”.

Gauge slide ON/ Moves the gauge slide towards or away from the workpiece. This softkey only func-
OFF tions when the operating door is closed or the accept key has been pressed. The
control system supports up to 3 gauge slides. These are indicated by the colors yel-
low, red and green. To extend and retract the correct gauge slide, select the softkey
with the appropriate color.

Probe open/closed Lowers the measuring probe onto the diameter or raises it again

Save Saves the entries

Pos. OK Accepts the current angle of the C axis as the value for the starting angle.

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

Continue to mechanical and electrical zeroing (only for integrated measuring control
system without control panel)

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 130 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.24 Length Positioning Passive

The longitudinal positioning covers length differences of the workpieces within a

series (e.g.: Centre-diameter differences produce a change of position in length).
The passive length positioning probe is able to detect and automatically offset such
differences in the range of +/- 2mm.
As the passive length positioning probe only measures relative to a reference shoul-
der, the measuring head must be calibrated on the basis of a reference shoulder.

Fig. C-127 setup_lp_passiv

Main menu Back to Main menu: “Accessories set-up”.

Gauge slide ON/ Moves the gauge slide towards or away from the workpiece. This soft key only func-
OFF tions when the operator door is closed or the permission key has been pressed. The
controller supports up to 3 gauge slides. These are indicated by the colors yellow,
red and green. To extend and retract the soles, select the soft key with the appropri-
ate color to activate the correct gauge slide

Probe open/closed Lowers the measuring probe onto the shoulder or raises it again

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

Continue to mechanical and electrical zeroing (only for integrated measuring control
system without control panel)

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 131
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.25 Longitudinal positioning active

The longitudinal positioning covers length differences of the workpieces within a

series (e.g.: Centre-diameter differences produce a change of position in length).
The active longitudinal positioning probe is able to detect and automatically offset
such differences in the set range (“D.3.3 "Technology corrections",  D-174,
Search path).
Data input

Fig. C-128 setup_lp_activ

Probe number Enter which probe is to be set up.

Measuring posi- There are two measuring positions available for each probe which can be set up
tion number and used separately.

Shoulder position Defines on which side of the shoulder the measuring probe is located.

Measuring angle Option swiveling table:

If the workpiece is not positioned parallel to the Z axis then the angle must be
entered, because a displacement in the longitudinal axis also results in a displace-
ment in diameter. The diameter displacement can be automatically offset using this
angle.

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 132 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-129 setup_lp_activ2

Reference dimen- This dimension enables the start position of the probe to be defined in relation to a
sion in Z reference surface. This value can be transferred e.g. to the workpiece spindle head
casing or from the scale mounted on the table. Set-up is only necessary if the refer-
ence surface is moved.

Fig. C-130 setup_lp_activ3

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 133
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-131 ref_z

The distance Z (reference position - probe) can be entered as a reference value. If a

workpiece with a different length is machined, then the new distance Z’ can be pro-
grammed under Parameter Z in the G206 cycle. A new set-up is therefore not nec-
essary

Fig. C-132 ref_z1

NOTE!
The distance from the location used for positioning and the workpiece zero point
always stays the same. It is recommended, when working with reference dimen-
sions, to set the zero point at the place which is used for positioning.

Touch probe Select, to have the probe travel also measured. For this procedure to be possible,
measurement the workpiece must have a measurable keyway.

WIDTH OF THE If “Measurement of probe travel” has been selected, the exact width of the keyway
KEYWAY must have been exactly measured and specified.

Probe travel Travel distance of the touch probe between the position of rest and the position
which generates the “touched” signal. This value is determined automatically.

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 134 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-133 close_door_cycle_start2

After actuating Cycle Start

C
 the wheelhead is swiveled to the touch probe angle,
 the grinding wheel drive is switched off and the contact guard is opened

C.26 Search target position

SEARCH TARGET POSITION

In this step the target position is approached once with the touch probe.

Fig. C-134 setup_lp_activ5

Close Back to Main menu: “Accessories set-up”.

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 135
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
Back to data input

Probe On/Off Swivels the probe in or out.

Pos. Search Searches for the shoulder and saves its position.

End Closes the Set-up program.

Fig. C-135 setup_lp_activ4

Close Back to Main menu: “Accessories set-up”.

Continue to search for the target position.

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 136 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.27 Longitudinal positioning using Sensitron

The longitudinal positioning covers length differences of the workpieces within a

series. These sort of differences can be entered and automatically offset using lon-
gitudinal positioning with Sensitron The range is dependent on the start position of
the search path.
When longitudinal positioning with Sensitron, the displacement is measured with the
grinding wheel relative to a reference-shoulder. The grinding wheel must therefore
be set up on a reference shoulder.

Data input The grinding wheel must be selected before the data for length positioning can be
entered.

Fig. C-136 setup_retractpos_wheel

After selecting the grinding wheel it is swiveled into the grinding position.

Fig. C-137 close_door_cycle_start2

Set-up angle The grinding wheel can also be set up at another angle. Enter the new angle.
B-axis

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 137
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
Measuring angle If the workpiece is not positioned parallel to the Z axis then the angle must be
entered, because a displacement in the longitudinal axis also results in a displace-
ment in diameter. The diameter displacement can be automatically offset using this
angle

Amount to be The shoulder is further machined by this amount until the reference dimension is
removed recorded. (This can be useful if the shoulder still shows eccentricity).

Infeed speed The speed used to machine off the amount to be removed.

Fig. C-138 setup_lp_sensi

Close Back to Main menu: “Accessories set-up”.

Save setting and continue to approach

Approaching Move manually close to the workpiece shoulder. The grinding wheel is then started
using “Search pos.” and the search sequence carried out.

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 138 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-139 setup_lp_sensi2

Close Back to Main menu: “Accessories set-up”.

Back to data input

Pos. Search Searches for the shoulder.

End Closes the Set-up program.

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 139
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.28 Setting up touch dressing

With this method of dressing, the dressing tool is touched automatically in each
dressing pass.
This ensures that the grinding wheel is dressed by the defined dressing amount.
Thermal displacements and major wear to the dressing tool are therefore avoided.

Use: This process is employed primarily for hard grinding wheels (diamond, CBN ...).
When such grinding wheels are used, the dressing tool is generally subject to
greater wear than the grinding wheel.
When this dressing method is employed, the nominal dimension is not adhered to
exactly in the subsequent grinding process. It is thus recommendable to use an in-
process gauging system for the grinding process. If not, manual correction must be
carried out.
This method can also be used when a new dressing tool is fitted, the cutting edge of
which is located in roughly the same position as the old tool. The touch dressing
function must then be selected for the first dressing pass after the tool change. After
dressing, touch dressing must be deactivated manually.

Selection The grinding wheel, dressing tool and workpiece are set up in the normal manner.
After set-up, touch dressing can be selected.

NOTE!
FANUC controlled machines with angular X axis:
With angular axes no oscillating movements are carried out in X using this func-
tion. The X axis remains in the first position.

C.28.1 (a) Defining the technology

It is possible to define which sides of the grinding wheel the dressing tool is to touch
during touch dressing.
 Left side of grinding wheel - diameter (left dressing tool in X)
 Left side of grinding wheel - shoulder (left dressing tool in Z)
 Right side of grinding wheel - diameter (right dressing tool in X)
 Right side of grinding wheel - shoulder (right dressing tool in Z)

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 140 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-140 setup_touchdressing_technologie

Close Back to Main menu: “Accessories set-up”.

Save Saves the displayed values.

Grinding wheel The grinding wheel can be selected using the mouse or keyboard.

Fig. C-141 setup_retractpos_wheel

To enter geometric data.

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 141
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.28.2 (b) Definition of geometric data

Fig. C-142 setup_touchdressing_geometrie

C.28.3 (c) Definition of approach parameters

Defining the Defines on which position of the grinding wheel the search movement should take
approach parame- place.
ters

Approach to diam- Position of the cylindrical part of the grinding wheel

eter

Approach to Position of the shoulder height of the grinding wheel.

shoulder
It is subsequently defined from which position the dressing tool is to be sought
(Seek start position) and how far the search movement is to go (Seek target posi-
tion). If the dressing tool is not found within this distance, a corresponding message
will be output.

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 142 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-143 setup_touchdressing_anfahren

End Saves the entries and closes the set-up program.

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 143
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.29 Set up NC-tailstock

When the doors are open the tailstock sleeve can be moved with the foot pedal,
leaving both hands free to hold the workpiece. Dimensions B and C indicate the
range in which the workpiece is identified as clamped. Dimension A indicates where
the less open position is located. To facilitate the set-up process, the set up posi-
tions are ignored in Set mode when traversing with the foot pedal. In automatic
loader mode it is recommendable to select narrowly defined dimensions for B and
C, so as to ensure that a poorly clamped workpiece will be identified as such.

Fig. C-144 setup_nc_tailstock

Close Back to Main menu: “Accessories set-up”.

Close barrel Closes the NC tailstock

Open barrel Opens the NC tailstock

Save Saves dimensions A, B and C and the feed rates. The new set up position is not
saved.

Pos OK Accepts current position as the clamping position

End Closes the Set-up program

CAUTION!
When setting up the machine, you should ensure that the retraction distance of
the quill tip is not too wide, to prevent bodily parts (hand or finger) getting caught
between the tip and the workpiece.

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 144 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

CAUTION!
When clamping heavy workpieces between the centers, a clamping accessory
(prism base) must be used.

C.29.1 Synchronous tailstock

The conditions for setting up the synchronous tailstock are the same as those for
the NC tailstock.

Fig. C-145 setup_nc_tailstock

CURRENT POSI- The current position indicates the actual position of the synchronous tailstock.
TION

Pos OK The set-up position can be transferred using [Pos OK] or a value can be pro-
grammed directly.

Reduced opening Parameter A can be used to reduce the opening of the synchronous tailstock. The
dimension refers to the set-up position of the synchronous tailstock.

Clamping range B The clamping range B is used to detect the correct clamping of the workpiece. If, for
example, no workpiece or one which is too short is clamped, then this parameter
triggers a clamping device error. The value should be selected to be as small as
possible and refers to the set-up position.

Clamping range C The clamping range C is used to detect the correct clamping of the workpiece. If a
workpiece is e.g. inserted at an angle, the HM tip is not in the bore or a workpiece
which is too long has been inserted, this parameter will trigger a clamping device
error. The value should be selected to be as small as possible and refers to the set-
up position.

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 145
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

CAUTION!
If too large a value is selected for this parameter, then the selected clamping
force D is applied when the set-up position plus the clamping range C are
reached. This can result in the HM tip moving too roughly into the workpiece. ->
Reduce clamping range C and/or increase velocity reduction D.

Clamping force F The clamping force F is used to set the desired center pressure. The value should
be selected in such a way that the workpiece is securely clamped and is not
deformed.
The input is made in % of the maximum clamping force of the machine hydraulics.

CAUTION!
It should be noted that a loss of pressure can result from the valve used. To verify
the effective clamping force, check the value displayed on the manometer with
closed doors.

Speed reduction The speed must be reduced for closing so that the HM tip does not approach the
position D workpiece too roughly. This value refers to the set-up position plus the clamping
range C.

CAUTION!
The movement of the synchronous tailstock is performed hydraulically. This
parameter should not be too small so that any reduction in speed has an effect.
approx. 5 mm minimum should be entered

Speed The F1 and F2 speeds can be used to define the process and clamping speeds.
The speed F1 can almost always be left at 100%. The speed F2 should be selected
in such a way that the HM tip moves gently into the workpiece and the speed is not
too low.

CAUTION!
The speed reduction is controlled using the pressure. The control valve can have
a pressure loss for which a minimum of 20% must be set.

NOTE!
Adjust the clamping force F and check the pressure on the manometer with
closed doors and a clamped workpiece. If this is 3 bar, then
F2 = Clamping force F + 5% can be set.

Open

Speed reduction The speed reduction position E should be defined approx. the same as the speed
position E reduction position D. This ensures that the synchronous tailstock moves gently to
the limit position.

Speed The F3 and F4 speeds can be used to set the traverse speed and approach speed
to the limit position.

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 146 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
The F3 speed can almost always be left at 100%. The F4 speed should be selected
in such a way that the synchronous tailstock moves gently to the limit position. The
F4 speed can be selected to be approx. 10% greater than the F2 speed.
.

C.30 Set up tool measurement device (optional)

The tool measurement device enables configuration of the tools on the tool turret. In
order for the machine to recognize the position of the device on the turret, this must
first be measured with a reference tool. For example, cylinder pins can be used as a
reference tool.

Fig. C-146 setup_tool_calibrating

Position X / Diame- The more accurately the position is entered, the more accurate will be the subse-
ter quent measurement of tools.

Width C / D The width must be entered in order for adequate sideways movement during meas-
urement.

Set-up sequence:
1. Positioning the reference tool in front of the measurement device
2. Starting measurement of the probe by pressing [Pos. Search] and then Cycle
Start
3. Automatic measurement of the probe
4. Saving the positions and finishing with [Close]

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 147
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.31 Set up loader

The loader requires the following definitions on the machine:

  C.31.1 "Defining the loader program",  C-149

Fig. C-147 setup_mainmenu_loader

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 148 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.31.1 Defining the loader program

The programs run by the loader system are defined here. The operating instructions
for the loader system show which program is run by the handling unit under which
program number. The machine control program assignment must match the loader
system.

Fig. C-148 setup_loader_interface

Example
Program no. 01: Approaching the loader home position

Program no. 02: Machining Program 1

Program no. 03: Robot cycle

Program no. 04: Machining Program 2 (without calibra-

tion program)

The BIN-CODE required for running the corresponding ISO program is specified
under the corresponding program number.

Close Back to Main menu “Loader set-up”.

Save Saves the data entered

End Closes the Set-up program

Delete The selected program allocation is deleted.

Open Assignment of an existing program.

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 149
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN
C.31.1.1 Program structure
When working with a loader system the program structure must fulfill certain
requirements. The following types of program can be defined:
Machining programs
Several grinding programs can be run by the loader system. These can all be grind-
ing programs but also calibration programs for measurement control systems (= cal-
ibrating unit handling).
Home position program
The home position program contains all the movements for guiding the machine into
the component change position (= machine outside the overall collision range) so
that the loader system can reach into the grinding area safely. The home position
program is called at the end of a machining program. If the home position is not
reached at the end of a cycle, then the home position program can also be run by
the loader system. A specific home position can be defined for each machining pro-
gram.
Robot program
This program is run by the loader system if the machine needs to be kept thermally
stable (e.g. in the case of a lack of components in the loader system).

C.31.1.2 Important B commands

B8 Machine outside overall NC collision area

This is programmed in the home position program after the machine has
reached the programmed home position.

B11 Workpiece grinding complete.

Is programmed right at the end of the machining program.

B12 Workpiece is reject

B32 Machine outside collision area 1

(application is project-specific)
100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 150 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
C.31.1.3 Machining programs
Valid program numbers: O1...5999
The machining programs correspond to the required grinding process or measure-
ment procedure. At the end of the program the sub-routine for approaching the
home position is called and in addition B11 is set.

Programming example

O1

G9600 H1 T1 A0

G205

G9203 A0.5 B0.05 C0.01 D0.6

E0.3 F0.1 Q0 T1 X20 Y30 Z0

G65 P7960 Home position program called

B11 Signal to loader “Grinding of work-

piece is complete”
C
M30

C.31.1.4 Initial position program

In the home position program a distinction is made as to which program is run by
the loader and which is called from the program.

Home position program (called from the program):

 Recommended program numbers: 7960...7969
 In this program all the machine operations are programmed which are neces-
sary for the loader system to engage in the work room safely.
 For example, this is where the machine is moved to a retract position and cool-
ing lubricant which is still running is switched off. At the end the loader is
informed that the machine is at the home position using the command B8.

Programming example

07960

G9679 Retracting the grinding wheel in X right

to the rear

B8 Message to loader system “machine to

home position”

M99 End of program with M99

NOTE!
For timing optimization, it is recommended not to move the grinding wheel right to
the rear. In this case the retract position can be programmed. These positions are
always programmed in the machine coordinate system (G53), so that with
increasingly smaller grinding wheels the return movement is always large
enough.

100115965/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 151
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Programming example

07960

G53 X350 M468 move backwards and retract the gauge

slide at the same time

G53 Z200 M159 Go to safety position in Z and turn off

coolant

B8 Message to loader “machine to home

position”

M99 End of program with M99

Home position program (called by the loader system):

 Recommended program numbers: 7950...7959
 The home position program which is called by the loader system contains only
one sub-routine call of the actual home position program.

Programming example

O7950

G65 P7960 Calls the home position program

M30 Exit program using M30

C.31.1.5 Robot program

Recommended program numbers: 7980 ... 7989
This program comprises the switching-on of all units relevant to the process and
cyclical axis movements for maintaining thermal stability. The robot program is
halted by the program selection “systematic halt”.

Programming example

O7980

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swiveling in the grinding wheel (drive

and process coolant are switched on)

G0 Z0 Approach Z0.

X50 move forward towards X50

G4 X10 Wait 10 seconds

G9679 Disengage

Z100 Move to 100mm in Z

G4 X10 Wait 10 seconds

M99 End of program with M99

100115965/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 152 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.32 Assisted manual mode

Assisted manual mode enables a workpiece batch to be ground without having to

set up the workpiece or create a program. This function enables a workpiece to be
machined in the conventional way. One axis can oscillate between two reversal
positions and the other axis can be fed in using the handwheel. The reversal posi-
tions are set up in the Teach-In.
If the reversal positions are set up, then additional workpieces can be ground auto-
matically.

Fig. C-149 setup_mainmenu

Dressing between two workpieces can be carried out using the dressing key (Note:
the wheel dresser needs to be set up for this grinding wheel); dressing amounts are
compensated automatically. However, it is not possible to dress directly from man-
ual mode.

100115974/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 153
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.32.1 Setting up the tool

Select the SET mode

Fig. C-150 setup_manual_mode_main

Back to main menu “Set-up”.

Set up diameter or shoulder using tool selection for machining in manual mode.

Setting up another diameter or shoulder. (The tool must be set up for manual mode)

Start manual mode for series production. (The tool must be set up for manual mode)

100115974/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 154 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

C.32.2 Set up the diameter or shoulder

Selecting the grinding wheel for grinding in manual mode.

Fig. C-151 setup_manual_mode_selection

The grinding wheel is swiveled into the grinding position using cycle start.

Fig. C-152 colose_door_cycle_start

Manual mode for the selected grinding wheel can now be set up in this screen. The
grinding positions are imported using the Teach-In process.

100115974/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 155
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

Fig. C-153 setup_handbetrieb_durchmesser

Set-up angle When machining tapers, the grinding wheel can be swiveled to the required angle.
B-axis

Workpiece Number of revolutions for initial grinding of workpiece

speed

Sensor selection Sensitron channel

Oscillation Speed for oscillation.

speed

Close Back to main menu “Set-up”.

Pos. A Accepting position A.

Pos. B Accepting position B.

Start Starts the grinding process for initial grinding of workpiece.

Production Changes to series production. Enabled after initial grinding.

Now the first reversal position is approached manually with the grinding wheel.
Accepting position A. The corresponding position is marked red as confirmation.
This position on the workpiece is approached automatically.
The second reversal position is approached and accepted like the first one. If no
oscillating movement is to be carried out the two positions can be set up at the
same place (without the axes moving).
Internal grinding
For internal grinding the approach and retract positions also have to be set up.

100115974/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 156 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-154 setup_handbetrieb_durchmesser2

100115974/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 157
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.33 Grinding the first workpiece

Starts the grinding process

Fig. C-155 wheel_start

The program is started using [Start cycle] and the following actions carried out:

 Retract the grinding wheel and start the grinding wheel drive

 Switching on the coolant

 Moving to the approach position (only for internal grinding)

 Moving to the first reversal position and starting the oscillating movement

 The workpiece can now be touched-off until it is clean (infeed using handwheel)

100115974/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 158 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP

Fig. C-156 setup_manual_mode_diameter_start

 [Start cycle] terminates the initial grinding and imports the current position of the
infeed axis as the actual position.

 The grinding wheel retracts, the coolant is switched off and the wheel guard is
closed.

100115974/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 159
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

C.34 Series production

If grinding now continues in series production then the workpiece first needs to be
measured.

Changes to series production.

Measure the workpiece and enter the diameter i.e. Z position.

Fig. C-157 setup_manual_mode_input_diam

The nominal dimension and the grinding technology can now be entered in this
screen. Two processes are supported: plunging with oscillation and traverse grind-
ing.

C.34.1 PLUNGE WITH OSCILLATION

Fig. C-158 setup_manual_mode_series

The grinding parameters have to be entered in the screen in order to automate the
grinding operation.

X/Z: Nominal dimension

correction A workpiece correction can be carried out.
amount:

100115974/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 160 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTING UP
Grinding parameters see G9202


Back to Main menu “Set-up”

Setting up manual mode again.

Starting the production process.

C.34.2 Traverse grinding

Fig. C-159 setup_manual_mode_series2

The grinding parameters have to be entered in the screen in order to automate the
grinding operation.

X/Z: Nominal dimension

correction A workpiece correction can be carried out.
amount:
See G9206
E.9.3.6 "G9206 Traverse grinding",  E-255 for grinding parameters

Close Back to main menu “Set-up”.

Setting up Setting up manual mode again.

Start Starting the production process.

100115974/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 C - 161
SETTING UP / STUDERWIN

100115974/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

C - 162 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS

D Corrections

As it is almost impossible to achieve the required tolerances straight away when

grinding, various correction options are provided:

  D.1 "Workpiece Correction",  D-165

  D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167
  D.3 "Grinding wheel corrections",  D-169
  D.4 "Turning Tool corrections",  D-176
  D.5 "Dressing tool corrections",  D-178
  D.6 "Cylindricity correction",  D-181
  D.7 "Settings",  D-182

Fig. D-1 corr_mainmenu

Geometric errors in the workpiece can have various causes, e.g.:

 Inaccurate measurement when setting up the workpiece
Correction:
 Carrying out a size correction on the diameter or the shoulder.
 Thermal modification of the machine geometry
Correction:
 Carrying out a size correction on the diameter or the shoulder.
 Bending of the workpiece
Correction:
 Alter the feed value (lower grinding wheel pressure)
 Correcting the relevant fit.
 Increased wear on the grinding tool
Correction:
 More frequent dressing
 Increase the peripheral speed

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 163
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN
 Wear and tear of the dressing tool
Correction:
 Carrying out a size correction on the diameter or the shoulder.
 Entering the dressing tool wear per dressing pass
 Differences in the centers between the points when grinding.
The workpieces are not always in the same place in the direction of the Z axis.
Correction:
 Use of length positioning (optional)
 Carrying out a size correction on the shoulder.
All corrections can be carried out using input screens.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 164 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS

D.1 Workpiece Correction

The workpiece correction enables correction of the whole workpiece, but also the
individual grinding wheels.

Workpiece periph- Alterating the workpiece peripheral speed.

eral speed:

Correcting the Corrects all X / Z positions on the workpiece.

entire workpiece:

Grinding wheel Corrects all X / Z positions which are machined with the same grinding wheel.
correction.:

Correction of tool All X / Y positions will be corrected which are processed with a turning tool of the
turret: corresponding tool turret.

Fig. D-2 corr_workpiece

Close Back to Main menu “Corrections”

Workpiece Displays the currently set up workpiece.

Open Displays the progress of the corrections at the relevant position.

curve

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 165
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN

Fig. D-3 corr_history

+ Enter The value entered in the field is added to the correction

-0.001 / +0.001 The value displayed on the softkey is added to the correction. The value assigned to
the two softkeys can be set in the correction settings.
D.7 "Settings",  D-182

The input The value entered in the field is accepted as the new correction

NOTE!
If a workpiece correction is carried out during machining the workpiece (correct-
ing the entire workpiece, grinding wheel correction) this becomes effective imme-
diately.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 166 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS

D.2 Corrections for specific fits

This view can display all cycles which enable a specific correction or on which an
external measurement value can be applied. To appear in the view the cycle must
have a block number between 1001 and 1032.
The following cycles can be corrected:

  E.12 "GRINDING CYCLES",  E-238

  E.79 "G9610 Selection lathe tool (option)",  E-371
  E.85 "G9680 Activate customer correction",  E-382
  E.86 "G9825 Autom. cylindricity correction (optional)",  E-383
  E.45 "G204 Activating measurement control (option)",  E-301
  E.55 "G231 Calculate external measurement value as LP value (option)",
 E-325
  E.57 "G233 Write external values to the measurement control (option)",  E-
326
  E.58 "G240 Read in values from integrated measurement control (option)",
 E-327

Fig. D-4 program_pictogramming

The sequence of these block numbers can be freely assigned in the main program,
however this determines the sequence in which they are listed on the correction
screen.

Fig. D-5 corr_partial

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 167
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN
Close Back to Main menu “Corrections”

Open Opening a program that can contain corrections for specific fits.

Open curve Displays the progress of the corrections at the relevant position.

Fig. D-6 corr_history

+ Enter The value entered in the field is added to the correction

-0.001 / +0.001 The value displayed on the softkey is added to the correction. The value assigned to
the two softkeys can be set in the correction settings. D.7 "Settings",  D-182

The input The value entered in the field is accepted as the new correction.
If grinding is carried on with post-measurement controls (optional), for each a value
an external post-measurement value channel can be specified. The correction val-
ues will be determined by subsequent measurement and automatically compen-
sated for the desired position.

External values Resets the external correction values of the measurement controls.
Delete

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 168 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS

D.3 Grinding wheel corrections

Various technological values can be edited in the grinding wheel corrections for
grinding wheels which have been set up:
 Peripheral speeds
 Number of dressing cycles
 Dressing amounts
 Dressing speeds
 Dressing direction
 etc.

Likewise, geometric corrections can be carried out:

 Grinding wheel diameter
 Grinding wheel width
 Dressing tool positions for this grinding wheel, when working with the left and
right dressing tools.

The dialog and views are the same as when programming, but can no longer be
changed.

Fig. D-7

Close Back to Main menu “Corrections”

Back to previous view (tab).

Continue to next view (Tab).

Open Loading another grinding wheel. In “Correcting” mode, only allocated grinding
wheels can be loaded.

100115979/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 169
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN

Fig. D-8 select

You can use the [Up] and [Down] keys to select the grinding wheel you want. When
you click on [OK] ] or [Enter], the dialog will be closed and the grinding wheel will be
loaded.

Save Saves the corrections. If the geometry has been modified or the grinding wheel
reset, reprofiling will take place automatically.

[Edit] Changes the correction and view mode.

Fig. D-9

Expert / Basic Switches between basic and expert view.

View

Geometry You can use this softkey to activate the geometry correction mode. Now the geome-
Correction try of the grinding wheel can be modified. Geometry correction calls for reprofiling of
the grinding wheel.

Reset If the grinding wheel is completely used up, you can use [Reset] to substitute a new
identical grinding wheel without needed to install it from scratch. All wear data will
be reset. When saving the grinding wheel, reprofiling will be launched.

Print A pdf file of the grinding wheel will be generated and can be printed out.

100115979/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 170 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS

D.3.1 Corrections to main dimension

Fig. D-10 corr_wheel_size D

Grinding wheel The diameter of a grinding wheel does not normally need to be corrected. If, how-
diameter ever, a distortion arises during form grinding, this distortion can be attributed to an
incorrect grinding wheel diameter.

Fig. D-11 Wheel_corr_dia

1: Required shape, 2: Actual shape

Case A: The grinding wheel diameter needs to be reduced.

concave surface

Case B: The grinding wheel diameter needs to be increased.

convex surface

For safety reasons, the grinding wheel diameter can be corrected by a maximum of
5% as the grinding wheel diameter is also used for calculating the rotational speed.

Grinding wheel If the grinding wheel width is corrected, then the T points 11 to 20 need to be cor-
width rected by the relevant amount. The dressing tool is always trued to the same point.
i.e. the grinding wheel width is only numerically altered.

100115979/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 171
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN

D.3.2 Geometry corrections

For it to be possible to correct the geometry, geometry correction must be enabled

[Edit]-[Geometry corrections]. In principle the form and the geometry can only be
corrected on grinding wheels that have been set up.

Fig. D-12 corr_wheel_geometrie

Form correction B A form correction B is necessary if the contour on the left side does not match the
one on the right side (in the direction of the X-axis). The grinding wheel must be pro-
filed by the correction amount.

Fig. D-13 Wheel_corr_b

Negative correc- A negative correction value is entered if the grinding wheel width needs to be
tion value decreased. When a dressing value Z is defined to the right for this grinding wheel,
then a suitable profiling allowance will be calculated and displayed. If no dressing
value Z is defined, then the profiling allowance must be calculated and entered
manually (the control system cannot calculate the allowance, because it does not
know the profile of the grinding wheel).

100115979/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 172 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS
Positive correc- A positive correction value is entered if the grinding wheel width needs to be
tion value increased. A profiling allowance cannot be calculated by the control system. In this
case the profiling allowance must be calculated and entered manually. Dressing
must be carried out in X until the dressing tool is engaged on the entire contour
once more.

Form correction X A form correction X is necessary if the contour on the left side does not match the
one on the right side (in the direction of the X-axis). The grinding wheel must be pro-
filed by the correction amount.

Fig. D-14 Wheel_corr_x

Negative correc- A negative correction value is entered if the right-hand form needs to be moved into D
tion value the minus part of the X-axis. An appropriate profiling allowance is calculated and
displayed. If no dressing value X is defined, then the profiling allowance must be
calculated and entered manually.

Positive correc- A positive correction value is entered if the right-hand form needs to be moved into
tion value the plus part of the X-axis. An appropriate profiling allowance is calculated and dis-
played. If no dressing value X is defined, then the profiling allowance must be calcu-
lated and entered manually.
After the correction value has been entered, dressing (reprofiling) must be started.

100115979/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 173
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN

D.3.3 Technology corrections

Technology data can also be modified.

Fig. D-15 technology

Dressing tool wear Defines how much the dressing tool is worn during each dressing pass
Example:
Dressing is carried out for each piece. After ten pieces the correction must always
be 1µm larger. This means that with each pass the dressing tool is worn by 0.1µm.
This value can be entered as the amount of wear in X.

D.3.4 Reprofiling

Reprofiling makes it possible for a geometry change on the grinding wheel to be

dressed.

Fig. D-16 dress_reprofil

Profiling Allowance for profiling in X.

allowance in X
100115979/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 174 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS
 If this is entered as a positive value, dressing starts from the last dressing posi-
tion plus the profiling allowance.

 If this is entered as a negative value, dressing starts from the last dressing posi-
tion and then repeatedly feeds in by the dressing amount until the profiling
allowance has been processed.

A negative profiling allowance corresponds to several dressing cycles.

The number of dressing cycles will be calculated on the basis of the allowance and
the dressing amount.

Profiling Allowance for profiling in Z.

allowance Z

WARNING!
The values must be checked before reprofiling is started. Incorrect entries may
result in damage to the dressing tools and the grinding wheel.

Now you can start reprofiling by hitting the [OK] key:

Fig. D-17 wheel_start

After actuating Cycle Start

 the grinding wheel is swiveled to the dressing angle, if necessary

 the grinding wheel drive is switched on,

 approached to the dressing tool and reprofiled.

100115979/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 175
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN

D.4 Turning Tool corrections

In Turning Tool Corrections, tools that have been set up on the tool turret can be
adjusted to each other. The correction comprises the following values:
 Length in X, (diameter correction)
 Length in Z,
 Cutting edge radius

You also have the possibility of resetting the working life of the turning tool, for
example when a flip plate is changed.

Fig. D-18 corr_turning_tool

You can use the [Up] and [Down] keys to select the turning tool you want.

Close Back to Main menu “Corrections”

Edit Corrects the selected turning tool. The entry focus is set to the correction window.

Load If the machine has more than one turning tool turret, you can select the tool turret
you want with [Load].

Select tool: The selected tool will be swiveled into working position.

Export The selected tool can be exported as a file.

With [Edit] you can now enter the correction values for a turning tool.

100115979/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 176 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS

Fig. D-19 corr_turning_tool2

Cancel Changes will not be saved. D

OK Accept the corrections.

+Input: The value entered in the field is added to the correction.

-0.001 / +0.001: The value displayed on the softkey is added to the correction. The value assigned to
the two softkeys can be set in the correction settings.
D.7 "Settings",  D-182

Input: The value entered in the field is accepted as the new correction.

Working life reset

Resets the working life of the turning tool to 100%.

100115979/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 177
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN

D.5 Dressing tool corrections

The dressing tool corrections enable correction of dressing tools which are set up,
e.g.:

 Radius
 Pre-position of approach
 Measured position (expert view)

Fig. D-20 corr_dresser

Close Back to Main menu “Corrections”

Back to previous view (tab).

Continue to next view (tab)

Open: Loads another dressing tool. In “Correcting” mode only allocated dressing tools can
be loaded.

Fig. D-21 corr_select_dresser

100115979/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 178 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS
Save: Saves the corrections.

[Edit] Further functions, like Change view mode.

Fig. D-22 corr_dresser_sk2

Expert / Basic View Switches between basic and expert view.

Printer A pdf file of the dressing tool will be generated, which can be printed out.

Fig. D-23 corr_dressingtool

Radius If the dressed grinding wheel shape is not exact, one possible reason for this can be
an incorrect dressing tool radius. The change to the radius effects a correction of
the tool radius compensation during dressing.

Measured position Dressing tools can be measured externally (option). These entries only appear in
X/Z expert mode.

Pre-position in X / This position defines where the grinding wheel starts dressing (X value is in the
Z diameter!)

Max. wear and tear Maximum permissible wear and tear of the dressing tool.
X/Z

100115979/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 179
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN

Fig. D-24 corr_left_dressingtool

Safety angle The safety angle is used for optimized reprofiling of a grinding wheel with Studer-
left/right Dress (option).

100115979/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 180 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / CORRECTIONS

D.6 Cylindricity correction

This correction illustration shows how to correct cylindricity errors on workpieces

which are clamped between centers. The correction is always carried out on the tail-
stock, either manually or by an automatic adjustment.

Fig. D-25 corr_cylindricity

Clamping length Length over which the workpiece is clamped.

measured length This length shows the distance of the measured diameter.

Diameter 1 Measured workpiece diameter nearer to the tailstock.

Diameter 2 Measured workpiece diameter nearer to the workpiece spindle head.

CURRENT POSI- Current position of the cylindricity setting (with automatic adjustment).
TION

Correction value This value indicates by how much the cylindricity setting needs to be corrected. The
sign indicates in which direction the correction should take place (see figure).

Close Back to Main menu “Corrections”

Calculate Calculates the corresponding correction value from the entries.

correction

Positioning Adjusts the cylindricity setting by the relevant correction value (not with automatic
adjustment).

100115979/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 D - 181
CORRECTIONS / STUDERWIN

D.7 Settings

Fig. D-26 corr_settings

Maximum value for This limit allows definition of the maximum input. This means that values lying out-
input with this limit cannot be entered.

Maximum value for This limit allows definition of the maximum input which can be added to the existing
+ input correction using the softkey [+Input]. This means that values lying outwith this limit
cannot be entered.

Value key 1/2 Frequently used +entries can be configured on two softkeys.

Size curve Maximum number of entries in the correction curve view.

Close Back to Main menu “Corrections”

Save: Saves the change.

100115979/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

D - 182 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E Programming

In this chapter the following topics are described:

  E.1 "General programming",  E-183
  E.2 "Define workpiece",  E-196
  E.3 "Geometry editor",  E-199
  E.4 "Define grinding wheel",  E-203
  E.8 "Defining a dressing unit",  E-224
  E.9 "Pictogramming",  E-227
  E.10 "Text editor",  E-236
  E.11 "Edit default values",  E-237
  E.12 "GRINDING CYCLES",  E-238
  E.113 "Special Grinding Wheel Shapes",  E-417

E.1 General programming

The “Programming” area serves for the creatio of machining programs and tool def-
initions. The relevant data is stored in the form of individual files.

Workpiece Workpiece data are saved in a file with the [workpiece] suffix. Workpieces can be
used as a machining project containing all tools and machining programs, as well as
the geometry and settings required for the production of this workpiece.

Grinding Grinding wheel data are saved in a file with the [wheel] suffix, containing the geom-
wheel etry and technological data for the grinding wheel.

Dressing unit Dressing unit data are saved in a file with the [dresser] suffix, containing several
dressing diamonds and, in the case of power driven units, the rotary speed and E
direction of rotation as well.

Main pro- Pictogramming programs with the suffix [main] or ISO files may be used as main
grams programs. These comprise the machining process.

Subroutine Pictogramming programs with the suffix [sub] or ISO files may be used as subrou-
tines. They include the workpiece or grinding wheel contours.

Help Pro- Pictogramming programs with the suffix [help] or ISO files may be used as auxiliary
grams programs. Auxiliary programs serve for special disengagement or for the definition
of recurrent sequences during the set-up process.

System pro- System programs are used internally. These files should not be edited or deleted.
grams

pdf files Machining programs and tools can be generated as pdf files for printing purposes.
If files are used on the CNC, the file name of a program must be defined as follows:
o<number with 4 digits>.<file suffix>
The number with 4 digits must be allocated in accordance with the program type.
Valid numbers for each program type are defined as follows:

 0001 to 4999: Main programs

 5000 to 5999: Help programs

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 183
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
 6000 to 6999: Subprograms
 7000 to 7799: Grinding wheels
 7800 to 7899: Dressing units
 7900 to 9999: System programs

The following are examples of valid file names:

 o0001.main: Pictogramming main program with the program number 1

 o0200.main: ISO main program with the program number 200
 o7100.wheel: grinding wheel with the program number 7000
 o6210.iso: ISO subroutine with the program number 6210

All other file types (such as workpiece, clamping device and spindle definitions) can
have any file name you choose to give.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 184 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Range Use

O7900 - O7999 Reserved for Studer Systems Applications

O7900 Dummy-File for StuderWIN

 Used internally

O7901 Auxiliary Program for Assisted Manual Mode (Traversing in X)

 Used internally for Assisted Manual Mode (See also Chapter D.9)

O7902 Auxiliary Program for Assisted Manual Mode (Traversing in Z)

 Used internally for Assisted Manual Mode (See also Chapter D.9)

O7910 Auxiliary Program to start the ?Retract Cycle” with Push-Button

 Used internally

O7911 Auxiliary Program to start Dressing with Push-Button

 Used internally

O7915 Referencing and Zeroing of the C-Axis (For Proximity-Switch System only)

 Used internally

O7916 Retract program after interrupt

 Used internally. End with M99

O7920 Auxiliary program StuderWIN (dynamic)

 Used internally.

O7950 - O7959 Suggested Program Numbers for ?Initial Position” Program

 Call of the Handling System

O7960 - O7969 Suggested Program Numbers for ?Initial Position” Program

E
 Call of the Workpiece Program

O7980 - O7989 Suggested Program Numbers for the ?Robot Program”

 Defined by user

O7990 Clamp clamping device (W axis)

O7991 Release clamping device (W axis)

O8000 - O9999 Reserved for special Studer applications.

 Programs in the write-protected memory area

O8001 Definition file for HighCOM

 Memory definition for StuderHighCOM

O8002 Setting high-speed parameters

O8003 Resetting high-speed parameters

O8004 HSM-RESET using RESET-KEY

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 185
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.1.1 Select Programming

1. Select “Studer basic screen”

This screen will appear each time the machine is started up

Fig. E-1 main_programming

2. Select “Programming” with the keys [,] and [ENTER] or using the mouse, or
using the hotkey [Programming]
3. After selecting [Programming] the following screen is displayed:

Fig. E-2 program_menu

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 186 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
Program manager Administration of workpiece programs, subroutines, grinding wheel programs and
workpiece programs
 E.1.4 "Transferring / copying programs",  E-192

Workpiece Creating a workpiece

define  E.2 "Define workpiece",  E-196

Define grinding Creation and editing of grinding wheel programs

wheel  E.4 "Define grinding wheel",  E-203

Defining a dress- Creation and editing of dressing unit programs

ing unit  E.4 "Define grinding wheel",  E-203

Pictogramming Creation of workpiece programs and subroutines with Pictogramming

 E.6 "Pictogramming",  E-227

Text editor Editing of system programs and ISO programs

 E.7 "Text editor",  E-238

Edit default values Creating and editing default value tables

 E.8 "Edit default values",  E-240

StuderContur Additional programs for specific areas of use, such as form grinding and contour
StuderForm processing (optional).
StuderFormHSM
StuderThread

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 187
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.1.2 Program manager

Programs can be administered using the Program Manager. This enables the edit-
ing, deleting and copying of programs.
Comments (if available), the status on the CNC (loaded/not loaded) and the date
modified are displayed in the overview
The following directories are available:

 CNC programs: Comprising all CNC programs. All workpiece definitions are
stored in this directory.
 Dressing tools. All dressing units
 Help programs: All help programs
 Subroutines: All subroutines for workpiece and grinding wheel contours
 System: All system programs
 Turning tools: All turning tool definitions
 Grinding wheels: All grinding wheel definitions
 Main programs: Machining programs
 Other: Comprising other definitions, like clamping devices and spindle con-
figurations.

 Loader programs (optional): All CNC programs for built-in loader

 Main programs: Loader main programs
 System: All system programs of the loader

 Documents: Storage area for other customer files

 Pictures: Varius pictures and graphics can be saved here.
 StuderForm: Project files for form grinding (optional)
 StuderFormHS: Project files for form grinding with High Speed Machining
(optional)
 StuderThread: Project files for thread grinding (optional)
 StuderContour: Project files for peel or contour grinding (optional)
 Technology: Manufacturing specifications for technology calculations
(optional)

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 188 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Fig. E-3 program_manager

Fig. E-4 program_manager_sk2

Close Returns to the main Programming menu.

New Creating a new program: E.1.3 "Creation of new programs",  E-191 E

Activate Activation of a program on CNC. Activated programs can be executed with “Cycle
start”.
With multichannel machines (simultaneous CNC or built-in loader) the channel
must be selected in a dialog.

Fig. E-5 program_manager_activate

Load new Loads the selected program in the controller. This is necessary if a program cannot
be loaded automatically (error is displayed) or if the program was unloaded manu-
ally.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 189
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Unload The selected program is unloaded from the control system. This releases memory
space on the control system.

Edit The selected program is opened in the corresponding Editor and can be edited.

Delete The selected program is deleted.

File manager The file manager is opened. This allows copying of programs from the machine onto
another storage medium and vice versa.
E.1.4 "Transferring / copying programs",  E-192

DNC A customer-specific DNC application can be assigned using this softkey (
E.1.5 "Program management settings",  E-194). When you activate the softkey
the DNC application will be launched.

Save as The selected program is saved under a different name (program number).

Reset The entire CNC program memory will be reset, and all programs will be reloaded to
the CNC.

Print The selected program is transformed to a printable pdf document and opened as a
pdf file.

Settings Calls the settings for program management (E.1.5 "Program management set-
tings",  E-194).

Search Searches for files in the selected directory. The search string applies to the file
name and the comment.

Fig. E-6 program_manager_search

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 190 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.1.3 Creation of new programs

Using [New] a new program can be created. The following dialog appears:

Fig. E-7 program_new

Program number: A program number must be entered here.

Valid numbers for each type of program are defined as follows:

 0001 to 4999: Main programs
 5000 to 5999: Help programs
 6000 to 6999: Subprograms
 7000 to 7799: Grinding wheels
 7800 to 7899: Dressing units
 7900 to 9999: System programs E
The program is saved automatically in the correct folder.

ISO program: Checking the “ISO program” box creates an ISO program.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 191
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.1.4 Transferring / copying programs

Programs can be transferred to the machine in the following ways:

 - from a USB memory stick or network drive
 - with an external programming place, via Ethernet

Transferring the programs from a drive onto the machine is carried out in File Man-
ager.

NOTE!
Please be aware that programs which are directly written to the controls (by
DNC, or programs of third party suppliers), will not be recognized by StuderWIN.
The programs must be copied to a StuderWIN directory. StuderWIN will then load
the oprograms automatically, ato the CNC controls.

Fig. E-8 program_manager2

Back to CNC program management.

Copy The selected program on the left is copied from the program directory into the
selected data archive on the right.

Directory Selects the data archive directory. A memory stick, a local directory or a network
drive may be used as a directory. c

Copy The selected program on the right will be coped from the data archive to the CNC.
In the copying dialog various copying and converting options may be selected.

Edit The selected program is opened in the corresponding Editor and can be edited.

Delete The selected program is deleted.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 192 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
E.1.4.1 Copying from the machine into a data archive
Additional options can be specified when copying from the machine into a data
archive.

Fig. E-9 program_copy2

Save data as an The selected file can be saved in the data archive as an ISO file. However, the file is
ISO file: normally saved in the StuderWIN format.

Save as: If the “Save data as an ISO file” option is selected, then the file can be saved with
any name and a special suffix.

E.1.4.2 Copying from the data archive onto the machine

One or more files can be copied from the data archive onto the machine.

NOTE!
After being copied onto the machine the file must have a valid name so that it can
be executed.
(E.1 "General programming",  E-183)

ISO files with any file names and suffixes can be transferred to the machine. Nor- E
mally the machine automatically creates a valid name for the file. Additional ISO
endings can be configured (E.1.5.2 "CNC configuration",  E-195)

Fig. E-10 program_copy

Copy data Automatically copies one or more programs into the relevant directory on the
into standard machine. By deselecting this option, a file can be copied to any chosen directory.
directory:

Convert to Studer- This option enables an ISO file to be converted into a StuderWIN format.
WIN format

NOTE!
If grinding wheels and dressing tools are saved as ISO files in the data archive
and then converted into StuderWIN format again then information is lost. It is rec-
ommended not to archive these kind of files as ISO files if possible.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 193
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.1.5 Program management settings

The settings for program management comprise the following areas:

 Settings of the data server
 Customer-specific settings

E.1.5.1 Settings of the data server

The data server is responsible for transferring programs and for communication with
a Studer programming place, like StuderGRIND (optional). In Settings you can con-
figure access to a programming place on the CNC machine.

Fig. E-11 program_settings

Allow In general terms, allows access to the CNC machine.

access to
StuderWIN:

Read from Access rights for reading control data.

CNC memory:

Read of Access privileges for read of program memory.

programs:

Write of Access privileges for writing of programs to the program memory.

programs:
There are three different levels of access privilege:
 Never: No access for the function in question
 Only with confirmation Access is only possible when confirmation to this effect
has been issued on the CNC machine.
 Always: Access is always possible: .

In addition exceptions may be defined, making it possible for computer stations

(hosts) to be generally authorized or blocked.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 194 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
E.1.5.2 CNC configuration
Allows you to configure a customer-specific DNC application.

Fig. E-12 program_settings2

Application: Path and name of the application

Parameter: Transfer or starting parameter. In typical cases, the directory of the CNC memory
must be given here.

ISO file types: Information on additional file types which should be recognized as ISO files.
The following types of files are already known to the system:

 dnc: ISO-Dateien aus DNC_Systemen

 dip: ISO files from StuderProfil E
 die: ISO files from StuderEdit
 dif: ISO files from StuderForm
 dit: ISO files from StuderThread

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 195
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.2 Define workpiece

Under “Define workpiece” workpieces can be created and defined. A workpiece

comprises:

 Workpiece geometry
 Technology data for the workpiece (option)
 Teach positions and settings for the loader system (option)
 Machining processes, e.g. clamping
 Tools required to produce the workpiece
 Machining programs (main and subprograms)
 Clamping devices and spindle configurations
 Table mounting positions (tailstock, workhead, etc.)

The workpiece serves as a folder for a machine which has been set up. The
assigned workpiece (see C.4.1 "Assign workpiece",  C-53) automatically gathers
all the tools and settings using “Update data” and therefore completes automatically.

NOTE!
For a new workpiece, first define only the geometry and technology data. You can
then set up the machine and the workpiece will gather the assigned tools. Finally
create the machining program.

E.2.1 Workpiece editor

Fig. E-13 program_workpiece

Close Exits the Editor

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 196 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
New Creating a new workpiece

Open Open an existing workpiece

Save Saving the open workpiece.

Modify Modify an entry

For geometry see (E.3 "Geometry editor",  E-199)
For grinding wheels see (E.4 "Define grinding wheel",  E-203)
For dressing tools see (E.5 "Defining a dressing unit",  E-223)
For main programs see (E.6 "Pictogramming",  E-227)

[Edit]

Fig. E-14 program_workpiece_sk2

New Add a new machining process

Delete Delete the selected machining process.

New Create a new file. The file will be created depending on the selected entry in the
workpiece overview. For example, you can create new grinding wheels for spindle
noses.

Add Add a file to the workpiece.

Delete Delete a selected entry from the workpiece.

Save as: Save the currently open workpiece with a different name.

E.2.1.1 Workpiece data E

General data on the workpiece can be specified on the first register. Additional infor-
mation on the entry, such as the machining process or a table component appear,
depending on the entry selected on the left.

Description: Short description of the workpiece. This information appears as a comment in the
program manager.
Clamping can be defined geometrically in the machining process

Offset for This information describes the distance from the workpiece zero point to the zero
clamping: point of the workpiece clamping on the workhead.

Clamping: If the back of the workpiece is being machined, then the workpiece profile can be
inverted by selecting the check box
For table components the offset can also be specified on the workpiece table. This
is usually the position which can be read from the scale.

E.2.1.2 Technology (option)

The “Technology” register can be used to define the material and the machineability.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 197
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Fig. E-15 program_workpiece_technology

Material: Information on the group of materials

Thermal treatment Additional information on the characteristics of the material

and hardness

Abrasive Indicates which abrasive would be suitable for machining this workpiece
suitability:

The data on workpiece diameter, length, etc. are used for calculating the bending,
so that the grinding wheel pressure can be optimally calculated.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 198 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.3 Geometry editor

The contour editor is used to create geometries for:

 Workpiece geometry (E.2 "Define workpiece",  E-196)

 Grinding wheel geometry (see Link E.3 Define grinding wheels)

A contour is taken to be a continuous line. This can be used to define straight lines
or arcs. The individual elements of the contour are shown on the left side.

NOTE!
A geometry can consist of several contours. Only enter the sections which are of
relevance for machining the workpiece.

Fig. E-16 program_contour

Close Close contour editor. Return to the workpiece or grinding wheel editor.

New Create a new contour

Modify Modify the selected element

Delete Delete the selected element

[Edit]

Fig. E-17 program_contour_sk2

Paste Insert a shoulder in the contour

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 199
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Insert Insert a diameter in the contour

Insert Insert a taper in the contour

Insert Insert a reference point in the contour

Move Move the whole contour by an amount in X and Z

Reflect Reflect a contour in the X axis

Reflect Reflect a contour in the Z axis

[Graphic] Graphic functions

Fig. E-18 program_contour_sk3

Design Change the display to create a contour

3D view Change the view to 3D. Check whether the contours produce a complete workpiece

Select Change to the selection mode. Individual elements can be selected

Move Change to the move mode. The graphic can be positioned.

Rotation Change to the rotate mode. The graphic can now be rotated. Useful in the 3D view.

Reset Automatic zoom in order to display the whole contour in the window.

E.3.1 Create a contour

External or internal contours can be created for a workpiece profile. Creating a con-
tour starts with entering the starting point:

Fig. E-19 program_contour_new

New elements can be added on from the previous element using Insert. There are 3
types of elements:

For a shoulder only the X value can be specified. The Z position is transferred from
the previous element.

For a diameter only the Z value can be specified. The X position is transferred from
the previous element

For a taper the X and Z values can be specified or alternatively a position value and
the taper angle

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 200 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Fig. E-20 program_contour2

The elements are defined as straight lines by default. An arc can be created
between 2 points by selecting the “Arc” check box. The radius value can have two
directions

 Positive: counter clockwise

 Negative: clockwise

Each element can be connected to its predecessor (except for the starting point).

E.3.2 Setting reference points

The contour editor provides the option of defining reference points for a contour.
This function is available for creating grinding wheel contours (E.10 "Special Grind-
ing Wheel Shapes",  E-389).

Fig. E-21 program_contour3

The contour editor provides the option for easy insertion of appropriate reference
points. Select a contour element. All the possible points will then be displayed.
Now select the required point and press the soft key to insert a reference point.

Delete reference point

Insert a reference point

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 201
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Fig. E-22 program_contour_addrefpoint

Number Enter the number of the reference point (Link E.3.1 Grinding wheel reference
points)

Position: X and Z values of the reference point

Radius: Radius of the reference point. Used to trace a contour on the workpiece using the
workpiece radius correction.

Orientation: Orientation of the reference point. Used to trace a contour on the workpiece using
the workpiece radius correction.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 202 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.4 Define grinding wheel

“Define grinding wheel” can be used to create new grinding wheels and manage
existing ones. A grinding wheel basically consists of:

 Basic dimensions
 Up to 2 machining sides
 Left wheel geometry
 Right wheel geometry

 Technological data
 Dressing technology
 Machining technology
 Grinding wheel characteristics (option)

E.4.1 Grinding wheel reference points (T number)

A grinding wheel can be defined with several reference points. At least 2 reference
points are available for all grinding wheels:

 T1: Left grinding wheel point

 T11: Right grinding wheel point

The reference points are automatically tracked by the control for standard grinding
wheel shapes. Defining reference points for special grinding wheel shapes (Form
10) is described in the section “Link to programming a special grinding wheel
shape”.
The reference points are set automatically when the grinding wheel is selected. In
machines with the Studer Quickset option all reference points are managed with
their X and Z values to the center of rotation of the tool head. When swiveling to dif- E
ferent grinding angles, the values of all grinding wheel reference points are auto-
matically transformed and converted into X’ and Z’ values.

Fig. E-23 wheel_quickset

100115987/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 203
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
E.4.1.1 External grinding wheels
T1 to T6 are available for the left grinding wheel geometry, depending on the form of
the T points. Correspondingly, T11 to T16 are available for the right grinding wheel
geometry, depending on the form.

Fig. E-24 wheel_ref_external

Angular Grinding Wheels

The same principle applies to angular grinding wheels as to straight grinding
wheels.

Fig. E-25 wheel_ref_angle1 Fig. E-26 wheel_ref_angle2

100115987/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 204 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
E.4.1.2 Internal grinding wheels
Internal grinding wheels have additional T points in order to use the rear of the
grinding wheel. The side which faces away from the main machining direction is
designated the rear side.

Fig. E-27 wheel_ref_internal

T8 to T10 are used as reference points on the rear side for the left grinding wheel
geometry.
T18 to T20 are used as reference points on the rear side for the right grinding wheel
geometry.

E.4.1.3 Thread grinding wheels

The thread grinding wheels have an additional reference point which is set by Stud-
erThread.

Fig. E-28 wheel_ref_thread

T7 is used as the reference point for a thread grinding wheel with a left grinding
wheel geometry.
T17 is used as the reference point for a thread grinding wheel with a right grinding
wheel geometry.

100115987/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 205
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.5 Grinding wheel editor

Fig. E-29 program_wheel1

Close Exits the Editor

New Defining a new grinding wheel  E.1.3 "Creation of new programs",  E-191

Open Opens an existing grinding wheel

Save Saves the opened grinding wheel

Next view

Previous view

[Edit]

Fig. E-30 program_wheel1_sk2

Expert/Basic View Switches between basic and expert views

Save as Saves the currently opened grinding wheel under a different program number.

Reset If the grinding wheel is completely used up, you can substitute a new identical grind-
ing wheel with [Reset]. All wear data will be reset.

print A pdf file of the grinding wheel will be generated and can be printed out.

100115988/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 206 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.5.1 Grinding Wheel Definition

Grinding wheel Type of grinding wheel (internal/external)

type The grinding wheel type is also used to define the main machining direction for
internal grinding wheels (X+ or X- grinding).

Grinding wheel Angle of the grinding wheel during dressing. In the case of an angular grinding
angle wheel, the diameter and shoulder are always dressed. If a positive angle is
entered, the left should will be dressed, if a negative angle is entered the right shoul-
der will be dressed
The dressing amount is calculated automatically for an angular grinding wheel, in
order to prevent distortion (see Technology).
The form of the grinding wheel can be specified in the grinding wheel geometry. The
left-hand and right-hand sides of the grinding wheel are specified for this purpose.

Geometry 1 Dress diameter only

Geometry 2 Diameter with a chamfer

Geometry 3 Diameter with radius

Geometry 4 Diameter and shoulder

Geometry 5 Diameter and shoulder with chamfer

Geometry 6 Diameter and shoulder with radius

Geometry 7 Diameter and shoulder with bevel

Geometry 8 Diameter and shoulder with bevel and chamfer

Geometry 9 Diameter and shoulder with bevel and radius

Geometry 10 Special grinding wheel forms require a subroutine. E

E.7 "Special wheel shapes (examples)",  E-221

Only geometries 4, 5, 6 and 10 are available for an angular grinding wheel.

Fig. E-31 program_wheel2

100115988/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 207
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.5.2 Main dimensions

The main dimensions of the grinding wheel are entered here.

Fig. E-32 program_wheel_geometry

Original diameter Diameter of a new grinding wheel

Current diameter Current diameter of a grinding wheel. In the case of a new grinding wheel, this
diameter is identical to the original diameter.

Minimum diameter When the grinding wheel becomes smaller than this width, it must be replaced with
a new grinding wheel.

Original width Width of a new grinding wheel

Current width Current width of the grinding wheel. In the case of a new grinding wheel, this width
is identical to the original width

Minimum width When the grinding wheel becomes smaller than this width, it must be replaced with
a new grinding wheel.

100115988/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 208 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.5.3 Technology

The technology data for the grinding wheel are entered here.

Fig. E-33 program_wheel_technology

Peripheral speeds Different peripheral speeds can be programmed for grinding and dressing.

Number of Number of dressing strokes which are carried out for each dressing.
passes
For each grinding wheel side the dressing technology can be entered. E
Dressing amount Dressing amount per dressing stroke. In the case of grinding wheels which are to be
X/Z dressed on the left and right sides, the dressing amount in X is identical for both
sides of the grinding wheel.

NOTE!
In the case of angular grinding wheels, the X and Z dressing amounts are inter-
dependent. If X is changed, then Z is recalculated; if Z is changed, then X is
recalculated. This is necessary to ensure that no contour distortion develops on
the wheel. In special cases, however, it may still be necessary to define the
dressing amounts separately. In such cases the linkage must be overridden using
“Expert View”.

Dressing speed X/ Infeed speed during dressing of the grinding wheel.

Z

Speed factor This factor reduces or increases the dressing speed when dressing chamfers and
Chamfer/radius: radiuses.

Dressing direc- Standard dressing direction (value 0) is: for a left dressing tool from right to left, and
tion: for a right dressing tool from left to right.

Dressing overrun: During dressing, this amount defines the distance covered from the grinding wheel.

100115988/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 209
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Dressing tool wear Defines how much the dressing tool is worn during each dressing pass
X/Z
Example: Dressing is carried out for each piece. After ten pieces the correction
must always be 1mm larger. This means that with each pass the dressing tool is
worn by 0.1mm.
This value can be entered as the amount of wear in X.

E.5.4 Left / Right Side

The geometry of the left / right side of the grinding wheel is specified here.

Fig. E-34 program_wheel_shape

Different values must be entered, depending on the grinding wheel shape and
grinding task.
The profiling allowance defines how much allowance should be made when profiling
the grinding wheel. This allowance is processed when dressing for the first time. 0
mm can be entered here for grinding wheels which have already been profiled.

100115988/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 210 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.5.5 Special grinding wheel shape with contour editor

If the desired grinding wheel shape cannot be dressed using the standard grinding
wheel shape, then it can be specially programmed in a subroutine.
This form is only restricted by the geometry of the dessing tool. Form 10 must be
used for defining the grinding wheel for special grinding wheel shapes.
It should be noted that for each specified dressing tool a custom subroutine must be
created.
A combination of standard form and special form for the left and rights sides is a
possible option.

Fig. E-35 program_wheel_shape10

StuderWIN supplies the option of creating the subroutine using the contour editor.
Select Form 10 in the grinding wheel editor and go to the register for the left or right
grinding wheel side.

Fig. E-36 program_wheel_shape10

Subroutine Enter a subroutine number. Use the “New” key to create a new subroutine or the
number “Open” key to open an existing one.

NOTE!
To create the contour using the contour editor and then to generate it as a sub-
routine, specify a subroutine with the suffix “sub”. (E.1 "General programming",
 E-183)

The “Modify” and “Generate” keys only appear with subroutines with the suffix “sub”.

100115988/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 211
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Fig. E-37 program_wheel_shape10

Modify Modify can be used to change an existing grinding wheel contour. If no contour
exists, a new one will be created. The method for creating a contour is described in
the section Link to E.2 Geometry Editor.

NOTE!
When creating the contour make sure that the zero point of the contour for the left
grinding wheel side corresponds to the reference point T1. T11 is the zero point
of the contour for the right grinding wheel side.

Generate Once a contour exists the subroutine can be generated using “Generate”.

Fig. E-38 program_wheel_generate

The first time this is done the standard can be transferred using the “Default” key.
This will calculate the overtravel values depending on the grinding wheel character-
istics.

Dressing direc- Specification as to whether the dresser moves from right to left or from left to right
tion: across the grinding wheel.

Radius: Dressing tool radius.

Orientation: Dressing tool orientation.

NOTE!
The “Radius” and “Orientation” specifications are recommended values which
are primarily used for the approach and retract strategies. Because the work-
piece radius correction is used, these values are transferred from the dressing
tool when dressing takes place (E.8 "Defining a dressing unit",  E-224)

Safety The dressing tool moves with rapid feed to this position outside the contour.
position:

100115988/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 212 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
Overtravel Dressing tool overtravel. There are various overtravel operations:
left/right:
 No overtravel: The dressing tool moves away directly from the grinding wheel
at the end of the contour
 Tangential: The dressing tool moves out tangentially to the last contour ele-
ment.
 Extend: The last contour element is extended further.
 Horizontal: For horizontal overtravel the movement is in the Z axis from the
grinding wheel
 Vertical: For vertical overtravel the movement is in the X axis from the grinding
wheel. This is used primarily for angular grinding wheels.

Special Checking this box enables a special feed to be specified. The dressing feed will be
feed: overwritten by the grinding wheel technology.

E.5.6 Special grinding wheel shape as an ISO program

In addition, a subroutine can be created directly as an ISO file.

Fig. E-39 program_wheel_shape10

Subroutine Enter a subroutine number. Use the “New” key to create a new subroutine or the
number “Open” key to open an existing one. Note that you are creating or loading ISO files.
The next sections deal exclusively with the manual creation of ISO dressing pro-
grams.

E.5.6.1 Approaching the dressing tool position

Approaching the dressing tool position is carried out using the standard dressing E
program. The grinding wheel moves the dressing tool to the pre-position. In so
doing, the grinding wheel is 2 mm (4 mm diameter) in X and 2 mm in Z in front of the
higher dressing tool. The pre-position for the lower dressing tool is set in X in such a
way that it corresponds to that of the higher one. The subroutine for the special
grinding wheel form must be programmed from this position.

NOTE!
The DRESSING START POSITION can be altered by the operator.

When the grinding wheel is at this position, then the following conditions are active:
 The grinding wheel motor is switched on
 The dressing amounts are offset
 The coolant is switched on
 The dressing tool motor is switched on (optional)

100115988/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 213
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
 The dressing tool is swiveled in (optional)

E.5.6.2 Dressing speeds

The dressing speed can be entered directly into the program. The disadvantage of
this is that it is not possible to work with the speed factors which can be defined in
G202.
However if this is necessary, the speed has to be programmed with variables.
The speeds which are defined when entering the grinding wheel values, as well as
all speed factors are stored during each dressing in the associated variables.

Fanuc Siemens Description

#100 R100 Programmed dressing speed in X, offset with the speed
factor from the function G200
#101 R101 Programmed dressing speed in Z, offset with the speed
factor from the function G202
#102 R102 Speed factor from the function G200
#103 R103 Speed factor chamfer / radius
#104 R104 Bevel speed factor

E.5.6.3 Programming the contour

Programming the contour is carried out in ISO sentences. It can also be generated
from a drawing on the external programming place with the software package
“STUDER GRIND ”.

Left wheel side program (Fanuc) Right wheel side program (Fanuc)
O6000; O6001;
N10 G0 Z-42 N10 G0 Z42
N20 G1 G41 X0 Z-42 F2000; N20 G1 G42 X0 Z42 F2000;
N30 Z-25 F#101; N30 Z25 F#101;
N40 G02 X-20 Z-15 R10 N40 G03 X-20 Z15 R10
F[#101*#103]; F[#101*#103];
N50 G1 Z-10 F#101; N50 G1 Z10 F#101;
N60 X-44 Z1, N60 X-44 Z-2,
N70 G40 G01 X4 Z2 F2000; N70 G40 G01 X4 Z-2 F2000;
M99; M99;

Attention must be paid to the following points:

 Programming the shape is carried out relative to the reference point on the left
or right grinding wheel edge. This means that the reference point corresponds
to the point which was used for setting up the dressing tool.
 For creating the ISO program for the special wheel shape there is a coordinates
system with inverse sign in the X and Z axes.
 If the form contains radii or chamfers (interpolated movements) the tool radius
correction must be inserted using G41 or G42 and retracted again at the end of
the contour.
 The X coordinates are related to the diameter. This means that the values must
be multiplied by 2 in relation to the grinding wheel radius.
100115988/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 214 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
 Commands for programming are to be found in the FANUC or Siemens operat-
ing manual.
 At the end of the subroutine the grinding wheel must be disengaged far enough
so that processing can take place afterwards in Z without collisions: e.g. G0 X4;
 The program will be concluded with an M99 (Fanuc) or M17 (Siemens).
 The wheel contour subroutine should not be started as a main program in MEM.

E.5.6.4 Tool-Radius Correction G41/G42

If the form contains radii or chamfers (interpolated movements) the tool radius cor-
rection must be activated using G41 or G42 and retracted again using G40 at the
end of the contour.
The selection G41 or G42 is dependent on the tool and direction and is defined as
follows:

G41 G42

An observer sits on the moving tool An observer sits on the moving tool
(dresser) and looks in the direction of (dresser) and looks in the direction of
travel: if the tool is left of the contour, travel: if the tool is right of the contour,
then G41 applies then G42 applies

 When dressing a grinding wheel, the dressing diamond is the tool.

NOTE!
G41 / G42 for machine type S145cnc in reverse order.

100115988/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 215
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
E.5.6.5 Selection and deselection of the tool radius correction
If dressing tools with relatively small radii (0.2mm) are used, then no problems
occur when selecting and deselecting the tool radius correction.
However, if dressing tools with large radii (dressing rolls) are used, then the selec-
tion or deselection can become somewhat more difficult. For selection, the control
system requires the tool radius as a travel path. In addition, this distance is depend-
ent on the orientation of the dressing tool. In this case it is recommended to choose
a straight orientation (6 or 8).

If the selection or deselection does not take place correctly, then the control system
displays the error 41. In this situation the approach or return distance must be
altered.

100115988/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 216 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.5.7 Tool-Radius Correction G41/G42

If the form contains radii or chamfers (interpolated movements) the tool radius cor-
rection must be activated using G41 or G42 and retracted again using G40 at the
end of the contour.
The selection G41 or G42 is dependent on the tool and direction and is defined as
follows:

G41 G42

An observer sits on the moving tool An observer sits on the moving tool
(dresser) and looks in the direction of (dresser) and looks in the direction of
travel: if the tool is left of the contour, travel: if the tool is right of the contour, E
then G41 applies then G42 applies

 When dressing a grinding wheel, the dressing diamond is the tool.

NOTE!
G41 / G42 for machine type S145cnc in reverse order.

100115988/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 217
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.5.8 Selection and deselection of the tool radius correction

If dressing tools with relatively small radii (0.2mm) are used, then no problems
occur when selecting and deselecting the tool radius correction.
However, if dressing tools with large radii (dressing rolls) are used, then the selec-
tion or deselection can become somewhat more difficult. For selection, the control
system requires the tool radius as a travel path. In addition, this distance is depend-
ent on the orientation of the dressing tool. In this case it is recommended to choose
a straight orientation (6 or 8).

If the selection or deselection does not take place correctly, then the control system
displays the error 41. In this situation the approach or return distance must be
altered.

100115988/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 218 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.6 G9400 Setting the wheel reference points

Additional wheel reference points (T numbers) can be defined as required.

Fanuc These T numbers can be defined either in the ISO wheel contour program or in the
main program with Picto. If the definition is done in the main program, the G9400
must be programmed immediately after the G9600 wheel selection.

The following T numbers are allowed: for standard wheel shapes (shapes 1-9)
 For left side: 7
 For right side: 17

The following T numbers are allowed: for standard wheel shape (shape 10)
 For left side: 2-7
 For right side: 12-17

Parameters for G9400 Unit Mode a)

T T number E
X Dimension in X mm (inch) O

Z Dimension in Z mm (inch)

R Radius mm (inch)

I Orientation

B T number
a) O=Option / E=Expert

T Number of the new wheel reference point

X Diametral dimension!
Dependent on [T] distance in X to T1, or to T11 or the wheel reference point [B], if
[B] is programmed.

Z Dependent on [T] distance in Z to T1, or to T11 or the wheel reference point [B], if
[B] is programmed.

R Radius of the wheel reference point

I Direction of the imaginary tool tip. This is defined depending on the grinding direc-
tion.

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 219
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

B Number of the wheel reference point for the dimensioning of [T].

If [B] is defined, then [X] and [Z] are dimensioned relative to [B] and not to T1 or T11.

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 220 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.7 Special wheel shapes (examples)

E.7.1 Left-hand Shape: Grinding Direction X-minus (X-)

Program for Left Wheel Sides (FANUC)

O6000;
G9400 T7 X-10 Z-15;
G0 Z-42.;
G1 G41 X0. Z-42. F2000.;
Z-25. F#101;
G02 X-20. Z-15. R10. F[#101*#103];
G1 Z-10. F#101;
X-44. Z2.;
G40 G01 X4. Z2. F2000.;
M99;
E
Program for Left Wheel Sides (SIEMENS)

;6000
L9400 (7, -20, -15,,);
G0 Z-42.
G1 G41 X0. Z-42. F2000.
Z-25. F=R101
G02 X-20. Z-15. CR=10. F=R101*R103
G1 Z-10. F=R101
X-44. Z2.
G40 G01 X4. Z2. F2000.
M17

 Shape subroutine for a special left grinding wheel shape and definition of a
wheel reference point T7.
 Dressing and grinding direction in X-minus (X-)

NOTE!

 Note the inverse coordinate system for the dresser movement.

 X-dimensions are always in diameter format.
 Left wheel reference points are always dimensioned relative to T1.

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 221
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.7.2 Right-hand form, grinding direction X-minus (X-)

Program for Right Wheel Sides (FANUC)

O6001;
G9400 X0 Z15 T17;
G0 Z42.;
G1 G42 X0. F#100.;
Z25. F#101;
G03 X-20. Z15. R10. F[#101*#103];
G1 Z10. F#101;
X-44. Z-2.;
G40 G01 X4. Z-2. F2000.;
M99;

Program for Right Wheel Sides (SIEMENS)

;6001
L9400 (17, 0, 15,,)
G0 Z42.
G1 G42 X0. F=R100.
Z25. F=R101
G03 X-20. Z15. CR=10. F=R101*R103
G1 Z10. F=R101
X-44. Z-2.
G40 G01 X4. Z-2. F2000.
M17

 Shape subroutine for a special left grinding wheel shape and definition of a
wheel reference point T7.
 Dressing and grinding direction in X-minus (X-)

NOTE!

 Note the inverse coordinate system for the dresser movement.

 X-dimensions are always in diameter format.
 Right wheel reference points 12-20 are always dimensioned relative to T11.

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 222 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.7.3 Left-hand Shape: Grinding Direction X-plus (X+)

Program for Left Wheel Sides (FANUC)

O6000;
G9400 R9 X20 Z-10;
G0. Z-42.;
G1 G42 X0. F#100.;
Z-25.;
G03 X20. Z-15. R10. F[#100*#103];
G1 Z-10. F#101.;
X44. Z2.;
G40 G01 X-4. Z2. F2000.;
M99;

Program for Left Wheel Sides (SIEMENS)

;6000
L9400 (9, 20, -10,,)
G0. Z-42.
G1 G42 X0. F=R100.
Z-25.
G03 X20. Z-15. CR=10. F=R100*R103
G1 Z-10. F=R101 E
X44. Z2.
G40 G01 X-4. Z2. F2000.
M17

 Shape subroutine for a special left grinding wheel shape and definition of a
wheel reference point T9.
 Dressing and grinding direction in X-plus (X+)

NOTE!

 Note the inverse coordinate system for the dresser movement.

 X-dimensions are always in diameter format.
 Left wheel reference points 2-10 are always dimensioned relative to T1.

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 223
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.8 Defining a dressing unit

E.8.1 Dressing unit

A dressing unit consists of one or two dressing diamonds.

Only one dressing diamond should be defined for profiling and dressing rolls.

Fig. E-40 program_dresser

Close Exits the Editor

New Creating new dressing unit  E.1.3 "Creation of new programs",  E-191

Open Opens an existing dressing unit

Save Saves the opened dressing unit

Next view

Previous view

[Edit]

Fig. E-41 program_dresser_sk2

Save as Saves the currently opened dressing unit under a different program number.

E.8.1.1 Entries

Dressing unit type Type of unit. Stationary dressing unit with max. of 2 dressing diamonds, dressing roll
or profiling roll

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 224 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
Dressing from the Defines the dressing. X is selected per default for external grinding.
front / rear To be able to dress internal grinding for X+ the dressing must also be changed to
X+. The dressing tools are normally used on a swiveling dressing attachment.

Number of revolu- The speed is entered here for rotating dressing tools
tions

Diameter Diameter of the rotating dressing tool

Width Width of the rotating dressing tool

E.8.2 dressing tools

The dressing tools can be defined in this screen:

NOTE!
The left dressing tool serves to dress the left side of the grinding wheel. The right
dressing tool serves to dress the right side of the grinding wheel.

Fig. E-42 program_dressingtool

Radius Radius of the dressing diamond. The radius is used for tool radius compensation
during dressing of the grinding wheel contours.

Orientation The orientation gives the position of the dressing tool when in zero position. The
zero position is shown in the diagram on the left. Depending on the use of the dress-
ing tool, the CNC calculates the effective orientation on the machine subsequently.
Example: if a dressing unit is used on a swiveling unit to dress an internal grinding
wheel on X+, its orientation will be automatically adjusted.

Measured position Dressing tools can be measured externally (option). These entries appear only in
X/Z expert mode.

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 225
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Pre-position in X / This position defines where the grinding wheel starts dressing (X value is in the
Z diameter!)

Max. wear and tear Maximum permissible wear and tear of the dressing tool. These entries appear only
X/Z in expert mode.

Current If a dressing unit has already been used, the current wear and tear can be specified.
wear X/Z These entries appear only in expert mode.

E.8.3 Right / Left Dressing Tool

A dressing tool of the dressing unit is detailed here.

Fig. E-43 program_dresser_left

Type The type of the dressing tool is used to calculate the dressing technology (optional).
 Unknown dressing tool
 Single-grain diamond
 PCD dressing diamond
 Tile
 Forming diamond
 Agglomerated diamond

Safety angle The safety angle is used for the optimized reprofiling of a grinding wheel (optional).
left/right

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 226 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.9 Pictogramming

In Pictogramming, workpiece programs and subroutines can be created and edited.

Fig. E-44 program_pictogramming

Close Save and close the editor

New Option to create a new program  E.1.3 "Creation of new programs",  E-191 E
Open Opens an existing program

Save Saves the current program

Modify To edit the selected pictograph

Picto Inserts a pictograph after the cursor

Settings Settings for opening Pictogramming

View There are 2 views which can be displayed with this softkey. The first view shows the
program on the left and the cycle parameters on the right. The second view also
shows the workpiece geometry above
(E.9.3 "Programming using workpiece graphics",  E-233).

[Edit] Opens the “Edit” menu

Fig. E-45 program_piktogramming_sk2

Cut Cuts the selected pictograph

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 227
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Copy Copies the selected pictograph

Paste Inserts a copied or cut pictograph after the cursor

Auto Label Sentence numbers are allocated automatically.

NOTE!
The Auto Label function is carried out automatically when new pictographs are
added. Numbers are allocated consecutively in the range from N2000 to N9999.
Special sentence numbers can also be used in the range N1 to N1999.

Delete Deletes the selected pictograph.

Save as The current program is saved under another name.

Print The program is created as a pdf file. This requires that you have Adobe PDF
Reader installed on your system.

Hide Hides a pictograph.

Fanuc control system: M1 Stop halts processing of these pictographs
Siemens control system: The pictographs are always hidden.

Change cycle The selected pictogram can be changed to another cycle.

Fig. E-46 program_convertcycle

Cycle search The required cycle can be found by entering the cycle number or the name using a
full text search. If the search words cannot be found, the search field turns red.
To continue searching, press the enter key.

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 228 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
Display “Display all cycles” displays all available cycles, otherwise only cycles with similar
all cycles functions are displayed.

NOTE!
If one cycle is changed to a different one, then the parameters are only accepted
if the parameter functions match. All other parameters are deleted.

Changing cycle G9205 to G9206:

 Parameters X, Z, W, T, R, A, B, C, E, F, H, I, J, K, M, S, V are accepted, as
these exhibit the same function in both cycles.
 Parameter D is deleted, as this changes from feed to infeed.
 Parameter Q is deleted, as this is no longer used.

E.9.1 Insert pictographs

The different pictographs can be selected and inserted by pressing thePicto soft
key.
The pictographs are logically grouped in a selection list. You can also create
Favorites lists, so that pictographs that are frequently used can be inserted more
easily.

Fig. E-47 program_add_picto

The focus is returned to the program.

Previous view

Next view

Edit picto Edits the pictograph that has been selected in the program overview.

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 229
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Insert The selected pictograph will be inserted in the program after the cursor

Insert The selected pictograph will be inserted in the Favorites list.

Cycle search You can search for the pictograph you want by entering the cycle number or its
name. The pictograph will be selected and can now be inserted in the program after
the cursor with “Insert”. If a pictograph has been found, the search field will be
shown in red.
The insertion properties can still be changed under Settings (reference to Picto-
gramming Settings)

Fig. E-48 program_add_picto2

When inserting, default values can be directly assigned. You can select the appro-
priate default in the “Defaults” view. The marking showing that the current default
values should be automatically adopted must be set.

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 230 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.9.2 Editing a pictograph

The data from the relevant cycle are entered in the cycle screen which can be called
using the softkey [Edit Picto]. Technology values such as feed rates, infeed amounts
or spark-out times can be pre-defined in the default value tables to make program-
ming simpler and faster.
 E.8 "Edit default values",  E-240

Fig. E-49 program_edit_picto

E
Expert / Basic View Individual parameters are only displayed in the expert mode. The expert mode is
blocked, depending on access level.

Default val- Selecting default values from the various default value tables:
ues

Fig. E-50 program_default_value

A default value can be selected from the table. If existing data are to be overwritten,
then “Overwrite existing values” must be activated
see also E.8 "Edit default values",  E-240
100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 231
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Transfer The values are transferred and the focus jumps to the program view (left)

Insert picto The view changes in the pictograph selection view

E.9.1 "Insert pictographs",  E-229

Previous view

Next view

E.9.2.1 Assign the grinding technology (option)

The grinding technology is assigned for a cycle or the whole program using Studer
technology. The feeds, switch-over points, speeds and dwell times are automatically
calculated depending on the abrasive and material.

Fig. E-51 program_edit_picto

Technology This key can be used to assign the grinding technology to the grinding cycle. The
feeds, switch-over points and dwell times are automatically calculated depending on
the abrasive and material.
The production specification and machining class can be specified in the “technol-
ogy” area of the pictogram parameter. The machining classes are:

Rough grinding

Fine grinding

Finishing

High precision

The workpiece material is specified in the workpiece editor and will then apply to all
grinding cycles (E.2 "Define workpiece",  E-196); however, it can be overwritten
for each grinding cycle.

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 232 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Fig. E-52 program_edit_picto2

E.9.3 Programming using workpiece graphics

pictogramming provides the option of programming using workpiece graphics. This

type of programming requires a workpiece definition with geometry
(E.2 "Define workpiece",  E-196).
When creating a new main program a message appears asking whether the pro- E
gram should be assigned to the set-up workpiece.

Fig. E-53 program_pictogramminf_query

After being assigned to the set-up workpiece, the geometry and technology of the
workpiece are transferred for programming.
The workpiece graphic includes:

 Explanatory graphic for the currently selected cycle

 Animation shows the behavior of the traversing and oscillating movements
 Grinding wheel positions
 Machining angle of the grinding head

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 233
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Fig. E-54 program_pictogramming_wp

Switch to selection mode. This mode enables positions to be transferred into the
pictogram.

Switch to move mode. The graphic can now be repositioned

Switch to rotation mode. The graphic can be rotated.

Position the workpiece geometry in the graphic window again.

Switch the animation on and off.

Switch the tool display on and off (grinding head).

NOTE!
The tool head indicates the grinding wheel configuration which was last used for
producing the workpiece. This corresponds to the set configuration for the work-
piece currently set up. However, old workpieces can be opened again
(E.2 "Define workpiece",  E-196).

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 234 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
E.9.3.1 Transferring the positions into the pictogram
The workpiece graphic can also be used to transfer geometry information (positions
and angles) directly to the pictogram.

Fig. E-55 program_pictogramming_wp2

The following procedure is recommended for this:

1. Position the cursor in the program where you wish to insert a new cycle
E
2. Switch to the selection mode in the workpiece graphic.
3. Select a workpiece section.
4. Insert a cycle of your choice.

Positions can also be transferred to existing pictograms afterwards:

1. Edit the desired pictogram. Delete the entries of the positions which are to be
transferred.
2. Choose the selection mode.
3. Select a workpiece section.

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 235
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.10 Text editor

The text editor serves to edit and create ISO programs.

NOTE!
In principle, any type of program can be created as an ISO program. ISO grinding
wheel programs and dressing unit programs cannot be set up, however, as they
are not supported by StuderWIN.

NOTE!
ISO programs can also be loaded and edited. This is not to be recommended,
however, if the operator is not familiar with the program syntax. Use the corre-
sponding editors.

NOTE!
When creating a new ISO program, “ISO program” must be marked in the dia-
logue window. See Creation of new programs.

Fig. E-56 program_texteditor

Close Exits the Editor

New Option to create a new ISO program E.1.3 "Creation of new programs",  E-191

Open Opens an existing ISO program

Save Saves the current ISO program

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 236 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
Page: Scrolls down a page

Page: Scrolls up a page

E.11 Edit default values

The existence of default values means that the technological values do not need to
be reprogrammed for every cycle. In this menu the existing default values can be
edited or new default value tables can be created.

Fig. E-57 program_edit_default

Main menu Back to “Programming” main page

New Creating a new default value table. A name must be entered and the name of the
author.

Fig. E-58 program_new_default

Save Saves the changes

Delete Deletes the selected default value table

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 237
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.12 GRINDING CYCLES

E.13 Multi-Profile Technology

The Multi-Profile Technology is a unique programming technology that enables pro-

gramming with nominal dimensions taken directly from the part drawing.
What is involved:
Most grinding machines only recognize the left reference point of a set-up grinding
wheel [SB]. A few machines also recognize the right reference point, allowing them
to grind right-hand workpiece shoulders as well.

If a chamfer is to be ground with the grinding wheel displayed, then the programmed
dimension [X] must be entered corrected by the chamfer height [X’].

1 X : Drawing Dimension
2 X’: Programmed Dimension

Multi-Profile Technology provides the grinding wheel with more than one or two ref-
erence points. Each contour transition on a standard grinding wheel is assigned its
own individual reference point (T number). On freely programmed grinding wheels,
these reference points can of course be defined.

Only the grinding wheel reference point which is to be approached by the pro-
grammed dimension has to be specified during programming. This avoids any pos-
sible error in calculating the programmed dimension. The dimension specified in the
drawing is programmed directly.

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / de-German

E - 238 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

1 X : Drawing Dimension
2 X’: Programmed Dimension

E.4.1 "Grinding wheel reference points (T number)",  E-203

Multi-Profile Technology and the wheel reference points is an integral element in all
Studer grinding cycles.

Advantages:
 Programming with drawing dimensions.
 The actual value display on the control screen relates to the drawing dimen-
sions.

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 239
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.13.1 Examples

E.13.1.1 Plunge Cycles

If diameter grinding is carried out with the cylindrical portion of the grinding wheel,
then the following must be taken into consideration:
 No shoulder to the left or right of the diameter:
 Select T numbers 2 or 12.

 If there is the possibility of collision with shoulders to the left or right of the diam-
eter:
 Select T numbers 1 or 11.

E.13.1.2 Traverse Grinding Cycles

The following points must me taken into account if diameter grinding is carried out
with the cylindrical portion of the grinding wheel:
 To prevent shoulder collisions, the same considerations as described for Plunge
Cycles apply.
 The “NOMINAL SIZE Z” [Z] is always approached with the T number which is
defined by “WHEEL REFERENCE POINT POS. 1”. Taking into account a possi-
ble programmed overrun 1 [K].

 The “NOMINAL SIZE Z POSITION 2” [W] is always approached with the T

number which is defined by “WHEEL REFERENCE POINT POS. 2”. Taking into
account a possible programmed overrun 2 [M].

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 240 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

The following definitions therefore apply:

[Z] smaller than In parameter T a point from the left grinding wheel side is programmed (points 1-6).
[W] In parameter R a point from the right grinding wheel side is programmed (points 11-
16).

[Z] larger than [W] In parameter T a point from the right grinding wheel side is programmed (points 1-
16). In parameter R a point from the left grinding wheel side is programmed (points
1-6).

E.13.1.3 Taper Grinding Cycles

If grinding a taper, then the following points must be taken into account:
 To prevent shoulder collisions, the same considerations as described for Plunge
Cycles apply.
 To select the left-hand and right-hand reverse positions, the same considera-
tions as described for traverse grinding cycles apply.

 If the swivel angle of the grinding wheel is equal to the taper angle then T num-
bers are programmed on the diameter of the grinding wheel
T numbers 1, 2, 11 and 12

 If the chamfer angle of the grinding wheel is equal to the taper angle (Profiled
Grinding Wheel) then the following T Numbers should be programmed:
For left wheel sides: T number 2 and 3
For right wheel sides: T numbers 12 and 13

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 241
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
E.13.1.4 Shoulder machining

If grinding a shoulder, then the following points must be taken into account:
 If a left-hand shoulder is to be ground then T numbers for the left grinding wheel
side must be programmed. Select T numbers 1 and 4.
 If a Shoulder to the Right of the Grinding Wheel is to be ground then T-Numbers
of the Right Grinding Wheel Side must be programmed. Select T numbers 11
and 14.

 The following T numbers must be programmed to grind a blending radius:

For left wheel sides: T-number 1
For right wheel sides: T number 11

E.13.1.5 Shoulder Traverse Cycles

 The “NOMINAL SIZE X” [X] is always approached by “WHEEL REFERENCE

POINT POS.1” [T]
 The “NOMINAL SIZE X POSITION 2” [U] is always approached by “WHEEL
REFERENCE POINT POS. 2” [R].

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 242 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.13.2 Grinding Cycle Parameters

Parameter Description

A Starting allowance position Position at which the selected grinding cycle switches to
grinding speed. Incremental dimension relative to the nominal
dimension.
[A = Pre-machining dimension minus nominal dimension plus
safety.]

B Switch-over position v/vv Position at which the infeed speed is switched from roughing
(v) to fine grinding (vv). Incremental dimension relative to the
nominal dimension.
Diameter Grinding: > Enter in diameter

C Switch-over Position vv/vvv Position at which the infeed speed is switched from fine grind-
ing (vv) to finishing (vvv). Incremental dimension relative to
the nominal dimension.
Diameter Grinding: > Enter in diameter

D Infeed Speed v (Plunge Cycles) Infeed speed for roughing. Roughing is carried out between
the starting allowance position [A] and the switch-over position
v/vv [B]

D Infeed amount v (Traverse, Contour Infeed amount for roughing. Roughing is carried out between
and Form Grinding Cycles) the starting allowance position [A] and the switch-over position
v/vv [B]

E Infeed Speed vv (Plunge Cycles) Infeed speed for fine grinding. Fine grinding is carried out
between switch-over position v/vv [B] and switch-over position
vv/vvv [C]

E Infeed amount vv (Traverse, Contour Infeed amount during fine grinding. Fine grinding is carried out
and Form Grinding Cycles) between switch-over position v/vv [B] and switch-over position E
vv/vvv [C]

F Infeed speed vvv (Plunge Cycles) Infeed speed for finishing. Finishing is carried out between
switch-over position vv/vvv [C] and the nominal dimension.

F Infeed amount vvv (Traverse, Con- Infeed amount for Finishing. Finishing is carried out between
tour and Form Grinding Cycles) the switch-over position vv/vvv [C] and the nominal dimension
[XZ].

H Type of infeed Defines the location for feed motion in all two-way traverse
grinding cycles.
 -1 infeed only at position 1 [X,Z]
 0 infeed at position 1 [X/Z] and position 2 [U,W]
 1 infeed only at position 2 [U,W]

I Number of spark-out strokes Number spark-out strokes after reaching nominal size.

J Oscillating speed Traverse speed between position 1 [X/Z] and position 2 [U/W]

K Overrun 1 Overrun of the grinding wheel into position 1 [Z] in relation to

the T number in the parameter [T]. The overrun [K] is entered
as an absolute incremental dimension relative to the “Nominal
size Z” [Z].

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 243
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter Description

M Overrun 2 Overrun of the grinding wheel into position 2 [W] in relation to

the T number in the parameter [R]. The overrun [M] is entered
as an absolute incremental dimension relative to the “Nominal
size Z position 2” [W].

Q Spark-out time Spark-out time after finishing the plunging process. The feed-
ing axis pauses at a position during processing.

Q Spark-out Time (Multi Plunging) Spark-out time at the first Switch-over position after each
roughing plunge.

R T number position 2 Wheel Reference Point Position 2. Valid for all Traverse
Grinding Cycles. Always relative to [U] and/or [W].
E.4.1 "Grinding wheel reference points (T number)",  E-203

S Spark-out Time for Feed Stroke Spark-out time at the end of the feed stroke. The length or
traverse movements continue after this time has elapsed.

T T number position 1 Wheel Reference Point Position 1. Valid for all Traverse
Grinding Cycles. Always relative to [X] and/or [Z].
E.4.1 "Grinding wheel reference points (T number)",  E-203

U Nominal size X position 2 (taper and Nominal size X with Z position 2 [W]
shoulder grinding cycles)

V Subroutine number Subroutine number for contour and form grinding cycles.

W Nominal size Z position 2 (traverse Z dimension that is approached by the T number defined in
grinding cycles) [R].

X Nominal size X Nominal size X at the position “nominal size Z” [Z]

Y Plunge angle Angle at which the [X] and [Z] are approached for angular
plunging.

Y Taper angle Taper angle for all taper grinding cycles.

Z Nominal size Z Nominal dimension Z at position 1 [X]

Z Nominal dimension Z (all shoulder Z dimension that is approached by the T number [T].
grinding cycles)

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 244 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.14 G9201 Plunge without oscillation

 Straight plunge on diameter with straight dressed grinding wheel.

 Straight plunge on diameter with profiled grinding wheel.

Fanuc

Parameter G9201 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch) E

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed speed VV mm/min (inch/min)

F Infeed speed VVV mm/min (inch/min)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.14.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9201

N2000 G9201 X50 Z-20 T1 A0.3 B0.2 C0.005 Q3 D0.4 E0.2

F0.1

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 245
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.15 G9202 Plunging with oscillation

 Straight plunge to diameter while carrying out an oscillation with the Z-Axis.
Grinding is only possible with the cylindrical dressed portion of the grinding
wheel.

Fanuc

Parameter G9202 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed speed VV mm/min (inch/min)

F Infeed speed VVV mm/min (inch/min)

I Oscillating stroke mm (inch)

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.15.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9202

N2001 G9202 X50 Z-20 T1 A0.3 B0.2 C0.005 Q5 D0.4 E0.2

F0.1 I2 J300

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 246 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.16 G9203 Angular plunge

 Angular plunge to diameter with profiled or straight-dressed grinding wheel.

Fanuc  Angular plunge with profiled, straight or angled grinding wheel for simultaneous
grinding of a diameter and a shoulder.

Parameter G9203 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

Y Plunge angle Degrees

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

E
B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed speed VV mm/min (inch/min)

F Infeed speed VVV mm/min (inch/min)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.16.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9203

N2002 G9203 X50 Z-20 T1 Y45 A0.3 B0.2 C0.005 Q5 D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

100115989/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 247
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.17 G9204 Plunge on taper

 Plunge on taper with profiled grinding wheel and straight swivel angle.

Fanuc  Plunge on taper with straight dressed and swiveled grinding wheel (swivel angle
equals taper angle).
 Plunge on taper with angled dressed and swiveled grinding wheel (swivel angle
does not equal taper angle).

Parameter G9204 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

Y Taper angle Degrees

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed speed VV mm/min (inch/min)

F Infeed speed VVV mm/min (inch/min)

K Overtravel mm (inch)
a) O=Option / E=Expert

Y The taper angle must be entered in decimal format.

(19 * 60) + 56
Conversion example: 5° 19’ 56”  5+ = 5.33222°
3600

100115989/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 248 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.17.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9204

N2000 G9201 X50 Z-20 T1 A0.3 B0.2 C0.005 Q3 D0.4 E0.2

F0.1

E.18 G9205 Multi-plunge

 Multi-plunge of straight diameters with a straight grinding wheel. Grinding is

only possible with the cylindrical dressed portion of the grinding wheel.

Fanuc  Multi-plunge of straight diameters with a swiveled grinding wheel. Grinding is

only possible with a grinding wheel section parallel to the Z-axis.

Parameter G9205 Unit Mode a) E

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

H Type of infeed

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

I Number of spark-out strokes

100116000/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 249
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter G9205 Unit Mode a)

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overrun position 1 mm (inch)

M Overtravel position 2 mm (inch)

V Spark-out time position 2 sec.

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.18.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9205

N2003 G9205 X50 Z-100 T1 R11 W0 A0.3 B0.2 C0.005 Q1 D0.4

E0.005 F0.0025 H0 S0.5 I4 J1000 K2 M2 V0.5

E.18.2 Approach position

The first infeed movement in X always takes place to the position “Nominal dimen-
sion Z” [Z]. Nominal dimension Z can be defined at either side of the diameter.
Make sure that the corresponding T-numbers are programmed.

E.18.3 Grinding with measurement control

The measuring probes are only lowered after rough machining. After lowering the
measuring probes, infeeding should only continue at the side of the measuring head
position, independent of parameter H.

Example: If the diameter measuring head is located at Z position 1, then infeeding should only
take place at Z position 1 after lowering of the measuring probes.

E.18.4 Approach nominal dimension Z and nominal dimension Z position 2

Rough grinding: The positions nominal size Z [Z] and nominal size Z position 2 [W] are approached
directly from the programmed grinding wheel reference points [T,R].

Fine grinding and The positions nominal size Z [Z] and nominal size Z position 2 [W] are approached
Finishing: directly from the programmed grinding wheel reference points [T,R] taking into con-
sideration any programmed overtravel 1 and/or 2 [K,M].

E.18.5 Shift between plunges

When the grinding wheel is moved from one plunge to the next, the amount moved
is always the distance between the active grinding wheel reference points minus the
overrun (initialization value) of the part of the grinding wheel that is currently actively
engaged.
If the Sensitron level rises above the switching threshold when moving from plunge
to plunge, then the travel speed in Z can be reduced. (F.1 "Initialization values",
 F-420)

100116000/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 250 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.19 G9206 Traverse grinding

 Traverse grinding of diameters with straight grinding wheel or taper with

swiveled workpiece table. Grinding is only possible with the cylindrical dressed
portion of the grinding wheel.

Fanuc  Traverse grinding of diameters with swiveled grinding wheel. Grinding is only
possible with a grinding wheel section parallel to the Z-axis.

Parameter G9206 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1 E
R T number position 2

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

D Infeed amount V mm (inch)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

H Type of infeed

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

I Number of spark-out strokes

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overrun position 1 mm (inch)

M Overtravel position 2 mm (inch)

V Spark-out time position 2 sec.

100116000/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 251
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.19.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9206

N2004 G9206 X50 Z-100 T1 R11 W0 A0.3 B0.02 C0.005 D0.01

E0.005 F0.0025 H0 S0.5 I4 J1000 K2 M2 V0.5

E.19.2 Approach position

The first infeed movement in X always takes place at the position “Nominal size Z”
[Z], allowing for a possible programmed overrun 1 [K]. Nominal dimension Z can be
defined at either side of the diameter. Make sure that the corresponding T-numbers
are programmed.

E.19.3 Grinding with measurement control

After lowering the measuring probes, infeeding should only take place at the side of
the measuring head position, independent of parameter H.

Example: If the diameter measuring head is located at Z position 1, then infeeding should only
take place at Z position 1.

E.19.4 Approach nominal dimension Z and nominal dimension Z position 2

The positions nominal size Z [Z] and nominal size Z position 2 [W] are approached
directly from the programmed grinding wheel reference points [T,R] taking into con-
sideration any programmed overtravel 1 and/or 2 [K,M].

100116000/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 252 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.20 G9207 Multi-plunge on taper

 Multi-plunge on taper with profiled grinding wheel and straight swivel angle.

Fanuc  Multi-plunge on taper with straight dressed and swiveled grinding wheel (swivel
angle equals taper angle).
 Multi-plunge on taper with angular dressed and swiveled grinding wheel (swivel
angle does not equal taper angle).

Parameter G9207 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1
E
R T number position 2

Y Taper angle Degrees

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch) E

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

H Type of infeed

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

I Number of spark-out strokes

100116000/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 253
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter G9207 Unit Mode a)

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overrun position 1 mm (inch)

M Overtravel position 2 mm (inch)

V Spark-out time position 2 sec.

a) O=Option / E=Expert

U Dimension X position 2 [U] is only used if the taper angle [Y] has not been pro-
grammed. If parameters U and Y are defined, then parameter U will be disregarded.

Y The taper angle must be entered in decimal format.

(19 * 60) + 56
Conversion example: 5° 19’ 56”  5+ = 5.33222°
3600

E.20.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9207

N2001 G9207 X50 Z-100 T1 R11 Y8.5 W0 A0.3 B0.02 C0.005 Q5

D0.4 E0.005 F0.0025 H0 S0.5 I4 J1000 K2 M2 V0.5

E.20.2 Approach position

The first infeed movement in X always takes place to the position “Nominal dimen-
sion Z” [Z]. Nominal size Z can be defined at either side of the taper.
Ensure that the relevant T numbers are programmed (see G9205)

Rough grinding: The nominal size Z [Z] and nominal size Z position 2 [W] are approached directly
from the programmed grinding wheel reference points [T,R] without taking the over-
run into consideration. The grinding wheel is engaged over its whole width.

Fine grinding and The positions nominal dimension Z [Z] and nominal dimension Z position 2 [W] are
finishing: approached from the programmed grinding wheel reference points [T,R] taking into
consideration any programmed overrun 1 and/or 2.

E.20.3 Shift between plunges

When the grinding wheel is moved from one plunge to the next, the amount moved
is always the distance between the active grinding wheel reference points minus the
overrun (initialization value) of the part of the grinding wheel that is currently actively
engaged.
In the case of special grinding wheel shapes the grinding wheel reference points
must be set correctly (  E.6 "G9400 Setting the wheel reference points",  E-
219).
The manufacturer’s travel speed Z is defined as a basic value from plunge to
plunge.
If the Sensitron level rises above the switch point when moving from plunge to
plunge, then the travel speed in Z (F.1 "Initialization values",  F-420)

100116000/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 254 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.21 G9208 Shoulder plunge

 Shoulder without transition radius: Plunge the shoulder directly at the X position.

Fanuc  Shoulder with transition radius: The shoulder should be plunged in Z. A possible
programmed radius should be followed at the switch-over points and after
attaining the nominal dimension. The radius feed should be programmed in the
initializing values (F.1 "Initialization values",  F-420).

Parameter G9208 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch) E

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

E
B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed speed VV mm/min (inch/min)

F Infeed speed VVV mm/min (inch/min)

Q Spark-out time sec.

V Radius mm (inch)
a) O=Option / E=Expert

U Is only required for calculating the speed.

E.21.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9208

N2000 G9208 X50 Z-20 T1 U80 A0.3 B0.02 C0.005 D0.4 E0.2
F0.1 Q5

100116003/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 255
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.21.2 Approaching the nominal size positions

Ensure that correct grinding wheel reference points (T numbers) have been
selected:
 Left shoulders: Þ T number 1
 Right shoulders: Þ T number 11

100116003/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 256 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.22 G9209 Transverse Shoulder Grinding

 Machining straight workpiece shoulders which are larger than the grinding
wheel shoulder.

Fanuc

Parameter G9209 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch)

R T number position 2
E
A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

D Infeed amount V mm (inch)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

H Type of infeed

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

I Number of spark-out strokes

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overrun position 1 mm (inch)

M Overtravel position 2 mm (inch)

V Spark-out time position 2 sec.

a) O=Option / E=Expert

100116003/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 257
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.22.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9209

N2001 G9209 X50 Z-20 T1 U100 R4 A0.3 B0.02 C0.005 D0.01

E0.005 F0.0025 H0 S0.5 I4 J500 K2 M0 V0.5

E.22.2 Approach position

The first infeed movement in Z always takes place to the position “nominal dimen-
sion X” [X].

E.22.3 Approaching the nominal size position

Ensure that correct grinding wheel reference points (T numbers) have been
selected:
 Left shoulders: Þ T number 1 and 4
 Right shoulders: Þ T number 11 and 14

100116003/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 258 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.23 G9210 Contour cycle

 This cycle can be used to follow a freely definable shape. To do this, the shape
needs to be defined in a subroutine [V].

Fanuc

Parameter G9210 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

V Subroutine number

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

E
D Infeed amount V mm (inch)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

I Spark-out strokes

K Speed factor vv

M Speed factor vvv

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

Y Machining angle Degrees E

a) O=Option / E=Expert

V Subroutine number in which the workpiece contour is defined

K,M If the speeds are programmed with the parameter #100 in the workpiece-contour
subroutine (e.g. F2000 * #100), then in finishing and super-finishing the correspond-
ing speeds will be multiplied by [K] or [M].

S After the infeed [D], [E], [F], the system waits for the time [S] before the contour is
followed

100123145/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 259
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.24 G9211 Contour traverse grinding

 This cycle can be used to follow contours that have been defined in the Studer-
Contur. In this way, for example, the deflection on long workpieces produced by
the grinding pressure can be compensated for by following the cylinder along a
convex cambered path.

Fanuc
Parameter G9211 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

V Subroutine number

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

D Infeed amount V mm (inch)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

I Spark-out strokes

K Speed factor vv

M Speed factor vvv

R Return to contour

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

Y Machining angle Degrees E

a) O=Option / E=Expert

V Subroutine number in which the workpiece contour is defined

H H = -1 Feed-in on position 1 [Z]

H = 0 Feed-in on both sides
H = 1 Feed-in only at the end of the contour

K,M If the speeds are programmed with the parameter #100 in the workpiece-contour
subroutine (e.g. F2000 * #100), then in finishing and super-finishing the correspond-
ing speeds will be multiplied by [K] or [M].

R With R=1, the wheel is driven back along the contour, otherwise it is retracted

S After the infeed [D], [E], [F], the system waits for the time [S] before the contour is
followed

100123146/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 260 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.25 G9212 Shoulder plunging with oscillation

 Straight plunging of shoulder with simultaneous oscillation of the X-axis.

Fanuc

Parameter G9212 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch) E

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch) E

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed speed VV mm/min (inch/min)

F Infeed speed VVV mm/min (inch/min)

I Oscillating stroke mm (inch)

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.25.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9212

N2002 G9212 X50 Z-20 T1 A0.3 B0.02 C0.005 Q5 D0.4 E0.2

F0.1 I2 J300

100123146/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 261
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.25.2 Programming Cycle G9212

The first oscillation movement always travels away from the diameter.

NOTE!
FANUC controlled machines with angular X axis:
With angular axes no oscillating movements are carried out in X using this func-
tion. The X axis remains in the first position.

100123146/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 262 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.26 G9214 Plunging with oscillation on taper

 Plunge on taper with profiled grinding wheel and straight swivel angle.

Fanuc  Plunge on taper with straight dressed and swiveled grinding wheel (swivel angle
equals taper angle).
 Plunge on taper with angled dressed and swiveled grinding wheel (swivel angle
does not equal taper angle).
 Oscillation on taper: the oscillation is a CNC function and has no absolute oscil-
lation axis. If parameter I is defined as greater than zero, the machine will grind
a taper using the oscillation process. The approach and traversing movements
correspond to standard cycles. The direction of oscillation is calculated inter-
nally by the software, based on the taper angle and the defined T number.
Parameter [M] can be used to define which axis should be used for infeed.

E
Tab.: E-1 Parameter G9214

Parameter G9214 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

Y Taper angle Degrees

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

D Infeed speed V mm/min (inch/min)

E Infeed speed VV mm/min (inch/min)

F Infeed speed VVV mm/min (inch/min)

100123146/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 263
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter G9214 Unit Mode a)

I Oscillating stroke mm (inch)

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overtravel mm (inch)

M Infeed direction for oscillation

a) O=Option / E=Expert

Y The taper angle must be entered in decimal format.

(19 * 60) + 56
Conversion example: 5° 19’ 56”  5+ = 5.33222°
3600

E.26.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9214

N2000 G9214 X50. Z30. T1. Y5.3322 A0.5 B0.03 C0.01 Q3.
D0.4 E0.2 F0.1 K2

E.26.2 Parameter description:

M Infeed direction for oscillation

 0 = Infeed in X

 1 = Infeed in Z

100123146/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 264 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.27 G9215 Diameter/Shoulder preparatory function

 This function can be used to predefine the technical data for subsequent cycles:

Fanuc
Parameter G9215 Unit Mode a)

A Plunge angle Degrees

B sense of rotation

C infeed speed Degrees/min.

D Start angle C-axis Degrees

E Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

Q Spark-out strokes

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

V Spark-out time position 2 sec.

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Only for G9276

The C axis rotates by this angle, while the X axis plunges from the grinding stock
allowance [A] to the nominal size [X]. (Default 30°)

B H only for G9276

Direction of rotation and rotations factor for plunging. (Default 1.005)
Examples: B = 1.5 1.5 rotations clockwise
B= -2 2 rotations counterclockwise

C Only for G9276 E

In G9276, the infeed speed can be defined with [D]. If, after the X axis infeed, the
workpiece is now to be rotated with a different speed than [D], this speed can be
defined here with [C]

D Only for G9272, G9276

Start position of the C axis for the plunges (default 0°)

E Only for G9272, G9276

The C axis is rotated to the start position [D] at this speed.§1

Q G9214
Instead of a spark-out time, this can used to define the number of strokes to spark-
out.

S Only for G9214, G9276

This can be used in addition to define a dwell time at position 1 for spark-out.

V Only for G9214, G9276

This can be used in addition to define a dwell time at position 2 for spark-out.

100123147/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 265
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.28 G9217 Longitudinal grinding on taper

 Longitudinal grinding on taper with profiled grinding wheel and straight swivel
angle.

Fanuc  Longitudinal grinding on taper with straight dressed grinding wheel and swiveled
wheelhead. (swivel angle equals taper angle)
 Longitudinal grinding on taper with angular dressed grinding wheel and
swiveled wheelhead (swivel angle not equal to taper angle)

Parameter G9217 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

Y Taper angle Degrees

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch) E

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

D Infeed amount V mm (inch)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

H Type of infeed

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

I Number of spark-out strokes

100123147/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 266 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Parameter G9217 Unit Mode a)

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overrun 1 mm (inch)

M Overrun 2 mm (inch)

V Spark-out time position 2 sec.

a) O=Option / E=Expert

U Dimension X position 2 [U] is only used if the taper angle [Y] has not been pro-
grammed. If parameters U and Y are defined, then parameter U will be disregarded.

Y The taper angle must be entered in decimal format.

(19 * 60) + 56
Conversion example: 5° 19’ 56”  5+ = 5.33222°
3600

E.28.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9217

N2002 G9217 X50 Z-100 T1 R11 Y8.5 W0 A0.3 B0.02 C0.005

D0.01 E0.005 F0.0025 H0 S0.5 I4 J1000 K2 M0 V0.5

E.28.2 Type of infeed

The first infeed movement in X always takes place at the position “Nominal size Z”
[Z], allowing for a possible programmed overrun 1 [K]. Nominal size Z can be
defined at either side of the taper. E

E.28.3 Approach nominal dimension Z and nominal dimension Z position 2

The positions nominal size Z [Z] and nominal size Z position 2 [W] are approached
directly from the programmed grinding wheel reference points [T,R] taking into con-
sideration any programmed overrun 1 and/or 2 [K,M].

100123147/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 267
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.29 G9220 Plunge form grinding with WRC (option)

For plunge grinding of a non-rotationally-symmetric geometry, which has been

defined in a subroutine using StuderForm. In the subroutine, the workpiece shape
must be defined with WRC (wheel radius correction), G41/G42.

FANUC If the workpiece shape is defined in the subroutine without WRC, the WRC must be
deselected in advance with “G9245 Additional definition for form grinding”.

Parameter G9220 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

T T number position 1

V Subroutine number

B Switch-over position v/vv mm (inch)

C Switch over position v/vvv mm (inch)

D Infeed amount v mm (inch)

E Infeed amount vv mm (inch)

F Infeed amount vvv mm (inch)

I Spark-out strokes

K SPEED FACTOR vv

M SPEED FACTOR vvv

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

(degrees/inch)

Y Start angle C-axis Degrees

a) O=Option / E=Expert

X The nominal size X must match the first X value in the subroutine.

A As the grinding stock allowance, the difference from the largest raw size to the
smallest size of the workpiece shape must be entered.
100123474/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 268 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
V Number of the subroutine in which the workpiece shape is defined.

K, M If the speeds are programmed with the parameter #100 in the workpiece-geometry
subroutine (e.g. F5000 * #100), then in finishing and super-finishing the correspond-
ing speeds will be multiplied by [K] or [M].

Y Angle between C0 and the shape start point defined in the subroutine.

E.30 G9225 Multi-plunging form cycle with WRC (option)

FANUC

For multiple plunge grinding of a non-rotationally-symmetric geometry, which has

been defined in a subroutine using StuderForm. In the subroutine, the workpiece
shape must be defined with WRC (wheel radius correction), G41/G42.
If the workpiece shape is defined in the subroutine without WRC, the WRC must be
deselected in advance with “G9245 Additional definition for form grinding”.

Parameter G9225 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

A GRINDING STOCK ALLOWANCE mm (inch)

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

B Switch-over position v/vv mm (inch)

C Switch over position v/vvv mm (inch)

D Infeed amount v mm (inch)

E Infeed amount vv mm (inch)

F Infeed amount vvv mm (inch)

H Type of infeed

100123475/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 269
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter G9225 Unit Mode a)

I Spark-out strokes

J SPEED FACTOR vv

K Overrun position 1 mm (inch)

M Overtravel position 2 mm (inch)

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

(degrees/inch)

S Speed factor in Z

U Speed factor vvv

V Subroutine number

Y Start angle C-axis Degrees

a) O=Option / E=Expert

X The nominal size X must match the first X value in the subroutine.

A As the grinding stock allowance, the difference from the largest raw size to the
smallest size of the workpiece shape must be entered.

J, U If the speeds are programmed with the parameter #100 in the workpiece-geometry
subroutine (e.g. F2000 * #100), then in finishing and super-finishing the correspond-
ing speeds will be multiplied by [J] or [U].

S If the Z axis does not reach the target position exactly at the end of the last rotation,
then the S parameter can be used to enter a correction factor.

 If the target position is overshot, the value must be less than 1

 If the target position is not reached, the value must be greater than 1

V Number of the subroutine in which the workpiece shape is defined.

Y Angle between C0 and the shape start point defined in the subroutine.

100123475/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 270 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.31 G9228 Shoulder form grinding (option)

FANUC

Shoulder grinding with diameter form tracking of the grinding wheel. The infeed in Z
can take place either automatically or manually.

Parameter G9228 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

V Subroutine number

Y Start angle C-axis Degrees

E
A GRINDING STOCK ALLOWANCE mm (inch) E

U Re-set value in X mm (inch)

F Infeed amount vvv mm (inch)

I Spark-out strokes

M SPEED FACTOR vvv

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

(degrees/inch)

R Selection manual feed

a) O=Option / E=Expert

F Only if [R=0]
Infeed amount in Z per workpiece rotation

I Only if [R=0]
Number of spark-out strokes

R Selection manual feed

0 = automatic infeed
1 = manual infeed

100123476/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 271
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.32 G9230 Thread grinding (option)

Fanuc

CAUTION!
Do not adjust the OVERRIDE switch during machining.
Changing the speed during machining affects the quality of the thread.

 Using the profiled grinding wheel, plunge with the number of infeeds [S] up to
the root circle diameter. After each infeed in X, the workpiece spindle rotates by
the +/- value defined in [B] * 360 degrees.
 The grinding wheel profile subroutine is created using the additional Software
”StThread”. The wheel profile can be created with or without taking the profile
distortion into account.

Tab.: E-2 Parameter G9230

Parameter G9230 Unit Mode

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

T T number position 1

V Subroutine number

D V/W switchover point mm (inch)

I VV/WW switchover point mm (inch)

J Thread grinding feed Degrees/min.

K Infeed amount V mm (inch)

R Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

W Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

U Thread pitch mm (inch)

100118375

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 272 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Parameter G9230 Unit Mode

H Thread direction 0=r/1=l

M Amount to be removed mm (inch)

S Number of feeds

B Number of revolutions

Y Start position C axis Degrees

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

F Approach angle for multi-profile grind- Degrees

ing wheel

C Angle of thread run-in/run-out grind- Degrees

ing

E Retract angle Degrees

Important!
If (S) has been programmed, for compatibility reasons this will have priority. If the
grinding cycle is to work with changeover points and with defined infeed
amounts, then [S] must not be defined!

C This angle defines the thread run-in / run-out value. The starting position in Z is cal-
culated using the run-in / run-out value in the grinding function. If no angle has been
programmed, then the start position in Z is approached without calculating the run-
in / run-out distance.
If a thread run-in / run-out is ground then the grinding wheel must be suitably pro-
filed. E

E At the end of the defined “Parameter B” grinding rotations this is the angle by which
the grinding wheel is raised from the workpiece. The resulting movements of the X
and Z axes are calculated by means of the C movement. If parameter E is not pro-
grammed, then this is defined as 10 degrees.

F must still be defined

M Parameter M defines the grinding allowance on pre-machined threads.

100118375

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 273
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
M = 0 or M = vacant indicate that the thread is not pre-machined.

Q Speed of C axis during positioning, starting from set-up angle C [Y]

S Divides grinding allowance into stages.

Y Starting position of C axis defines the angle between the set-up position C and the
starting angle of the thread.

Important!
If a pre-machined thread has been previously measured, then [Y] must not be
programmed. The measured thread position is transferred to the grinding cycle
and rotated to the correct C axis position when approaching the start position.

V Subroutine number for grinding wheel contour.

E.32.1 Programming cycle G9230

The grinding wheel shape subroutine is created automatically using the additional
Software ”StThread”.

Metric machines The thread pitch [U] for metric and imperial threads is entered in metric units.

Imperial machines The thread pitch [U] for metric and imperial threads is entered in imperial units.

Run-in/run-out In order to grind a thread run-out, parameter C must be defined using the relevant
grinding degree value.

E.32.2 Grinding wheel profile for thread run-in / run-out grinding using G9230.

100118375

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 274 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
E.32.2.1 Definition of the T number for thread grinding wheel with run-in / run-out profile
Grinding wheel programs created with Studer Thread contain the T numbers 7 and
17. In order for the run-in / run-out grinding to be programmed using absolute draw-
ing dimensions, a further T number has to be defined in the grinding subroutine.

E.32.2.2 Dimensioning the T number

A further T number can be programmed in the grinding wheel shape subroutine
using the function G9400.
The calculated X value from Studer Thread must not be changed: this value defines
the thread diameter.

E.32.2.3 Programming example

O6000(M20 X 2.5)
(#107=2.5)
(#108=10)
#2=5000(F FOR G40)
#1=5000(F FOR G41,G42)
G9400 T2 X-3.7335 Z-2
G9400 T7 X-3.7335 Z-4
E

E.32.3 Programming example for grinding cycle G9230

100118375

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 275
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

NOTE!
The “Wheel reference point pos. 1” [T] on the first thread profile of the grinding
wheel is always 17.
When a thread run-in / run-out is ground at the same time, then the Z positions of
the T numbers must be defined manually.

E.32.3.1 Thread profile

%
O6000(M20 X 2.5)
#1=2.5
#2=30
G9360 A2.1651B0.3609C0.2706D2.5E60F20H99I
1J0K1.9969M1Q16.9328
G9361 A6B6C0.125D0.125E-3.0672F-3.0672H-1 .25I
[#2-28.75]
J7K17M500Q0R#2U2V0W1X-1Y-2Z999
IF[#4014EQ58] GOTO 10
M30
N10 G00 X4
Z-29.183
G01 G41 X0 F2000
Z-28.75 F#101
G02 X-0.3341 Z-28.4602 R0.3349 F[#101*#103]
..
..
G00 Z-1.683
G01 G41 X0 F2000
Z-1.25 F#101
G02 X-0.3341 Z-0.9602 R0.3349 F[#101*#103]
G01 X-3.7334 Z0.0244
Z1.0244 F#101
G40 X4 F2000
G00 Z-0.817
Z[-#2-1] F#101
G40 X4 F2000
N999 M99
(STTHREAD 1.4B, 09.12.97 15:39:04)
(M20 X 2.5)
(EXTERNAL)
(+ PROFILE CORRECTION)
(+ PROJECT PLANE = PITCH)
(STARTS 1)
(PITCH A 2.4796 DEGREES)
(Grinding wheel D 500)
(WHEEL A 60.17 DEGREES)
(THREAD A 60 DEGREES)
(DRESSING R 0.125)
(MAX X 1.8667/R)
(STUDER/FANUC 16TB)
%

E.32.3.2 Main program

O0131
(WORKPIECE PROGRAM THREAD M20 X 2.5)
G9600 A0. T1.
N100 G9230 X20 Z60. T7. V6000. A0.1 U2.5 H0. M0. J400. B1.1
F0.
G9679
M30

100118375

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 276 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.33 G9235 Preparatory function thread grinding (option)

 With this function, preparatory definitions such as thread lead-ins/run-outs,

tapered threads, etc. can be defined for the subsequent thread cycle.

Fanuc Tab.: E-3 Parameter G9235

Parameter G9235 Unit Mode

A Nominal size X mm (inch)

C Taper angle correction Degrees

D Infeed speed V mm/min

(Inches/min)

F Approach angle Degrees

I Thread lead-in without pitch

J Thread run-out without pitch

K Overrun at position 1 mm (inch)

M Overrun at position 2 mm (inch)

Q Convex radius

R Grind intake radius

T T number position 1

Y Taper angle Degrees

A Nominal thread size

C Taper-angle correction for tapered threads E

D Infeed speed for the approach

F Approach angle for the thread lead-in

I Thread lead-in without pitch

J Thread run-out without pitch

K Overrun at position 1

M Overrun at position 2

Q [Q] = 1 Grind lead-in/ run-out with concave/convex radius

T A special T number can be selected here if necessary

Y TAPER-ANGLE

100118376/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 277
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.34 G9236 Thread grinding (option)

Fanuc

CAUTION!
Do not adjust the OVERRIDE switch during machining.
Changing the speed during machining affects the quality of the thread.

 Constant-area infeed
The same chip volume Q’ is removed with each infeed. The chip volume is influ-
enced by the number of infeeds [S].
 The grinding wheel profile dressing program is created using the additional soft-
ware “StThread“. The wheel profile can be created with or without taking the
profile distortion into account.

Tab.: E-4 Parameter G9236

Parameter G9236 Unit Mode

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

V Subroutine number

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

A Starting allowance position mm (inch)

M Amount to be removed mm (inch)

S Number of feeds

I Spark-out strokes

J Thread grinding feed C/Z Degrees/min.

100118376/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 278 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Parameter G9236 Unit Mode

U Thread pitch mm (inch)

H Thread direction 0=r/1=l

K Grinding in both directions 0=N / 1=Y

Y Start position C axis Degrees

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

B Set-up angle Degrees

K Determines whether grinding is to be done in both directions

K=0 Feed-in only to nominal size Z [Z]

K=1 Feed-in to nominal size Z [Z] and nominal size Z
pos. 2 [W]

M [M] defines the grinding allowance on pre-machined threads.

M = 0 or M = vacant indicate that the thread is not pre-machined.

E.34.1 Programming cycle G9236

The grinding wheel shape subroutine is created automatically using the additional
Software ”StThread”.

Metric machines The thread pitch [U] for metric and imperial threads is entered in metric units.

Imperial machines The thread pitch [U] for metric and imperial threads is entered in imperial units.
E
Run-in/run-out In order to grind a thread run-out, [C] must be defined using the relevant degree
grinding value.

E.34.2 Programming example for grinding cycle G9236

NOTE!
The “Wheel reference point pos. 1” [T] on the first thread profile of the grinding
wheel is always 17.
Qw’ only works with ISO-60 threads!

100118376/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 279
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
E.34.2.1 Thread profile

%
O6000(M20 X 2.5)
#1=2.5
#2=30
G9360 A2.1651B0.3609C0.2706D2.5E60F20H99I
1J0K1.9969M1Q16.9328
G9361 A6B6C0.125D0.125E-3.0672F-3.0672H-1 .25
I[#2-28.75]J7K17M500Q0R#2U2V0W1X-1Y -2Z999
IF[#4014EQ58] GOTO 10
M30
N10 G00 X4
Z-1.683
G01 G41 X0 F2000
Z-1.25 F#101
G02 X-0.3341 Z-0.9602 R0.3349 F[#101*#103]
G01 X-3.7334 Z0.0244
Z1.0244 F#101
G40 X4 F2000
G00 Z-0.817
G01 G42 X0 F2000
Z-1.25 F#101
G03 X-0.3341 Z-1.5398 R0.3349 F[#101*#103]
G01 X-3.7334 Z-2.5244
Z[-#2-1] F#101
G40 X4 F2000
N999 M99
(STTHREAD 1.4B, 09.12.97 15:51:26)
(M20 X 2.5)
(EXTERNAL)
(+ PROFILE CORRECTION)
(+ PROJECT PLANE = PITCH)
(STARTS 1)
(PITCH A 2.4796 DEGREES)
(Grinding wheel D 500)
(WHEEL A 60.17 DEGREES)
(THREAD A 60 DEGREES)
(DRESSING R 0.125)
(MAX X 1.8667/R)
(STUDER/FANUC 16TB)
%

E.34.2.2 Main program

O0131
(WORKPIECE PROGRAM THREAD M20 X 2.5)
G9600 A0. T1.
N100 G9230 X20 Z60. T7. V6000. A0.1 U2.5 H0. M0. J2000. B1.1
F0.
G9679
M30

100118376/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 280 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.35 G9237 Thread grinding (option)

Fanuc

CAUTION!
Do not adjust the OVERRIDE switch during machining.
Changing the speed during machining affects the quality of the thread.

 The grinding wheel profile dressing program is created using the additional soft-
ware “StThread”. The wheel profile can be created with or without taking the
profile distortion into account.

E
Tab.: E-5 Parameter G9236

Parameter G9237 Unit Mode

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

V Subroutine number

W Nominal size position 2 mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position V/VV mm (inch)

C Switch-over position VV/VVV mm (inch)

M Amount to be removed mm (inch)

D Infeed amount V mm (inch)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

100118376/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 281
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter G9237 Unit Mode

I Spark-out strokes

J Thread grinding feed C/Z Degrees/min.

U Thread pitch mm (inch)

H Thread direction 0=r/1=l

K Grinding in both directions

Y Start position C axis Degrees

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

I Number of spark-out strokes

J Thread grinding feed C/Z

K Determines whether grinding is to be done in both directions

K=0 Feed-in only to nominal size Z [Z]

K=1 Feed-in to nominal size Z [Z] and nominal size Z
pos. 2 [W]

M [M] defines the grinding allowance on pre-machined threads.

M = 0 or M = vacant indicate that the thread is not pre-machined.

Q Speed of C axis during positioning, starting from set-up angle C [Y

Y Starting position of C axis defines the angle between the set-up position C and the
starting angle of the thread

V Subroutine number for grinding-wheel contour

E.35.1 Programming cycle G9237

The grinding wheel shape subroutine is created automatically using the additional
Software ”StThread”.

E.35.2 Programming example for grinding cycle G9237

NOTE!
The “Wheel reference point pos. 1” [T] on the first thread profile of the grinding
wheel is always 17.

100118376/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 282 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
E.35.2.1 Thread profile

%
O6000(M20 X 2.5)
#1=2.5
#2=30
G9360 A2.1651B0.3609C0.2706D2.5E60F20H99I
1J0K1.9969M1Q16.9328
G9361 A6B6C0.125D0.125E-3.0672F-3.0672H-1 .25
I[#2-28.75]J7K17M500Q0R#2U2V0W1X-1Y -2Z999
IF[#4014EQ58] GOTO 10
M30
N10 G00 X4
Z-1.683
G01 G41 X0 F2000
Z-1.25 F#101
G02 X-0.3341 Z-0.9602 R0.3349 F[#101*#103]
G01 X-3.7334 Z0.0244
Z1.0244 F#101
G40 X4 F2000
G00 Z-0.817
G01 G42 X0 F2000
Z-1.25 F#101
G03 X-0.3341 Z-1.5398 R0.3349 F[#101*#103]
G01 X-3.7334 Z-2.5244
Z[-#2-1] F#101
G40 X4 F2000
N999 M99
(STTHREAD 1.4B, 09.12.97 15:51:26)
(M20 X 2.5)
(EXTERNAL)
(+ PROFILE CORRECTION)
(+ PROJECT PLANE = PITCH)
(STARTS 1)
(PITCH A 2.4796 DEGREES)
(Grinding wheel D 500)
(WHEEL A 60.17 DEGREES)
(THREAD A 60 DEGREES)
(DRESSING R 0.125)
(MAX X 1.8667/R)
(STUDER/FANUC 16TB)
%

E.35.2.2 Main program

O0131 E
(WORKPIECE PROGRAM THREAD M20 X 2.5)
G9600 A0. T1.
N100 G9237 X20. Z0. T7. V600. A0.2 B0.020 C0.006 M0 D0.02.
E0.01. F0.005. I2. J2000. U2.5 H0. K1. W25.
G9679
M30

100118376/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 283
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.36 G9239 Thread lead-in / run-out grinding (option)

Fanuc
With this cycle it is possible to grind thread run-ins and run-outs. When calling the
function the grinding angle [D] in degrees (360 degrees = 1 thread rotation) and the
retract angle [E] with the correspondent speeds are defined. The speed for machin-
ing on the retract angle [M] has to be programmed considerably lower, in order to
avoid a damage of the margin area. The start position (Z1-position) has to coincide
with the thread crest.

Important!
The lead-in grinding is always carried out on the Z1 position and the run-out
grinding always on the Z2 position. The T numbers have to be programmed cor-
respondingly.

Parameter G9239 Unit Mode

X Thread diameter mm

Z Nominal size Z mm

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

V Subroutine number with grinding

wheel data

W Nominal size position 2 mm

A Starting allowance position mm (inch)

B Run-in grinding 0=NO 1=YES

C Run-out grinding 0=NO 1=YES

M Speed for the retract angle Degrees/min. E

J Speed infeed/grinding Degrees/min. E

D Machining angle grinding Degrees E

E Machining angle run-out Degrees E

100118379/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 284 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Parameter G9239 Unit Mode

U Thread pitch mm (inch)

H Thread direction 0=r/1=l E

I Start position of the C-axis run-out Degrees E

grinding

K Starting overrun for threads run-in / mm (inch)

run-out

Y Start position for C axis lead-in grind- Degrees

ing

Q Speed C-axis circumferential pos. Degrees/min.

E.36.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9239

G9239
A.5 B1 C1 D180 E10 H0 J400 M50 Q 5000 R11 T1 U2
V6000 W-20 X20 Y0
Z0;

E.36.2 Machining examples workpiece / grinding wheel

For this type of machining the T-number(s) (e.g. T2 / T12) have to be defined in the
workpiece program. The X-value for the definition of the T-number(s) is listed in the
generated subroutine of Studer Thread (MAX X 2.1846 R). Multiply the value times
2.

If a thread is grind with the plunge cycle, it is possible to machine the thread run-in
with the profile end of the grinding wheel during the same working step. The profile
end of the grinding wheel can be defined in the Studer Thread.

100118379/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 285
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

If a thread is ground with the plunge cycle, it is possible to machine the thread run-
out with the profile start of the grinding wheel during the same working step. The
profile start of the grinding wheel can be defined in the Studer Thread.

100118379/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 286 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.37 G9245 Additional definition for form grinding (option)

Preparatory function for form-grinding cycles

G9220 Plunge form grinding with WRC
G9225 Multi-plunging form cycle with WRC
G9228 Shoulder form grinding

FANUC This function applies only to the immediately following form cycle.

Parameter G9245 Unit Mode a)

A Subroutine number vv

B Subroutine number vvv

C Deselection wheel
radius compensation

I OSCILLATING STROKE mm (inch)

J OSCILLATING SPEED mm/min (mm/inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A, B [A] and [B] can be used to define an additional subroutine for finishing or super-fin-
ishing. For example, with different resolutions of the support points.

C In the cycles mentioned above, grinding is done with wheel radius correction
(WRC). This can be deselected with [C].
C = 1 > The shape subroutine is programmed without G41/G42.

I Only for G9220

With plunge form grinding, enables an additional oscillating movement in Z to be
superimposed.

J Only for G9220 E

With plunge form grinding, enables an additional oscillating movement in Z to be
superimposed.

100123478/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 287
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.38 G9250 Removal of a specific amount in X

With this cycle, the workpiece diameter is approached at Sensitron speed until the
signal is generated. From this position, a specific amount to be removed can be
ground off, or the position will be passed to the subsequent cycle

FANUC

Parameter G9250 Unit Mode a)

X Start position in X mm (inch)

Z START POSITION IN Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

R Max. stabilization time for Sensitron sec.

I Grinding without cycle mm/min (mm/inch)

V AMOUNT TO BE REMOVED IN X (mm/inch)

W AMOUNT TO BE REMOVED IN Z (mm/inch)

F Infeed speed vvv mm/min (mm/inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

a) O=Option / E=Expert

R [R] can be used to define a stabilization time if the Sensitron already signals when
only approaching the start position.

I With I = 1, the amount to be removed [V] is directly processed

With I = 0, after the diameter has been located, the current position is
passed to the subsequent grinding cycle as the start position
(in the grinding cycles [X] + [A])

V Only if I = 1
[V] is the amount that is removed after the diameter has been located

W Only if I = 1
[W] is the amount that will be additionally fed in to Z after the diameter has been
located while [V] is being processed.

F Only if I = 1
Infeed speed for processing [V]

100123479/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 288 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
Q Only if I = 1
Spark-out time after the removal of [V]

E.39 G9251 Removal of a specific amount in Z

FANUC

With this cycle, the workpiece shoulder is approached at Sensitron speed until the
signal is generated. From this position, a specific amount to be removed can be
ground off, or the position will be passed to the subsequent cycle as start position.
Sensitron must be activated in advance with G200

Parameter G9250 Unit Mode a)

E
X Start position in X mm (inch)

Z Start position in Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

R Max. stabilization time for Sensitron sec.

I Grinding without cycle mm/min (mm/inch) E

U Amount to be removed in X (mm/inch) E

V Amount to be removed in Z (mm/inch)

F Infeed speed vvv mm/min (mm/inch) E

Q Spark-out time sec. E

a) O=Option / E=Expert

R [R] can be used to define a stabilization time if the Sensitron already signals when
only approaching the start position.

I With I = 1, the amount to be removed [V] is directly processed

With I = 0, after the diameter has been located, the current position will be passed to
the subsequent grinding cycle as the start position (in the grinding cycles [X] + [A])

U Only if I = 1
[U] is the amount that will be additionally fed in to X after the diameter has been
located while [V] is being processed.
100123480/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 289
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
V Only if I = 1
[V] is the amount that will be ground off after the shoulder has been located.

F Only if I = 1
Infeed speed for processing [V]

Q Only if I = 1
Spark-out time after the removal of [V]

100123480/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 290 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.40 G9730 Highspeed shape grinding (option)

(see also the StuderFormHSM instructions)

Fanuc This function is used for plunge-grinding a section of a workpiece which is not rota-
tionally symmetrical. The workpiece form is programmed on an external workplace
using StFormHSM. A program and datasets are loaded into the control system for
direct processing.

Important!
This function requires a special configuration of the control.

Tab.: E-6 Parameter G9730

Zyklus G9730 Condition Mode a) E

Z Nominal dimension in Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

Y Starting angle of the C axis Degrees

I Process sequence

K Geometry / contour 1...5

D Directory of workpiece data

F file number with workpiece data

B Deselect dressing 0 = Dressing

1 = no dressing

C unselect measuring 0 = measurement

1 = no measurement

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

100116045/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 291
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

a)
Zyklus G9730 Condition Mode

X Nominal size correction mm (inch) E

A Special stock allowance mm (inch) E

S Safety number E

E Always learn at start E

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A If you specify the parameter Special Stock Allowance, this latter value will replace
the one calculated by StFormHSM.

X If the nominal size is modified by means of the parameter, the form will not be recal-
culated, which will result in form errors. Also the allowance will not be recalculated.

E.40.1 Dressing

Dressing from the grinding cycle is directly defined when creating the highspeed
program.
Extended dressing functions, e.g. number dressing passes on V (option), can also
be used.

E.40.2 Measuring / grinding interruption

Measuring / grinding interruption from the grinding cycle is directly defined when
creating the highspeed program.
The machines disengages and the safety conditions for opening the door are met.
After the next cycle start, the machine returns to the last position on the workpiece.
Thereby, possible corrections are directly taken into account.
! ATTENTION - ALLOWANCE!

E.40.3 Positioning of the C axis

External grinding Positioning the C axis is always carried out on the largest workpiece diameter.

Internal grinding Positioning the C axis is always carried out in X from the approach position calcu-
lated by StFormHS and in Z from the approach position set or programmed by the
operator (with G9678).

100116045/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 292 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.40.4 Programming example grinding cycle G9730

Programming example

O0033 (HISPEED)

G9600 A0 T1

G9730 D-1 F-1 I1 K2 T1 Y0 Z10;

G9679;

M30;

Tab.: E-7 Programming example, G9679

E.40.5 Error message description for highspeed grinding G9730

Only one error message (1852) is issued “highspeed data incorrect”. For a more
accurate error analysis, the diagnostics screen can be called via Diagnostics > Sta-
tus Images > Machine > High-Speed Machining State.
High-Speed Grinding Status

#722 Explanation Remedy

1 Invalid version, incompati- Contact Studer and request a grinding

ble with Studer grinding cycle version which is compatible with the
cycles. StForm HighSpeed version.

2 Invalid P-code variables. Using StForm create HighSpeed P-code

files and ISO HighSpeed files again and
transfer both files onto the control system
once more.
E
3 Parameter G9730 T, R The parameters T, R (T numbers) for
grinding cycle G9730 are incorrect. Check
the grinding cycle G9730.

4 Grinding wheel width The internal grinding wheel width is incor-

rect. Contact Studer.

5 Parameter G9730 A Parameter A (special allowance) for grind-

ing cycle G9730 is incorrect. Check the
grinding cycle G9730.

6 Parameter G9730 X Parameter X (special nominal size correc-

tion) for grinding cycle G9730 is incorrect.
Check the grinding cycle G9730.

7 Parameter G9730 K Parameter K (form geometry) for grinding

cycle G9730 is invalid. Check the grinding
cycle G9730.

8 Parameter G9730 I Parameter I (executable process

sequence) for grinding cycle G9730 is
incorrect. Check the grinding cycle G9730.

9 Invalid Fanuc memory The set memory option in the HighSpeed

parameter 7511 settings does not match the control sys-
tem.

100116045/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 293
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

#722 Explanation Remedy

100 Grinding wheel diameter Wheel diameter on the control system

incorrect does not match the one generated. Or the
minimal wheel diameter has been
reached.

101 Grinding wheel width incor- Grinding wheel width on the control sys-
rect tem does not match the one generated. Or
the minimal wheel width has been
reached.

102 Unit of measurement MM/ The program was generated in INCHES -

INCH the control system is configured to MM.

103 Unit of measurement MM/ The program was generated in MM - the

INCH control system is configured to INCHES.

104 grinding direction The program was generated to grind from

minus to plus.
The control system is set to grind from plus
to minus.

105 grinding direction The program was generated to grind from

plus to minus.
The control system is set to grind from
minus to plus.

106 Grinding wheel The selected wheel does not correspond

to the generated wheel.

107 Retract on bore When using this form it is not possible to

retract automatically. Retract manually and
start G9679.

108 Check whether Highcom is T2+T12 must be active!

in use for longitudinal grind-
ing:

109 Highcom transmission Program to be transmitted and transmitted

check: program must be identical!

100116045/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 294 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.41 G9270 Grind longitudinal grooves

With this cycle it is possible to grind longitudinal grooves in a workpiece.

G202 parameter [H] can be used to define the number of grooves after which the
wheel should be dressed.

FANUC

Parameter G9270 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

Y Nominal size in Y mm (inch) E

T T number position 1
E
C Start angle C-axis mm/min (mm/inch)

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch)

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm/min (mm/inch)

E Infeed amount vv mm (inch)

F Infeed speed vv mm/min (inch/min)

I Spark-out strokes

J Traverse speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overrun at position 1 mm (inch)

M Traverse speed mm/min (inch/min) E

S Number of grooves

D Re-set value in X mm (inch)

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

a) O=Option / E=Expert

D [D] can be used to define the retraction amount for retracting.

J Traverse speed for grinding

100123481/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 295
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
M Traverse speed for retracting. If [M] is not defined, then [J] is used for retraction

S [S] can be defined as positive or negative. Depending on the leading sign, the work-
piece is rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction for grinding the next
groove.

Y If [Y] is not defined, then the Y axis is not selected. This cycle can therefore also be
used on machines without a Y axis.

100123481/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 296 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.42 G9272 Deep-pass grinding: plunging

FANUC

This function can be used to grind a diameter or workpieces with several cutting
edges using the deep-pass process.
The start position of the C axis 0° and the direction of rotation or number of rotations
with 1.005. If necessary, these values can be changed beforehand with the G9215
function.
Grinding of discontinuous workpieces
To grind discontinuous workpieces, they must be inserted with a particular position-
ing. The start position of the C axis must be chosen so that the X-axis infeed occurs
between two cutting edges.

CAUTION!
The following conditions must be met:

 The Sensitron must be activated in advance with G200

 The workpiece must be inserted with an indexed position
 The infeed must take place in a recess
 Activation is done using [H]. See description

Parameter G9272 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

E
T T number position 1

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Cutting width mm (inch)

I Number of cutting edges

D Infeed speed v mm/min (inch/min)

J Rotation speed Degrees/min.

(degrees/inch)

K Search speed X mm/min (inch/min)

H Machining mode

E Overlap angle Degrees

F Approach angle Degrees

Q Sense of rotation

M Multi plunging
a) O=Option / E=Expert

B Only if [H] = 1
When the Sensitron produces a signal and thus a cutting edge has been located,
the workpiece will be rotated further around its periphery by the amount [B] with
speed [J]
100123482/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 297
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
I Number of cutting edges on the workpiece

D The infeed speed is the interpolation speed of the X / C axis to feed in from [A] to
[X].

J Speed to process the diameter or the cutting edges after the Sensitron signal has
activated.

K Speed to search for the diameter or the next cutting edge.

H Type of operation
H = 0 Machine a diameter
H = 1 Machine a diameter with discontinuous cut (cutting edges)

100123482/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 298 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.43 G9276 Deep-pass grinding: Multi-plunging

FANUC

This function can be used to grind a diameter or taper using the deep-pass process.
The approach angle is 30 degrees, the start position of the C axis 0°, and the direc-
tion of rotation, or number of rotations with 1.005. If necessary, these values can be
changed beforehand with the G9215 function.
Grinding of discontinuous workpieces
This function can also be used to machine workpieces with a discontinuous cut (e.g.
reamers). This means that when the grinding wheel is in a recess, the C axis rotates
at Sensitron speed until the Sensitron responds. Material is then ground away with
feed rate [D] in response to the Sensitron signal until the signal drops off again.

CAUTION!
The following conditions must be met:

 The Sensitron must be activated in advance with G200

 The infeed must take place in a recess
 Activation is done using [H]. See description

Parameter G9276 Unit Mode a)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

T T number position 1 E
R T number position 2

Y Taper angle Degrees E

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch)

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

Q Re-set value in X mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Switch-over position v/vv mm (inch)

C Switch over position v/vvv mm (inch)

D Infeed speed v Degrees/min.

(degrees/inch)

E Infeed amount VV mm (inch)

F Infeed amount VVV mm (inch)

H Type of infeed

S Spark-out time position 1 sec.

100123483/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 299
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter G9276 Unit Mode a)

I Spark-out strokes

J Traverse speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overrun at position 1 mm (inch)

M Overrun at position 2 mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

Q After the roughing plunge, the wheel is retracted by the amount [Q] before traverse
grinding is started. This allows any grinding pressure to be dissipated (as the
default, the value from Insert Reference -> F.1 “Initialization values” is adopted)

H Type of infeed

H = -1 left H = -1.1 Infeed to the left with Sensitron-dependent

machining during rough grinding

H = -0 on both H = -0.1 Infeed to the left and right with Sensitron-

sides dependent machining during
Rough grinding

H=1 Note: H = 1.1 Infeed to the right with Sensitron-dependent

Depending machining during rough grinding
on the
machine
type, the
plugs may
be placed
left or right
of the con-
trol unit

D The C axis is rotated by the approach angle at this speed while the X-axis feeds in
to [B]. The C axis is then also rotated at this speed for the defined number of revolu-
tions.
If different speeds are required for plunging and grinding, the grinding speed can be
defined in advance with G9215 [C].

100123483/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 300 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.44 MEASURING FUNCTIONS

E.45 G204 Activating measurement control (option)

Measurement control is selected using the function G204 and the subsequent grind-
ing cycle initialized in such a way that grinding is carried out with in-process meas-
urement control.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G204 Unit Modea)

B Measuring cycle number

C Measuring position

D Max. correction amount mm (inch)

H No probe liftoff on nominal size 0 = No / 1= Yes E

J Gauge slide number

K Lower measuring probe after approach 0 = No / 1= Yes

A Measuring probe drop delay

M Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes

wheel 1

Q Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes

wheel 2

R Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes

wheel 3
E
S Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes
wheel 4

T Deselect compensation 0 = No / 1= Yes O (S242)

Tool turret 1

V Deselect compensation 0 = No / 1= Yes O (S242)

Tool turret 2

U Measuring position mm (inch) O

W Select measuring program

X Do not extend gauge slide before meas- E

urement.
a) O=Option / E=Expert

B Defines which measuring operations should be selected on the measuring control

system. The manufacturer’s instructions indicate which measurements are config-
ured and set up on the measuring device In an attempt to standardize the use of the
measurement control system, the following arrangement has been made with the
manufacturer of the device (recommendation).

B0 Longitudinal positioning (used in function G205).

B1 Diameter 1
B2 Diameter 2
B3 Diameter 3
B4 Length 1
B5 Length 2
100116009/00

10035212 / 01 / de-German © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 301
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
B6 Length 3
B7 Circumferential positioning passive (used in Function G212)

B0 can not be selected here. If B has not been programmed or has been pro-
grammed to zero, B1 will be adopted as the pre-adjustment value.

NOTE!
With the measurement controls of the Marposs company, the measuring cycle
will be displayed one increment higher - i.e. for example diameter 1 corresponds
to measuring cycle 2.

C This parameter defines the measuring head starting side for a subsequent longitudi-
nal grinding cycle.

C=0 Measuring head LEFT (default)

C=1 Measuring head RIGHT

D At the end of the grinding cycle the workpiece coordinate system zero-point is cor-
rected by the difference between the measuring control zero-point and the pro-
grammed nominal size. If the difference is greater than the defined correction
amount, then no correction is necessary and a program abort is triggered. The pro-
gram defined with the command G208 Parameter V is then started.
If D is not programmed, then 0.05 mm (0.002 inches) is used as default value.

H H1 can be used to define whether, after machining is finished, the measuring probes
do not lift off so that a possible second measurement can be carried out or because
the probes would touch the grinding wheel. If [H] is not programmed, then the probe
lifts up automatically at the end of the cycle.

J Gauge slide number

J=0 No gauge slide (measuring head installed in fixed

position on the workpiece table).
J=1 Gauge slide 1 (yellow) default
J=2 Gauge slide 2 (red)

K If parameter K1 is defined, the measuring probes will drop in accordance with the
drop delay time defined in parameter A.

A Parameter A is used to define a measuring probe drop delay. This is used if the raw
workpiece needs to be ground a little at the beginning, so that the probe can then be
placed on a clean surface. If K=0 then the probe is lowered when the grinding wheel
is at the grinding cycle start position.

M, Q, R, S Deselection of the grinding wheels for which the correction should not be calculated
(see parameter D).

T,V Deselection of the tool turrets for which the correction should not be calculated (see
parameter D).

U This parameter is only used if the measuring head is mounted on an axis (wheel
guard). The measuring position is defined in relation to the set zero-point of the axis
(see Measuring Control Setup).

W If the measuring program has not been selected with G208, the measuring program
of the measurement controls can also be selected here by means of W.

100116009/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 302 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
X If the measuring head is mounted on an axis (wheel guard), the gauge slide will
always be extended before execution of the procedure [U]. To save process time,
you can cancel this by means of X1.

E.46 G205 Longditudinal Positioning Passive

 Definition of length-positioning in the program

 Setting-up the longitudinal positioning probe (Set up, Ch. B.)

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G205 Unit Modea)

I Selection special function

J Gauge slide number

M Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes

wheel 1

Q Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes

wheel 2

R Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes

wheel 3

S Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes

wheel 4

T Deselection of compensation tool turret 1 0 = No / 1= Yes O(S242)

U Deselect compensation tool turret 2 0 = No / 1= Yes O(S242)

W Select measuring program

a) O=Option / E=Expert E
I Selection special function
If the parameter I is not programmed, this means: I = 0 “standard in-process gaug-
ing function”.

W Only valid for in-process gauging systems with separate display and operating
panel. This parameter may be omitted if it has previously been defined in G204 or
G208 in the same part-program.
With some brands of ipg systems, the measuring program can not be selected via
the machine control. Consult the IPG-Manufacturers Manual for the appropriate
Measuring Protocol.

M, Q, R, S Deselection of the grinding wheels for which the correction should not be calculated.

T, U Deselection of the tool turrets for which the correction should not be calculated.

100116009/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 303
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

In-process gauging system with separate display- and operating panel

I=0 Standard In-Process Gauging Function (Default)

I=1 Auto-Zeroing.
Electronic zeroing of the gauge probe on the workpiece.
If the actual value is outside of the auto-zeroing tolerance no zeroing is
carried-out and an error message is displayed.

I=2 Control measurement with program reset.

If the control measurement is out of tolerance, there is a scrap message
issued to the loader and a programme break-off according to G208. The
door can only be unlocked after the message on the Fanuc control has
been deleted or if door-unlocking has been programmed in the subroutine
of G208, via an M-command, for instance impact or out-of-round meas-
urement.

I=3 Accept correction value of measuring control without In-Process-Gaug-

ing:
e.g. Longitudinal positioning without probe (external LP)

I=4 Control Measurement without Program Reset.

If the control measurement is out of tolerance, a waste message is emit-
ted to the loader and the door can only be unlocked after the message
has been deleted on the Fanuc control. Otherwise, the programme is
resumed in the normal manner.
e.g. Post-process measurement by means of the in-process gauging con-
trol of the machine.

Tab.: E-8 In-process gauging system with separate display and operating panel, parameter I

NOTE!
On IPG-Systems WITH separate Display- and Operating Panel the Length Posi-
tioning Cycle must be programmed under “Cycle Number 1”

100116009/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 304 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.46.1 Programming example grinding cycle G205

Cycle G205 is usually programmed before the first Grinding Cycle.

Programming example

O205 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N5 G200 A2. B80. Sensitron pick-up channel number 2,

sensitivity 80%

N6 G205 Length Positioning Passive

N3 G9202 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1 I2. J500.

N8 G9679 Disengage;

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-9 Programming example G205

100116009/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 305
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.47 G206 Longitudinal positioning active (option)

 Longitudinal positioning with measuring probe mounted on the grinding head.

Fanuc  The G206 Cycle supports up to 2 measuring probes. Each measuring probe
supports 2 different measuring positions.
 The measuring probe can also be used at an angle.
 It will always be positioned below the set angle.
(  C.25 "Longitudinal positioning active",  C-132).

100116027/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 306 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Parameter G206 Unit Modea)

A Search function E

B Probe number E

C Measuring position E

F Tool change speed OE

H Collar or groove width mm (inch) E

K B-axis not back to initial position 0 = No / 1= Yes E

M Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes E

wheel 1

Q Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes E

wheel 2

R Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes E

wheel 3

S Deselection of compensation grinding 0 = No / 1= Yes E

wheel 4

T Swivel to safety position

U Re-set value in X mm (inch) E

V Deselection of compensation tool turret 1 0 = No / 1= Yes O(S242)

W Deselect compensation tool turret 2 0 = No / 1= Yes O(S242)

Y Rotation angle for second LP Degrees E

X Start position in X mm (inch) O

Z Reference dimension in Z mm (inch) E

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A This parameter can be used to select the search function.

A0 = left
A1= right
A2 = in keyway
A3 = on collar
If A is not defined, then the value which was defined when setting up the touch
probe will be imported (0 or 1).

M, Q, R, S Deselection of the grinding wheels for which the correction should not be calculated.

T With this parameter, before swiveling in the probe, the software limit switch on the
X-axis is approached instead of the start position. This enables a possible collision
between the probe and the workpiece to be checked for visually.
Only after the probe has been swiveled in should the start position be approached
for measuring. It is useful to apply this function when working with parameter X/Z for
the first time.

U This parameter is only used if A=3 has been defined during set-up (positioning on
two opposite sides).

100116027/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 307
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
If parameter U is not defined, then the probe is first swiveled out and then in again
for traversing from the 1st to the 2nd position.
If parameter U is defined, then the probe remains in the working position when tra-
versing, but the X-axis travels back over the defined reset value.

X This parameter allows a different start position to be defined on the X-axis than with
the set-up. The search motion for locating the workpiece shoulder then starts from
the given position in X.
With this option it is not necessary to carry out a new set-up of the probe after
changing the workpiece.
For the S242 the parameter X must always be defined.

Y This parameter allows a second longitudinal positioning to be defined. If the probe

does not find a shoulder, then the C-axis is rotated by the value of parameter Y
before the second positioning and a second attempt made to find the shoulder. If no
shoulder is found during the second positioning, then the system displays the error
message 1606.

Z This parameter enables a different start position to be defined on the Z-axis than
with the set-up. The search motion for searching the workpiece shoulder starts then
on the given position in Z, always in relation to the reference dimension Z entered
on the set-up.
With this option it is not necessary to carry out a new set-up of the probe after
changing the workpiece.

H Collar or groove width for “collar or groove” application

E.47.1 Programming example cycle G206

N2008 G206 A0 D0 K0 M0 Q0 R0 S0 T0

G206 is usually inserted into the program before the first grinding operation.
Longitudinal positioning active with allowance for longitudinal positioning offset on
all grinding wheels.

100116027/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 308 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Programming example

0206 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N2 G200 A2. B80. Sensitron pick-up channel number 2,

sensitivity 80%

N3 G206 Positioning with measuring head no.

1 at measuring position no. 1

N4 G9202 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1 I2. J500.

N5 G9679 Disengage;

N6 M0 Program stop, e.g. for turning work-

piece.

N7 G206 B1. C2 Positioning with measuring head no.

1 at measuring position no. 2

N8 G9201 X16. Z15. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N5 G9679 Disengage.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-10 Programming example G206

E.47.1.1 Programming example with reference dimension Z

E
 Explanations (  C.25 "Longitudinal positioning active",  C-132)

100116027/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 309
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example

0206 (WORKPIECE FOR GRINDING) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N3 G206 X50 Z20 Positioning with measuring head no. 1

at measuring position no. 1 with new
reference dimension in Z (20 mm)
and start position in X (50 mm).

N4 G9202 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1 I2. J500.

N5 G9679 Disengage;

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-11 Programming example G206 with reference dimension Z

100116027/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 310 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.48 G207 Longitudinal positioning with Sensitron (option)

 Longitudinal positioning using Sensitron.

Fanuc
Parameter G207 Unit Modea)

K Search speed in Z mm/min (inch/min)

M Deselection of compensation grinding 0

wheel 1

Q Deselection of compensation grinding

wheel 2

R Deselection of compensation grinding

wheel 3

S Deselection of compensation grinding

wheel 4

D Spark-out time sec.

a) O=Option / E=Expert

K If B is not programmed, then the function uses the basic value.

M, Q, R, S Deselection of the grinding wheels for which the correction should not be calculated.

E.48.1 Programming example grinding cycle G207

N2010 G207 M0 Q0 R0 S0

Longitudinal positioning with Sensitron and calculation of the offset on all grinding
E
wheels.

N2011 G207 B35 K2 M0 Q0 R1 S0

Longitudinal positioning with Sensitron without calculation of the offset on grinding

wheel no. 3.
Cycle G205 is usually programmed before the first Grinding Cycle.

100116027/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 311
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example

O207 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N2 G207 R1. Longitudinal positioning with Sensitron

(Grinding wheel 1) without correction of
the longitudinal positioning offset on
wheel 3 (internal grinding wheel, see
below)

N3 G9201 X50. Z0. T1. A0.5 Plunge without oscillation.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N4 G9600 T3. A180. Swivel to grinding wheel 3 (internal); at

the same time start wheel 3 and cool-
ant for wheel 3.

N5 G9678 Move to bore approach position. Select

internal grinding.

N6 G202 A1.5 B1.2 C1. Dressing on switch-over points in cycle

G9201.

N7 G9201 X-20. Z-30. T1. A0.5 Plunge without oscillation.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N8 G9679 Release grinding wheel from the bore

and move to the “Home” position in the
X-axis. Internal grinding is completed.
From now on all cycles are treated as
external grinding cycles until G9678 is
programmed again.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-12 Programming example G207

100116027/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 312 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.49 G208 Initialize measurement control (option)

Preparatory function for in-process gauging using customer’s own control panel. For
integrated measurement control, this cycle can be used just to define [V]. In this
case, J must be programmed as J = 1.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G208 Unit Mode a)

W Select measuring program

I Selection measuring program without 0 = No / 1= Yes

external values

V Program call on error IP-gauging sys-

tem

J Without measuring program selection 0 = No / 1= Yes

a) O=Option / E=Expert

W With this parameter the measuring program can be selected on the measurement
controls (default W=1)
Note The measuring program can not be selected via the machine control for
brands of ipg-systems. Consult the ipg-manufacturers manual for the appropriate
measuring protocol.
Program numbers which will be called following a measurement fault. Examples of
measurement errors, with resulting error messages:

V  When reaching undersize position

Message 1656: “Workpiece has ground undersize”
 Necessary external measuring values could not be read.
Message 1698: “Error in-process gauging”
 Length positioning or circumferential positioning value outside of the E
measuring range
Message 1572: “Longitudinally positioned touch probe overtravel”
 Measure touch probe within two seconds of the drop of the finished measure.
Message 1574: “measuring probe below limit”
 The IPG finished dimension signal is not within the correction amount specified
in parameter [ D] of G204
Message 1818: “Compensation value in-process gauging too big”
 Control measurement is outside of tolerance

If [V] has not been programmed in G208, following a negative measurement inci-
dent the disengagement program will be launched.

Parameter I:
In-process gauging system with separate display- and operating panel

I=0 The selected Measuring Protocol takes into account ”Post Process Gaug-
ing Corrections” (see C.1.3) and ”Partial Size Correction” (see C.1.2).
This is the Default Setting.

I=1 The selected Measuring Protocol does not take into account ”Post Proc-
ess Gauging Corrections” and ”Partial Size Correction”..
[I]=1 is necessary, if the respective NC-Program contains ”Calibration
Cycles” that must not be influenced by by External Measuring Values.
(Note: In match grinding the calibration cycle does not take account of the
matching value)

100116010/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 313
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
J If the cycle is only being used for selection of the program number in connection
with a measurement error (parameter V) and no measuring program is to be
selected, this parameter should be set to 1.

NOTE!
On IPG-Systems WITH separate Display- and Operating Panel the Length Posi-
tioning Cycle must be programmed under “Cycle Number 1”

E.49.1 Programming Cycle G208

 Cycle G208 may only be programmed once in the same part Program.
 G208 is normally inserted at the start of a measurement control preparation pro-
gram, before measurement functions like G204 and G205 are programmed.

E.49.1.1 Programming example grinding cycle G208

N2009 G208 I0

100116010/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 314 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.50 G211 Control measurement (option)

Function G211 can be used to perform a control measurement using a measuring

head fitted to the machine. It can be programmed as a pre or post measurement.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G211 Unit Mode a)

A Type of measurement

B Measuring cycle number

C Upper tolerance mm (inch)

D Lower tolerance mm (inch)

E Cylinder tolerance mm (inch)

H Compensation factor

I Error behavior

J Gauge slide number

U Measuring position mm (inch) O

V Measuring position mm (inch) O

W Select measuring program

a) O=Option / E=Expert

Function G211 processes the following data, which can then be processed further
by the program called up.

Feedback value:  #100 Measurement status: 0 = OK; 1 = error

 #101 Measurement classification E
 0 = OK
 1 = Dimension too large
 2 = Dimension too small
 3 = Cylinder error too large
 #102 Measured value
 #103 Correction value

A Type of measurement

A1 Diameter measurement
A2 Length measurement
A3 Diameter and cylinder measurement

B Measuring cycle number (see G204)

C Upper tolerance of measurement

D Lower tolerance of measurement

E Tolerance range for cylindricity measurement

H Compensation factor
This factor can be used to apply the correction factor to the next workpiece. This
means that the correction amount can be made dependent on the measuring value
(e.g. H0.5 = 50%).

100116011/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 315
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
I This parameter can be used to affect the response when an error arises.

I=0 If the measuring result is outside the required toler-

ance limits, then the program is continued
I=1 If the measuring result is outside the required toler-
ance limits, then the program is aborted and the
program called up which was used to define param-
eter V with Command G208. If parameter V is not
programmed, then the normal travel program
G7916 is called up.

J Gauge slide number

J=0 No gauge slide (measuring head permanently

mounted on the workpiece table)
J=1 Gauge slide 1 (yellow) default
J=2 Gauge slide 2 (red)

U, V Measuring positions
This parameter is only used if the measuring head is mounted on an axis (wheel
guard). The measuring position is defined in relation to the set zero-point of the axis
(see Measuring Control Setup C.5.1) Parameter V is only used with A3.

100116011/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 316 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.50.1 Compensation of the measuring value when grinding

The measurement value can be automatically applied to individual workpiece

batches or tools. The corresponding workpiece sections must be assigned a block
number between N1001 and N1032. In the fit-specific corrections (D.2 "Corrections
for specific fits",  D-167), the measuring cycle programmed in G211 must be
entered as an external channel.

Fig. E-59 program_G211

100116011/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 317
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.50.2 Compensation of the measuring value when turning

The measurement value can be automatically applied to individual workpiece

batches or tools. The cycle G9610 must be programmed with a block number
between N1001 and N1032 before the relevant workpiece sections. In the fit-spe-
cific corrections (reference to “D2 fit-specific corrections), the measuring cycle
channel that has been programmed in G211 must be entered as an external chan-
nel.

Fig. E-60 program_G211_turning

100116011/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 318 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.50.3 Programming cycle G211

Measuring a ground diameter and taking 30% of the measured error into account. If
a measurement is outside the tolerance band, the program should be aborted.

Programming example 1: Normal control measurement with program abort.

G9600 T1 A0 Selecting the grinding wheel

N1001 G9202 X20 Z0 T1 A0.5 Grinding diameter 20

B0.15 C0.06 Q3 D0.3 E0.2 F0.1
I2 J500

G211 B1 C0.005 D-0.005 H0.3 Control measurement

I1 W1

G9679 Disengage

M30 End of program

Tab.: E-13 Programming example 1, G211

Measuring a ground diameter and taking 100% of the measured amount into
account. If the dimension is still too large, then the diameter should be ground once
more. If the dimension is too small, then an error message should be issued.

Programming example 2: Control measurement without program abort and

regrinding

G9600 T1 A0 Selecting the grinding wheel

N10

N1001 G9202 X20 Z0 T1 A0.5 Grinding diameter 20

B0.15 C0.06 Q3 D0.3 E0.2 F0.1
I2 J500

G211 B1 C0.005 D-0.005 H0.3 Control measurement

I0 W1 E
IF[#101 EQ 1] GOTO 10 If the value is too large, return to N10

IF[#101 NE 2] GOTO 30 If the value is not too small, go to N30

G9679 Disengage tool

#3000 = 1 (TOO SMALL) Message displayed “TOO SMALL”

G9679 Disengage

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-14 Programming example 2, G211

Measuring a turned diameter. Values lying within the tolerance limits should be cor-
rected on the tool. If the error is too large, then a message should be issued.

100116011/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 319
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example 3: Correction on the turning tool

G9610 H2 T3 Selecting tool 3 and correcting by veri-

fied dimension 2

N1001 G9680 Activate fit-specific corrections

Z2

X20 Diameter 20 turning

G1 Z-50 F20

X32

G9679 Disengage tool

G211 B2 C0.03 D-0.03 I1 W1 Control measurement measuring circuit

2 with program abort

G9679 Disengage

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-15 Programming example 3, G211

100116011/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 320 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.51 G212 Circumferential positioning passive (option)

Function G212 is used to position a workpiece on the circumference using a (pas-

sive) measuring probe.
Two types are distinguished.

Fanuc  Measuring in a longitudinal groove

Siemens
 Measuring on a radial surface

The radial position (C-axis position) of the grooves or surfaces is defined as a set-
up value during set-up of the measurement control system.

Parameter G212 Unit Mode a)

T Type of measurement

A Number of measuring points E

B Measuring circuit number

D Angle difference Degrees

F C-axis positioning speed Degrees/min.

J Gauge slide number

K Calculation method

E Unit

U Measured diameter mm (inch)

Y chord length mm (inch)

X X-position mm (inch)

Z Z-Position mm (inch)
a) O=Option / E=Expert

T Type of measurement
T1 = measuring in grooves
T2 = measuring on a surface

B see function G200

100116011/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 321
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
D Angle difference
This parameter is used for A2. During measurement, the C-axis is rotated by +/- this
amount, so that the measuring probe is lowered onto the edge of the surface.

J Gauge slide number

0 = No gauge slide (measuring head permanently mounted on the workpiece table)
1 = Gauge slide 1 (yellow) default setting
2 = gauge slide 2 (red)

K When measuring several grooves or surfaces, this value can be used to define how
the value should be calculated.
0 = Only read and include last value. An optional average (value) is calculated from
the measurement control system and transferred to the machine control system.
1 = Each value is read and an average is established by the machine control system
from several measurements.

E Unit
This parameter defines which unit is used by the measurement control system for
transferring the value.
0 = degrees
1 = mm, when measuring surfaces (T2), parameters U and Y must also be defined.

U Diameter used for measuring. Only used for E1.

Y Surface chord length. Only used for T2 and E2.

X, Z In order to save processing time, the grinding wheel can be moved to this position
while measuring.

E.51.1 Programming cycle G212

1. Circumferential positioning of a workpiece. This involves measuring 4 grooves

and calculating the average of the deviations.

Programming example 1: Circumferential positioning in 4 grooves

0100

G9600 A0 T1 Select grinding wheel.

G212 T1 A4 B7 F30000 J1 K1 E1 Circumferential positioning passive

U20

G9730 D-1 F-1 I1 K2 Y0 Z10 Highspeed shape-grinding

G9679 Disengage.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-16 Programming example G212

2. Circumferential positioning of a workpiece on a surface. The measurement val-

ues are transferred by the measurement control system in mm.

100116011/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 322 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Programming example 2: Circumferential positioning on a surface

0100

G9600 A0 T1 Select grinding wheel.

G212 T2 A1 B7 F30000 J1 K0 E1 Circumferential positioning passive

U20 Y17.5

G9730 D-1 F-1 I1 K2 Y0 Z10 Highspeed shape-grinding

G9679 Disengage.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-17 Programming example G212

E.52 G213 Zeroing measuring circuit (option)

Function G213 can be used to zero a measuring circuit on a master workpiece

(electronic zero adjustment).
This is used if thermal instability (thermal growth on the probe) or wear on the meas-
uring probe occur during production.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G213 Unit Mode a)

B Measuring circuit number

U Measuring position mm (inch)

J Gauge slide number

a) O=Option / E=Expert
E
B Measuring circuit number (see G204)

J Gauge slide number

J=0 No gauge slide (measuring head permanently

mounted on the workpiece table)
J=1 Gauge slide 1 (yellow) default
J=2 Gauge slide 2 (red)

U Measuring positions
This parameter is only used if the measuring head is mounted on an axis (wheel
guard). The measuring position is defined in relation to the set zero-point of the axis
(see C.1 "General set-up",  C-45). V is only used with A3.

100116011/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 323
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.53 G215 Logging measurement data (option)

Function G215 can be used to record measurement data which have previously
been measured using function G211 (control measurement) in a measurement log.
To do this, function G215 must be programmed after control measurement G211.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G215 Unit Mode a)

B Nominal size mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

The nominal size is only used for logging the data.

E.53.1 Programming cycle G215

Programming example:

G9600 T1 A0 Selecting the grinding wheel

N1001 G9202 X20 Z0 T1 A0.5 Grinding diameter 20

B0.15 C0.06 Q3 D0.3 E0.2 F0.1
I2 J500

G211 B1 C0.005 D-0.005 H0.3 Control measurement

I1 W1

G215 B20 Logging

G9679 Disengage

M30 End of program

Tab.: E-18 Programming example G215

E.54 G230 Read in external measurement values (option)

This cycle is used to read in a set of external measurement values. A set consists of
8 measurement values. The cycle checks whether the program is started by the
operator or by the loader. If the operator starts the program, no values are read in.

Fanuc Parameter A defines which set of external measurement values are to be read in:
Siemens
0 = 1. Set (values 1 - 8), (default)
1 = 2. Set (values 9 - 16)
2 = 3. Set (values 17 - 24)

100116015/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 324 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.55 G231 Calculate external measurement value as LP value

(option)

Fanuc This cycle can be used to transfer an external measurement value as an LP meas-
Siemens urement value. The measurement value to be applied is defined in the fit-specific
corrections. The cycle must have a block number between 1001 and 1032 in order
to appear there.
D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167

Parameter G231 Unit Mode a)

M Deselect compensation 0=No / 1= Yes E

Grinding wheel 1

Q Deselect compensation 0=No / 1= Yes E

Grinding wheel 2

R Deselect compensation 0=No / 1= Yes E

Grinding wheel 3

S Deselect compensation 0=No / 1= Yes E

Grinding wheel 4

T Deselect compensation 0=No / 1= Yes E,O

Tool turret 1 (S242)

U Deselect compensation 0=No / 1= Yes E,O

Tool turret 2 (S242)
a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.56 G232 Process external values (option)

E
With this cycle, external values can be written in user variables for further use.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G232 Unit Mode a)

A Correction number

B Variable number
a) O=Option / E=Expert

A The correction number defines the storage location of the required external correc-
tion.

B The variable number defines the number of the target variable in which the external
correction is to be stored.

100123477/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 325
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.57 G233 Write external values to the measurement control (option)

This function can be used to write an external value to the measurement control via
the PROFIBUS interface. The measurement value to be written is defined in the fit-
Fanuc specific corrections. The function must have a block number between 1001 and
1032 in order to appear there.
(  D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167)

Parameter G233 Unit Mode a)

C Type of correction

E Compensation factor E

B Measuring circuit number

W Select measuring program E

A Measuring head
a) O=Option / E=Expert

C The type of correction defines what the value on the measurement control is com-
pensated as.
1 = Dirac value for match grinding
2 = Feedback value for correcting the measurement control
3 = Stock-removal value for setting an amount to be removed

E The value read in is multiplied by the compensation factor before it is written. This
can be defined between -2 and 2.

B The measurement loop in which the value is to be written.

W The measurement program in which the value is to be written. (Default 1)

A Defines whether the reading on measuring head A, measuring head B or both

measuring heads is compensated.
1 = Measuring head A
2 = Measuring head B
3 = Measuring head A and measuring head B

100123484/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 326 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.58 G240 Read in values from integrated measurement control

(option)

This function can be used to read in the Watch from a specific measurement loop
and, if necessary, to process it further. After compensation with [Q], the value is writ-
ten to the external correction memory [C].

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G240 Unit Mode a)

A Select Watch channel for measure-

ment control

B Measuring circuit number

C Number of the external correction

Q Compensation factor

W Trend or absolute correction

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Watch channel of the measurement control from which the value is read

B Cycle / sequence of the measurement control from which the Watch [A] is read

C Number of the external correction memory. The value that has been read is written
in this memory.
(1 to 32) Then the value can be further processed using the fit-specific corrections (
Þ D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167).

Q Immediately after it has been read in, the value is multiplied by this factor (+/-).

W After it has been compensated with [Q], and dependent on [W], the value is further
processed as trend or absolute. E

100123488/00

10035212 / 01 / de-German © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 327
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.59 G9261 Positioning pre-machined threads (option)

This function can be used to align (position) a pre-machined thread using the active
positioning probe.

Fanuc This function can only be run using the Quick-Set option.
Siemens

E.59.1 Operation sequence

Approaching the starting position:

The starting position in X and Z can be
programmed in absolute values with ref-
erence to the workpiece zero-point.
(Parameters [X] and [Z])
The active touch probe is automatically
swiveled to the programmed X and Z
positions.
Example for defining the starting posi-
tion for an ISO thread M20x2.5:
G9261 D5 H0 J40 K0 Q9000 S3
U2.5 X25 Z-10

Parameter Z must be divisible by the

pitch (WITHOUT REMAINDER).

Search position 1 at 0 degrees:

Move the touch probe into the thread.
After making contact the X position will be
saved.
Parameter [S] is used to define the
number of search positions. If parameter
[S] is not programmed, the measuring
points are set to 3 approach positions
(120°).

Search position 2 at 120 degrees:

100123488/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 328 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Search position 3 for 240 degrees:

Approaching the lowest position:

The C axis is positioned at the smallest
measured diameter.

Finding the center position in Z:

In X reverse by parameter [D] to this posi-
tion until the probe signal is dropped. The
thread is then positioned using position-
ing speed Z from the basic values in Z.

Measuring point compensation:

The C axis is rotated to the calculated
correction position and then the absolute
C axis display set to zero.
Size correction in Z:
Parameter [K] provides the option of
defining a +/- correction in the Z direction.
The correction value entered in Z is com-
pensated on the C axis position.

100123488/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 329
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter G9261 Unit Mode a)

X Start position in X mm (inch)

Z Starting position in Z ([Z] must be mm (inch)

divisible by [U] without remainder)

B Approach position X mm (inch)

Y Approach position Z mm (inch)

C Internal thread measurement

D Retraction measuring probe mm (inch)

E Distance sphere / sensor disk mm (inch)

H Direction of thread 0=right / 1=left mm (inch)

K Z axis correction mm (inch)

Q Positioning speed for C axis Degrees/min.

S Number of measuring points at cir-

cumference

T Interrupted threads

U Thread pitch mm (inch)

V Do not disengage before launching

the starting position

W Diameter of probe disk mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

C 0=No, 1 1= Yes

D Retraction amount in X after the probe signal has dropped.

E Distance sphere/sensor disk. Only has to be defined if C=1.

H 0=right, 1=left

K Correction value in Z after measuring.

S The number of measuring points must be between 3 (default=3) and 10.

T 0=No, 1 1= Yes

W Only has to be defined if C=1.

Z Has to be divisible by the thread pitch [U] without remainder.

100123488/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 330 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.59.2 Programming example

Programming example

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 A0 T1 Select grinding wheel 1

N100 G9261 D1 H0 K0 Q9000 S3 Positioning pre-machined threads

U2.5 X25 Z-10 G9261

N200 G9230 A0.1 B1.2 F30 H0 Thread grinding

J5000 M0 Q15000 T7 U2.5 V6001
X25 Y0 Z0

N300 G9679 Disengage

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-19 Programming example, G9261

100123488/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 331
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.60 G9603 Circumferential positioning with active touch probe

(option)

This function enables:

 Positioning on a radial shoulder
 Circumferential centering of a keyway
Fanuc  Circumferential centering of a key

Parameter G9603 Unit Mode a)

X Measuring position in X mm (inch)

Z START POSITION IN Z mm (inch)

Y Starting position for C axis Degrees

U Starting position for X axis mm (inch)

B Rotation angle Degrees

I Selection special function

J Rotation angle for key measurement Degrees

C Correction of C axis after measure- Degrees

ment

D Search speed fast Degrees/min.

E Search speed slow Degrees/min.

F Retraction distance Degrees

K Pitch error mm (inch)

Q Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

R External tolerance Degrees E

S Form positioning correction 0 = No / 1= Yes E

T Internal tolerance Degrees E

W Swivel touch probe to software limit 0 = No / 1= Yes

switch
a) O=Option / E=Expert

100123488/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 332 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
B Rotation angle increment
When measuring a keyway or key, the C axis increments by this angular amount for
a positive measurement signal when approaching the end position [X].

C C axis correction after measurement

The C axis is corrected by this amount after the surface has been found.

D At this speed, the C axis will be turned until the probe responds.

E The surface will be approached again from the retract position [F] at this speed.

F C axis retraction distance

I Selecting special functions

I=1 Finding a radial shoulder in direction C+

I=2 Finding a radial shoulder in direction C-
I=3 Finding the central position of a keyway
I=4 Finding the central position of a key
I=5 Measuring the center height error of the probe
I=6 Measuring the center position of the keyway with-
out liftoff. In this method of measurement the work-
piece diameter is looked for in X, and then the
workpiece is turned without liftoff in X until the
measuring probe signal drops.
I=7

I=7 can be used to measure a surface relative to an absolute C axis position and to
check its position tolerance. If the measured angle lies outside the defined tolerance
zone [R] then the probe is disengaged and an error message
[FM 1876] issued. If the measured angle lies inside the tolerance zone [R], then the
E
main program is machined as normal. No correction can be carried out with I=7 so
that the base of the clamping device is not changed. The measured error is returned
using the variable #100, so that the operator has the option of applying the meas-
ured deviation for the starting position of the C axis in the next function.
The return value can be saved as a free variable #900 - #999 for the operator, as
can be seen in the programming example.
Programming example:
G9603 X100 Z50 Y0 U140 I7 C0 D500 E150 F5 M45 Q1000 R2 T1 W1;
#999 = #100;

Important!
In machines without Quick-Set the probe travel is not known, therefore the probe
position has to be measured using function G9671.

J Rotation angle for clearing the key with the positioning probe after the first side of
the key has been found.

K As it is very difficult to set the center height of the probe ball, this parameter offers
the possibility of defining the deviation level for a center height error. This value will
be defined internally to the software in the coordinate system of the C axis. No cor-
rection in the (C) parameter should however be made. ((C) must be vacant).

100123488/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 333
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Q Speed of C axis when approaching the start position on the C axis [Y].

R This value defines the external tolerance of the form position when parameter (I)
has been defined as 7. If the error measured is greater than (R), then the probe will
be disengaged and an error message issued.

S If parameter (S) has been defined as 1, after measuring the software will carry out a
correction of the angular deviation for all grinding wheels. If parameter (S) has been
defined as 0, no correction will be carried out and the error registered will be written
to the #100 variable.

T This value determines the calculation mode of the correction. If the measured value
is less than (T), the measured value will be applied to all grinding wheels. If the
measured value lies between [T] and [R], then the correction will be applied from
parameter [C].

U Starting position for X axis.

The programmed position corresponds to the center point of the swiveled position-
ing probe. The search motion in X is started from here.

X Measuring position in X.

Keyway If the touch probe reaches this position without find-

ing a diameter, then the C search motion to find the
keyway shoulder begins. If the approach to the X
position is terminated due to contact, then the
probe is retracted to the start position [U] and the C
axis rotated by the angle defined in parameter [B].
The approach to the X position is repeated.
Key If the approach to the X position is terminated due
to contact, then the probe is retracted to the start
position [U] and the C axis rotated by the angle
defined in parameter [B]. The approach to the X
position is repeated. If the touch probe reaches this
X position without finding a diameter, then after
reaching this position the C search motion to find
the key shoulder begins. After registering the key
shoulder, the touch probe is retracted to the start
position and the C axis rotated by the rotation angle
[J]. The touch probe is moved to the end position
and the key shoulder sought.

Z The programmed position corresponds to the Z position of the center of the touch
probe.

100123488/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 334 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Programming example for measuring the center of a keyway

G9603 B5 C0 I3 U24 X20 C15 The machine travels to the pro-

Z20; grammed starting position where the
probe arm is swiveled in, e.g. in X to 24
mm (parameter U) and in Z to 20 mm
(parameter Z), in relation to the center
point of the ball probe. The search for
the keyway starts from this position to
the end position in X 20 mm (parameter
X) using the rapid search speed X from
the basic values. If the traversing
motion is terminated by a contact signal
during the search motion in X, then the
machine moves back in X to the start-
ing diameter and rotates the C axis by
5 degrees (parameter B) to the next
search position. This procedure is car-
ried out until the search motion reaches
the end position in X without a cancella-
tion signal. If the touch probe does not
find a keyway in the entire circumfer-
ence, the error message 1606 is
issued.

Tab.: E-20 Programming example for measuring the center of a keyway

100123488/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 335
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.61 G9780 Calibrate touch probe in X (option)

This function can be used to calibrate the probe on a known diameter.

Fanuc

Parameter G9780 Unit Mode a)

A Start position in X mm (inch)

B START POSITION IN Z mm (inch)

C Calibrate according to number of

workpieces

X Reference diameter mm (inch)

Q Search direction E
a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.61.1 Programming example measuring cycle G9780

G9780 A125 B110 C1 T1 X120

A,B

100123488/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 336 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
Q

100123488/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 337
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.62 G9781 Calibrate touch probe in Z (option)

This function can be used to calibrate the touch probe on a known length.

Fanuc

Parameter G9781 Unit Mode a)

A Start position in X mm (inch)

B START POSITION IN Z mm (inch)

C Calibrate according to number of

workpieces

X Reference length mm (inch)

Q Search direction E
a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.62.1 Programming example measuring cycle G9781

G9781 A125 B110 C1 Q0 T1 X120

A,B

100123488/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 338 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
Q

100123488/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 339
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.63 G9782 Control measurement X (option)

This function can be used to check the dimensions of a machined diameter. The
measured values can be logged or a correction carried out if required.

The correction can be applied directly only with turning tools, with grinding wheels
the correction has to be applied in the partial corrections as external measuring
value. D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167

Parameter G9782 Unit Mode a)

B Start position in X mm (inch)

C START POSITION IN Z mm (inch)

A Cutting number O

D Invert direction of correction

E External tolerance plus mm (inch)

F Internal tolerance plus mm (inch)

U External tolerance minus mm (inch)

M Internal tolerance minus mm (inch)

H Tool head

I Logging measurement data

J Correction mode

K Correction component %

S Measurement number

T Tool position

R Turret position

V Correction number

W Max. value to tool breakage mm (inch)

X Nominal diameter mm (inch)

Q Measuring direction

Y Correction value mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.63.1 Programming example measuring cycle G9782

G9782 B110 C25 A1 E0.5 F0.05 M-0.05 U-0.5 H1 I1 J1

K33 S1 T1 R1 V1 W0.5 X100.02 Q-1

A Only if J = 1 and multiple cutting edge option selected

0 = Apply to all cutting edges
1 = Apply only to programmed cutting edge

B/C Start position in X / Z in relation to probe center point

100116020/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 340 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
D Only if J = 1
Modify correction direction against the measuring direction

E,F,M,U

J The correction mode defines whether, with a measured deviation from the nominal
dimension, a correction should be carried out.
0 = Deselect correction mode
1 = Select correction mode
If a turning tool is defined with [H], [T] and [R], the correction is applied directly to
this tool position and can be seen under Turning-Tool Corrections
(D.4 "Turning Tool corrections",  D-176)
If a grinding wheel position is defined with [H] / [T], the measured value can be fur-
ther processed with [V] in the same way as an external measured value.
If the measured deviation lies outside the outer tolerance zone, then the behavior
can be controlled using parameter [I]. If the deviation lies between the inner and
outer tolerance zones, then a real value correction is carried out and, for a deviation
lying inside the inner tolerance zone, a trend correction will be issued which can be
controlled using [K].

K Only if J = 1
The correction component can be used to control the trend correction E
0 = no correction
1 = correct 100% of the measured deviation

Q Search direction

I Log measurement data. This parameter is used to define whether the measured
values should be logged and whether, for a measurement value outside the outer
tolerance zone, an error message (program abort) or a message (cycle stop) should
be issued. In the case of an error message, in loading machines the workpiece is
discharged and treated as a reject. (B.6 "Logging measurement data",  B-39)

100116020/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 341
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
0 = Logging off. Error if measured value > [E] and < [U]
1 = Logging on. Error if measured value > [E] and < [U]
2 = Logging off. Message if measured value > [E] and < [U]
3 = Logging on. Message if measured value > [E] and < [U]

S Only if I = 1 or 3
Measurement number appears as additional information in the measurement data
log.

T Only if J = 1
Tool position to which the correction should be applied. If a turret is defined here,
then the correction will be applied directly to the defined tool [R]. If a grinding wheel
position is defined then the correction can be carried out using the external meas-
urement value. See parameter [V].

R Only if J = 1 and [T] is a turret.

Revolver position to which the correction should be applied.

V Only if J = 1 and [T] is a grinding wheel.

The correction number defines the storage location of an external correction. This
enables the measurement value to be processed further like an external correction.
(D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167

W Only when J = 1 and [T] is a turret.

Correction limit for the tool. If the correction to be applied to the tool is greater than
[W], then a tool breaking will be detected and an error message put out, resp. a sis-
ter tool selected, if so defined.

Y Only if J = 1
With the correction value, we can define a constant amount that will be added to the
measured dimension.

100116020/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 342 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Fig. E-61 program_G9782

Important!
The nominal diameter [X] must be programmed in the middle of the tolerance
zone.
Example:
A 100 H7 shaft diameter
Tolerance zone 0 - 35 ym

Upper tolerance = 100.0000 mm

Mid-range tolerance = 99.9875 mm
Lower tolerance = 99.9650 mm

The nominal diameter must be set to 99.9875 mm.

100116020/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 343
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.64 G9783 Control measurement Z (option)

This function can be used to check the dimensions of a machined shoulder. The
measured values can be logged or a correction carried out if required.

Parameter G9783 Unit Mode a)

B Start position in X mm (inch)

C START POSITION IN Z mm (inch)

A Cutting number O

D Invert direction of correction

E External tolerance plus mm (inch)

F Internal tolerance plus mm (inch)

M Internal tolerance minus mm (inch)

U External tolerance minus mm (inch)

H Tool head

I Logging measurement data

J Correction mode

K Correction component %

S Measurement number

T Tool position

R Turret position

V Correction number

W Max. value to tool breakage mm (inch)

Z Nominal dimension mm (inch)

Q Measuring direction

Y Correction value mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.64.1 Programming example measuring cycle G9783

G9783 B110 C25 A1 E0.5 F0.05 M-0.05 U-0.5 H1 I1 J4

K33 S1 T1 R1 Q-1 Z100

A Only if J = 1 and multiple cutting edge option selected

0 = Apply to all cutting edges
1 = Apply only to programmed cutting edge

B/C Start position in X / Z in relation to probe center point

D Only if J = 1
Modify correction direction against the measuring direction

100116021/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 344 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
E,F,M,U

J The correction mode defines whether, with a measured deviation from the nominal
dimension, a correction should be carried out.
0 = Deselect correction mode
1 = Select correction mode
If a turning tool is defined with [H], [T] and [R], the correction is applied directly to
this tool position and can be seen under Turning-Tool Corrections
(Þ D.4 "Turning Tool corrections",  D-176)
If a grinding wheel position is defined with [H] / [T], the measured value can be fur-
ther processed with [V] in the same way as an external measured value.
If the measured deviation lies outside the outer tolerance zone, then the behavior
can be controlled using parameter [I]. If the deviation lies between the inner and
outer tolerance zones, then a real value correction is carried out and, for a deviation
lying inside the inner tolerance zone, a trend correction will be issued which can be
controlled using [K].

K Only if J = 1
The correction component can be used to control the trend correction
0 = no correction
1 = correct 100% of the measured deviation
E
Q Search direction

I Log measurement data. This parameter is used to define whether the measured
values should be logged and whether, for a measurement value outside the outer
tolerance zone, an error message (program abort) or a message (cycle stop) should
be issued. In the case of an error message, in loading machines the workpiece is
discharged and treated as a reject. (B.6 "Logging measurement data",  B-39)
0 = Logging off. Error if measured value > [E] and < [U]
1 = Logging on. Error if measured value > [E] and < [U]
2 = Logging off. Message if measured value > [E] and < [U]
3 = Logging on. Message if measured value > [E] and < [U]
100116021/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 345
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
S Only if I = 1 or 3
Measurement number appears as additional information in the measurement data
log.

T Only if J = 1
Tool position to which the correction should be applied. If a turret is defined here,
then the correction will be applied directly to the defined tool [R]. If a grinding wheel
position is defined then the correction can be carried out using the external meas-
urement value. See parameter [V].

R Only if J = 1 and [T] is a turret.

Revolver position to which the correction should be applied.

V Only if J = 1 and [T] is a grinding wheel.

The correction number defines the storage location of an external correction. This
enables the measurement value to be processed further like an external correction.
(D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167)

Y Only if J = 1
With the correction value, we can define a constant amount that will be added to the
measured dimension.

Important!
The nominal dimension [Z] must be programmed in the middle of the tolerance
zone.
Example:
Length 100
Tolerance zone 0 - 35 ym

Upper tolerance = 100.0000 mm

Mid-range tolerance = 99.9875 mm
Lower tolerance = 99.9650 mm

The nominal dimension must be set to 99.9875 mm.

100116021/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 346 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.65 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

E.66 G200 Activate Sensitron (option)

“Activate Sensitron” activates contact detection. Depending on the machine model,

this is solved by means of a Dittel unit, sparking with a frequency converter, or a
special solution.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G200 Unit Mode a)

A Pick-Up Channel O

B Filter time sec. O

C Special approach

D Selection of block number O

E Hysteresis % O

K Search speed in X mm/min (inch/min)

M Search speed in Z mm/min (inch/min)

T Max. stabilization time sec.

W Only set selection and monitor

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Only when sparking with Sensitron or frequency converter

Pickup-channel number or special parameter for sparking with frequency converter
(see special instructions)
E
B Only when sparking with frequency converter
(see special instructions)

C Parameter [C] is only applicable for Cycle G9206 “Traverse Grinding”

C=0 The workpiece is approached at position [Z].

C=1 The workpiece is approached at positions [Z], [W]
and in the middle.
The highest contact point is defined as the grinding
stock allowance in X.

D Only when sparking with Dittel unit

Selection of block number

E Only when sparking with frequency converter

(see special instructions)

K, M If these parameters are not programmed, the programmed default values apply ( Þ
F.1 "Initialization values",  F-420)

T [T] can be used to define the max. stabilization time.

Problem
If the signal has already been triggered by approaching with fast-advance speed,
this does not fall off quickly enough. The approach at search speed will then already
be terminated at the grinding stock allowance.
100116022/00

10035212 / 01 / de-German © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 347
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
W This allows a block to be selected, and it is displayed on the process screen so that
it can be checked.

HINWEIS!
if the sensitron signal does not fall below the set trigger-threshold the trigger-
threshold can be changed on the pcu until the sensitron signal falls below the
threshold. The displayed sensitivity can then be programmed in parameter B.
The sensitron will then work correctly for the next workpiece.

E.66.1 Programming Cycle G200

 The sensitron can be activated at any position in the program.

 The Sensitron remains active until it is deactivated with Function G201 or M30.
 Within the same Program the Sensitron Sensitivity can be changed by re-defin-
ing it with G200 at any Point in the Program.
 Pick-Up Number 1 is activated if G200 is programmed without Parameters.

E.66.1.1 Programming example grinding cycle G200

The Sensitron channel 1 is activated with 35% sensitivity and the workpiece is
moved into X at 4 mm/min and into Z at 2 mm/min.

Programming example with Sensitron 2

0200 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N2 G200 A2. B80. Sensitron pick-up channel 2, sensi-

tivity 80%

N3 G9201 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N4 G200 A1. B20. Sensitron pick-up channel 1, sensi-

tivity 20%

N5 G9205 X18. Z20. T1. R11. Cycle ”Multi-Plunge”.

A0.5 B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4
E0.01 F0.002 H0. S2. I3.
J500. K0. M0. W50.

N6 G201 De-Activate Sensitron.

N7 G9201 X16. Z75. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N8 G9679 Disengage.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-21 Programming example G200

100116022/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / de-German

E - 348 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.67 G201 Deactivate Sensitron

Deactivate the SENSITRON in the Part Program.

Fanuc
Siemens

E.67.1 Programming Cycle G201

 This Function is programmed without Parameters.

 The Sensitron remains inactive until activated with Function G200.

E.67.1.1 Programming example grinding cycle G201

Sensitron is switched off.

Programming example with AE4000 / M5000

0201 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0. Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N2 G200 A2. B80. Sensitron pick-up channel 2, sensi-

tivity 80%

N3 G9201 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N4 G200 A1. B20. Sensitron pick-up channel 1, sensi-

tivity 20%
E
N5 G9205 X18. Z20. T1. R11. Cycle ”Multi-Plunge”.
A0.5 B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4
E0.01 F0.002 H0. S2. I3.
J500. K0. M0. W50.

N6 G201 De-Activate Sensitron.

N7 G9201 X16. Z75. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N8 G9679 Disengage.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-22 Programming example G201

100116022/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 349
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.68 G202 Dressing outwith the grinding cycle

 Dressing at the switch-over point within the grinding cycle.

 Dressing after strokes / rotations outwith the grinding cycle.

Fanuc
Parameter G202 Unit Mode a)

A Dressing after V

B Dressing after VV

C Dressing after VVV

D Dressing by time V sec.

E Dressing by time VV sec.

F Dressing by time VVV sec.

H Dressing after strokes[number/revolu-

tions]

J Dressing after spark-out strokes

[number]

K Dressing after plunges [number]

M Dress. after n infeed mov. in v [forms]

R Number of dressing strokes V

S Number of dressing strokes VV

T Number of dressing strokes VVV

U Factor dressing amount V E

V Factor dressing amount VV E

W Factor dressing amount VVV) E

X Factor for dressing speed V E

Y Factor for dressing speed VV E

Z Factor for dressing speed VVV E

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A, B, C These parameters enable dressing to be selected at the switch-over points V, VV

and VVV. (The speed factors for each type of dressing can be programmed with
parameters X, Y, Z.)

D, E, F Only operational for plunging cycles

H Number: Applicable for all transverse grinding / cross-wise functions

Rotations: Applicable for form grinding

M Applicable to multi-plunge form grinding only.

R, S, T These parameters can be used to define the number of dressing passes for each
type of operation (V, VV, VVV)

100116022/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 350 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
U, V, W These parameters can be used to control the dressing amounts using a conversion
factor for each type of operation (V, VV, VVV)

Important!
Parameter programmed with zero means dressing without infeed.

X, Y, Z Simultaneous selection of M,D,E or F with these parameters enables a factor for the
dressing speed to be programmed for each type of operation.

Important!
Parameter programmed with zero means dressing without feed. Error 11 will be
displayed.

E.68.1 Programming cycle G202

E.68.1.1 Programming example grinding cycle G202

N2002 G202 A1 X1.3

Dressing after rough grinding with dressing speed 1.3X higher than programmed

N2003 G202 H10

Dressing after 10 strokes during transverse - or cross-wise grinding or after 10 rota-

tions during form grinding.
E
N2004 G202 C1 K2

Dressing after 2 plunges and after finishing e.g. during multi plunging

100116022/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 351
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example

0202 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N2 G200 A2. B80. Sensitron pick-up channel 2, sensitivity

80%

N3 G9201 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N4 G202 C1. K2. Dressing in following cycle G9205

N5 G9205 X18. Z20. T1. R11. Cycle ”Multi-Plunge”.

A0.5 B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4
E0.01 F0.002 H0. S2. I3.
J500. K0. M0. W50.

N6 G201 De-Activate Sensitron.

N7 G9201 X16. Z75. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N8 G9679 Disengage.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-23 Programming example G202

100116022/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 352 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.69 G203 Dressing after n pieces

Dressing of the wheel after a certain number of workpieces.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G203 Unit Mode a)

A Number of workpieces

B Special functions for roller-burnishing O, E

S Number of Dresses

V Factor dressing amount

Y Factor for dressing speed

X Special retract position X mm (inch)

Z Special retract position Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

B Special function for roller-burnishing. (Binary coded, values can be added)

0 : Switch off process coolant when roller-burnishing and switch on again.
1 : Do NOT switch off process coolant before roller-burnishing .
2 : Do NOT switch on process coolant after roller-burnishing.

S Definition of the number of dressing passes.

V Definition of the Dressing Amounts in the machining stages V, VV, VVV

CAUTION!
E
Parameter Value 0 means dressing without Dressing Infeed.

Y Speed Factor for Dressing Speed. Valid for Parameters D, E, F or M

CAUTION!
Parameter value Y0 means dressing speed 0 (zero). Alarm 11 will be displayed.

E.69.1 Programming Cycle G203

 Function G203 can be programmed anywhere in the Part Program.

 Parameters X and Z define the Position to which the Grinding Wheel should
move to after the Dressing Cycle is finished. This may be very helpful.

 After Dressing the Grinding Wheel will move to the Position at which the Dress-
ing Cycle was called if Parameters X and Z are not defined.

E.69.1.1 Programming example grinding cycle G203

Dressing is carried out after 10 workpieces.

100116022/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 353
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example
Dressing before 25 Workpieces without programmed Retract Position

O203 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N10 G203 A25. Dressing before 25 ground Work-

pieces

N3 G9201 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N4 G9679 Disengage;

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-24 Programming example G203

Programming example
Dressing before 25 Workpieces with programmed Retract Position (Dress-
ing before Grinding)

O203 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N10 G203 A25.X20.5 Z0 Dressing before 25 ground Work-

pieces After dressing the grinding
wheel will move to the start position
of the 1st Run grinding cycle.

N3 G9201 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N4 G9679 Disengage;

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-25 Programming example G203

100116022/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 354 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Programming example
Dressing after 25 workpieces

O203 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N3 G9201 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N10 G203 A25.X20.5 Z0 Dressing before 25 ground Work-

pieces After dressing the grinding
wheel will move to the start position
of the 1st Run grinding cycle.

N4 G9679 Disengage;

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-26 Programming example G203

Programming example
Dressing after 25 workpieces with programmed Retract Position (Dressing
after Grinding)

O203 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N3 G9201 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2 E
F0.1

N4 G9679 Disengage;

N10 G203 A25.X20.5 Z0 Dressing before 25 ground Work-

pieces After dressing the grinding
wheel will move back to the retract
position.
HINT: If the X-position is pro-
grammed bigger than the software-
limit-switch position, then the wheel-
head will only move to the software-
limit-switch position of the X-axis.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-27 Programming example G203

100116022/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 355
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example
Dressing between two Grinding Cycles

O203 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N2 G200 A2. B80. Sensitron pick-up channel number 2,

sensitivity 80%

N3 G9201 X20. Z0. T1. A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N9 G203 A1 X18.5 Z20 Dressing between two Grinding

Cycles. After Dressing the Grinding
Wheel will move to the Grinding
Stock Allowance Position of the next
Grinding Cycle.

N5 G9205 X18.Z20.T1.R11.A0.5 Cycle ”Multi-Plunge”.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3.D0.4 E0.01
F0.002 H0. S2. I3. J500. K0.
M0. W50.

N4 G9679 Disengage;

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-28 Programming example G203

100116022/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 356 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.70 G216 Cylindricity correction (option)

Fanuc This function can be used to define the position for an intermediate sparkout from
the CNC on the measurement control. The definition parameters such as spark-out
time, spark-out strokes and intermediate spark-out position are programmed using
the function G216. Activating the measurement control and selecting the measuring
heads have to be programmed using the function G204.

Parameter G216 Unit Mode a)

A Measurement of nth workpiece

B Cylindrical correction before, during -1 / 0 / 1

or after machining E
C Guide measuring head left=0 / right=1

I Spark-out strokes

K Correction component in %

Q Spark-out time sec

R Workpiece length mm (inch)

S Measuring distance mm (inch)

T Tolerance mm (inch)

U Maximum correction amount mm (inch)

X Intermediate spark-out position mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

100116022/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 357
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.70.1 Parameter description

B Cylindrical correction before, during or after machining (during part exchange)

C Guide measuring head position left = 0 / right = 1

If C is not programmed, then the default is 1

R/S Measured length / workpiece length

T Tolerance

U Maximum correction amount

Error message “1818 Measurement control compensation value too large” is issued
if the correction value is greater than the maximum correction amount.

100116022/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 358 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.71 G9313 Peripheral speed for grinding

This function can be used to change the peripheral speed of a grinding wheel.

Fanuc
Parameter G9313 Unit Mode a)

H Tool head O

T Tool position

R Tool sub-position O

B Peripheral speed m/s

a) O=Option / E=Expert

B Required peripheral speed

100113485/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 359
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.72 G9500 Swiveling of the workhead (option)

 Swiveling of an automatic swiveling workhead (option). The programmed swivel

position is always approached from the same side.
All calculations are disabled by default.

Fanuc
Parameter G9500 Unit Modea)

A Desired position of the Q axis. Degrees

B Correction value by which the angle is off- Degrees

set.

F Deselection of compensation grinding E

wheel 1

H Deselection of compensation grinding E

wheel 2

I Deselection of compensation grinding E

wheel 3

K Deselection of compensation grinding E

wheel 4

M Correction to all axes

Q Nominal size X mm (inch)

R Correction to Z axis

U Tolerance for swiveling the B5 axis mm (inch) E

V Length of clamping device mm (inch) E

W Length of workpiece mm (inch) E

X Diameter difference on the workpiece mm (inch) E

Z Measured length on workpiece mm (inch) E

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Nominal angle of the Q axis.

B Correction value that is added to [A]

Q Nominal size X for calculating the diameter / length shift on the workpiece after cor-
rection.

F,H,I,K Deselection of the grinding wheels for which the correction should not be calculated.

U Tolerance for swiveling the B5 axis:

Swiveling of the workhead can result in a slight reduction in dimensional workpiece
accuracy. Parameter U can be used to specify that the axis should only carry out
swivel corrections once this tolerance is exceeded.

M Deselect compensation. When the  X or  Z at the workpiece caused by the

swiveling should not be compensated on the tools.

R Allows the compensation of the length shift on the Z axis to be deselected.

Programming example grinding cycle G9500

100116030/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / de-German

E - 360 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Programming example 1

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name)

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Wheel 1 to angle 0 degrees

N2 G9500 A12 C0.05 Swivel workpiece spindle head to

12.05 degrees

N3 G200 A2 B80 Sensitron pick-up channel number 2,

sensitivity 80%

N4 G206 B1 C1 Active positioning using measuring

probe no. 1 in measuring position no. 1

N5 G9201 X28 Z0 T1 A0.5 B0.15 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

C0.06 Q3 D0.4 E0.2 F0.1

N6 G9679 X220 Z80 Disengage

N7 G9500 A0 Swivel workpiece spindle head to 0

degrees

N8 G9201 X20 Z80 T1 A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q3 D0.4 E0.2 F0.1
E
N9 G9679 Disengage

M30; End of program

Programming example 2

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name)

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Wheel 1 to angle 0 degrees

N2 G9500 A12 F1 V145 W85 Swivel workpiece spindle head to 12

X0.002 Z30 degrees

N3 G200 A1 B30 Sensitron activation

N4 G9201 X28 Z0 T1 A0.5 B0.15 Grinding cycle “Plunge without oscilla-

C0.06 Q2 D0.4 E0.2 F0.1 tion”

N5 G9679 X220 Z80 Disengage

100116030/00

10035212 / 01 / de-German © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 361
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example 2

N6 G9500 A0 F1 V145 W85 Swivel workpiece spindle head to 0

X0.002 Z30 degrees

N7 G9201 X20 Z80 T1 A0.5 Cycle ”Plunge without Oscillation”

B0.15 C0.06 Q2 D0.4 E0.2 F0.1

N8 G9679 Disengage

M30; End of program

100116030/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / de-German

E - 362 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.73 G9600 Wheel selection

 Selection of the grinding wheel and swivelling of the wheelhead to the selected
angle position. Switching on of the grinding wheel and opening of the coolant
valve for the selected grinding wheel.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G9600 Unit Mode a)

H Tool head O

T Tool position

R Tool sub-position O

A Angle of the B-axis Degrees

V Korr. B-axis: Angle Degrees E, O

U Korr. B-axis: diameter difference: mm (inch) E, O

W Korr. B-axis: measured length mm (inch) E, O

Q Open measuring head wheel guard O

M Swivel mode
a) O=Option / E=Expert

H Only when several tool heads

Selection of tool head. This only needs to be programmed if several tool heads are
present (default is H1).

T Selection of tool position.

R Only when internal grinding turret

Tool sub-position E
A If A has not been programmed, then the grinding wheel is swiveled to the set-up
angle.

M M = 0 With grinding wheel and coolant start.

M = 1 Without grinding wheel and coolant start.
M = 2 With grinding wheel and coolant start after swiveling.
The following parameters apply only to wheelheads with a B fine axis (resolu-
tion 0.0001°):

V Direct input of correction angle

U Input of diameter difference from measuring position 1 to 2

W Input of distance of the two measuring points.

A traverse grinding cycle following the G9600 block with angle correction must be
converted into taper traverse grinding cycle. The angle of the grinding wheel will be
taken over if no taper is programmed in the taper traverse grinding cycle.

Q Measuring head wheel guard S242 open = 1 / do not open = 0

100116031/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 363
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

CAUTION!
Wheel Selection G9600
It is important that the wheelhead only be swivelled with this function in the part
program. A correct wheel offset update is guaranteed with this command.
The function G9600 cancels the mode “internal grinding”. If you want again to
grind internal with the same program, it is obligatory to approach again the bore
in G9678!

100116031/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 364 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.74 G9601 Change grinding arbor

Fanuc

This function can be used to change to another grinding mandrel or wheel in an

internal grinding position while machining a workpiece. On machines with only one
internal grinding position, for example, this enables a workpiece with a bore and an
internal thread to be ground in one setup.

Parameter G9601 Unit Mode a)

H Tool head O

T Tool position O

R Tool sub-position

V Wheel program number

M Stop command

X Special retract position X mm (inch)

Z Special retract position Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

T The tool position must match the currently selected grinding wheel.
[T] must be identical to the preceding G9600 [T].

H Is used only if the machine has multiple tool heads.

R Is used only if the machine has an internal grinding spindle turret.

V Program number of the grinding wheel that is to replace the previous one (7000-
7899).
E
M M = 0 The program is stopped, and the door can be unlocked manually (default).

M = 60 The program is stopped and the door is unlocked. Automatic doors are
opened.

100123486/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 365
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.75 G9602 Set actual value for C axis

This function can be used to set the zero point of the C axis. This is necessary when
the workpiece is aligned to a face.

Fanuc The C axis must be referenced beforehand.

CAUTION!
After re-starting the machine, the position is maintained only for high-precision C
axes.

Parameter G9601 Unit Mode a)

C Start angle C-axis Degrees

M Deselection of compensation grinding wheel

1

Q Deselection of compensation grinding wheel

2

R Deselection of compensation grinding wheel

3

S Deselection of compensation grinding wheel

4

T Deselection of compensation tool turret 1 O

U Deselect compensation tool turret 2 O

a) O=Option / E=Expert

M, Q, R, S, T, U These parameters can be used to deselect specific tool positions to which the C
axis position that has been established should not be transferred

100123487/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 366 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.76 G9605 Reprofiling the current grinding wheel

This function can be used to reprofile a grinding wheel during the grinding process.
This function is useful if two or more grinding wheel shapes are required for grinding
a workpiece in one set-up.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G9605 Unit Mode a)

X Profile allowance in X mm (inch)

V Subroutine no. of left contour

W Subroutine no. of right contour

a) O=Option / E=Expert

I Defining the amount by which the grinding wheel should be profiled. Depending on
the leading sign, the grinding wheel can be reset or the profiling begins on the last
diameter.

Positive sign: The grinding wheel is displaced backwards by the

allowance during the first profiling pass.
Negative sign: Profiling starts on the last grinding wheel diameter
and applies the new profile to the grinding wheel.

See also Section B.3.3 “Assign grinding wheel to the wheelhead”

Legend:
A: existing grinding wheel
B: new grinding wheel
C: Profiling cycle

V, W Program number defining the new profile.

Constraint: This function can only be used for grinding wheels with free grinding wheel form
(form 10).

Programming example

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number

G9600 T1 A0 Select grinding wheel 1

G200 Sensitron activation

G9201 X50 Z0 T1 A0.5 B0.15 Grinding 1st diameter

C0.06 Q3 D0.4 E0.2 F0.1

G9605 X0.2 V6101 W6102 Reprofile the grinding wheel to the

two forms, 6101 for the left side and
6102 for the right side
100123487/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 367
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example

G9201 X40 Z24 T1 A0.5 B0.15 Grinding 2nd diameter

C0.06 Q3 D0.4 E0.2 F0.1

G9605 X-0.2 V6001 W6002 Reprofile the grinding wheel to the

original two forms, 6001 for the left
side and 6002 for the right side

G9679 Disengage

M30 End of program with reset

100123487/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 368 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.77 G9606 Pre-profiling of grinding wheels set at an angle

This function is used to pre-profile grinding wheels set at an angle to specific dimen-
sions.

Fanuc
Parameter G9606 Unit Mode a)

A Infeed amount mm (inch)

B Grinding wheel angle Degrees

I Infeed feed value mm/min (inch/min)

J Dressing infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overtravel position in X - mm (inch)

M Overtravel position in X + mm (inch)

S Existing shoulder mm (inch)

W Target shoulder height mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

Move wheel dresser to the front of the grinding wheel corner in manual mode using
dresser. The function will be started from this position.
Programming example function G9606

Programming example G9606

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name)

N1 G9606 A0.02 B30 I50 J200 Dressing the grinding wheel

K3 M3 S4 W15

N2 G9679 Disengage

M30 End of program with reset

100123487/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 369
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.78 G9607 Arbor deflection compensation (option)

This function makes it possible for the arbor deflection to be compensated. The G
function is programmed before the grinding function (grinding cycle, micro function).
The parameters have to be entered according to the following diagram:

Fanuc
Siemens

Single pieces and small series

For the manufacture of single pieces and small series, the correction limit [T] should
be set to 0. As a result of this, all corrections programmed in the G function will be
carried out.

Parameter G9607 Unit Mode a)

A Diameter correction

T Tolerance for correction mm (inch)

X Cylinder error D1 - D2 mm (inch)

Z Measuring distance mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Diameter correction With A=1, after the setting of the arbor deflection a diameter
correction will be carried out. If A=0 the diameter will be not corrected.

T Tolerance for correction. Input must be correct in terms of the +/- sign in relation to
the cylindricity error. As soon as the cylinder error [X] exceeds this value, the arbor
deflection compensation will be carried out and the axis moved.

X Input cylindricity error. Input must be correct in terms of the +/- sign for the D1-D2
guide diameter.
The correction value can be entered directly in the grinding program.

Z Measuring distance on workpiece

100123487/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 370 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.79 G9610 Selection lathe tool (option)

 Selection of the lathe, drilling or milling tools

 Swiveling the turret to the relevant position

Fanuc  Switching on the coolant

 Switching on the drive for power tools such as drilling or milling tools

Parameter G9610 Unit Mode a)

H Tool head

T Tool position of the turret

R Turret position

A Cutting number O

F Tool change speed

E Disengage when turning

X Special retract position X mm (inch)

Y No tool and coolant start E

Z Special retract position Z mm (inch)

S Number of revolutions 1/min

V Subroutine number O, E

W Permit referencing O, E
a) O=Option / E=Expert

H Selection of tool head. E

T Selection of the tool position, on which the turret is mounted.

R The turret position denotes the position on the turret tool where the tool is mounted.

A Up to five cutting edges can be defined and selected for machining on one tool. If A
is not programmed, then cutting edge 1 will be used (Option)

F The turret tool has two swivel speeds. If F is not programmed, or programmed to 0,
the turret swivels slowly; if F1 is programmed, then the turret swivels quickly.

E If it is always possible to disengage without collision using a turning tool, then E=1
can be programmed. If E=0 or E is not programmed, then the machine does not dis-
engage in the case of an error or abort. It must then be manually disengaged.

Y If Y = 1 is programmed, then the tool is swiveled into position but the coolant and
drive are not started.

S In the case of power driven tools, the rotary speed of the tool can be programmed.

V This parameter makes it possible to specify a program number which will be called
the first time the tool is used. With tools of the same group, this makes it possible for
the tool to be calibrated etc. before the first time of use. (Option)

W This parameter can be used to disable the tool revolver referencing. This is used for
extra-long tools.

100123487/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 371
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

NOTE!
An external measurement value can be applied to the turning tool using the fit-
specific corrections.
D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167

E.79.1 Programming example Cycle G9610

N2005 G9610 H1 T1 R5 F1 E0

At turret position 5 using tool head 1 and tool position 1, the tool is exchanged at the
fast swivel speed and cutting edge 1 is selected (Standard).

N2006 G9610 H2 T1 R12 A2 F0 E0

At turret position 12 using tool head 2 and tool position 1, the tool is exchanged with
at slow swivel speed and cutting edge 2 is selected (Standard).

N1001 G9610 H1 T1 R5

The tool on turret position 5, on tool head 1 and in tool position 1 will be changed.
For the following processing, the fit-specific corrections will be activated with this
tool (N1001). This enables an external correction to be applied to the turning tool.

100123487/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 372 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.80 G9611 Turning-tool correction (option)

This function can be used to carry out a trend correction on tools that are in the tool
turret.

Fanuc
Parameter G9611 Unit Mode a)

A Correct after n-parts

H Tool head

T Tool position

R Tool sub-position

B Cutting number O

X X - correction mm (inch)

Z Z - correction mm (inch)
a) O=Option / E=Expert

A After [A] workpieces, the correction [X] or [Z] is calculated.

H, T, R Turning tool or milling cutter for which the correction is to be calculated

B Only when multiple cutting edge option is selected

Correction is calculated for cutting edge [B]

E.81 G9612 Tool working life (option)

This cycle can be used to deduct a percentage of the total working life (100%).
When 0% is reached for a tool, then when this tool is next called, the next sister tool
E
in the tool group is selected or Error 1905 is issued if no sister tool is available.

Fanuc
Siemens The working life can be reset in the turning tool corrections, for example after
changing the cutting plate.
( D.4 "Turning Tool corrections",  D-176)
When setting up a new turning tool the working life is reset to 100%.

Parameter G9612 Unit Mode a)

A Wear and tear %

a) O=Option / E=Expert

100123489/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 373
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.82 G9677 function “automatic restart after closing door” (option)

 G9677 can be used if a you want to stop the program in order to open the sliding
door and automatically continue the program without restarting the cycle after
closing the sliding door.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G9677 Unit Mode a)

A Target address (=set number) for

restart

Q Time slot for automatic restart sec. .

U Subroutine number called by door

opening

V Subroutine number called between

door closing and continuation to tar-
get address
a) O=Option / E=Expert

NOTE!

 In machines with several CNC channels, G9677 may only be programmed in

the first channel.

NOTE!

 If [U] or[ ]V are not programmed, then no subroutine is called

 If [Q] is not programmed, then 15 seconds are automatically set

NOTE!
In order to avoid an autom. restart after closing the sliding door, it is possible to
press the RESET button while the door is open => program will be terminated.

NOTE!
For safety reasons the maximum time between opening and closing the door is
limited to 120 seconds.

Q Time slot for automatic restart

The autom. restart will be only carried out if the door is closed during a fixed time
slot after the program stop.
After expiration of the time slot the program can be continued only by pressing the
cycle start key.

U Subroutine call before opening door

The subroutine can contain the following functions:

 Approaching the initial position
 Retracting the gauge slide if necessary
100116036/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 374 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
 Retracting the coolant nozzle if necessary
 Closing the wheel guard
 Switching off the internal grinding drive if necessary
 Switching off the coolant cycle valve
 Unclamp workpiece if necessary (if prism present)

V Subroutine call between door closing and continuation on the target address.

The subroutine can contain the following functions:

 Clamp workpiece if necessary
 Switch on internal grinding drive if necessary
 Approach coolant nozzle if necessary
 Open wheel guard
 Switch on coolant cycle valve

The above-mentioned functions can also be programmed directly in the main pro-
gram instead of in the subroutines.

E.82.1 Programming cycle G9677

The conditions for a possible opening of the door have to laid either in the cycle
G9677 or in its subroutine U:
 Move to initial position
 Switch off the workpiece drive, internal grinding drives and coolant cycle valves
 Close the external grinding wheel contact guards

After the block address for restart or in the V subroutine, the conditions must be cre-
ated for continuing the program.

100116036/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 375
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.83 G9678 Move to approach position

 Function for approaching a bore and setting the “internal grinding” mode.

Fanuc a)
Siemens Parameter G9678 Unit Mode

X Approach position X mm (inch)

Z Approach position Z mm (inch)

A Interpolated approach 1 = Interpolated

0=Normal

T Wheel reference point pos.1

(T number)
a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.83.1 Programming cycle G9678

 Cycle G9678 activates the “internal grinding” mode .

 The “internal grinding” mode is deselected again with the function

G9600 Select grinding wheel.

G9679 Disengage

deselected again. If the grinding wheel is to grind internally again using the
same program, then it is imperative that the bore be approached once more with
G9678.
 If the interpolated approach is selected, then the same interpolated line is used
to move in and out of the bore. This selection is necessary for grinding inverse
taper (smaller diameter towards the front).
 The selected approach position is used for entering the bore until (using G9678)
the approach position X.... Z.... is newly defined in the program.
 When using more than one internal grinding wheel, the special X/Z approach
positions must be programmed.
 If a turning tool is moved into a bore, then parameter T is ignored.

Fig. E-62 G9678z1.tif

100116038/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 376 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Programming example
Approach using the approach position (point 1)

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to grinding wheel 3 (internal); at

the same time start wheel 3 and cool-
ant for wheel 3.

N2 G9678 X-15 Z10 Move the grinding wheel into the

bore using the approach position.
Select internal grinding.

N4 G9202 X-20. Z-10. T1. A0.5 Plunge with oscillation.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1 I2. J500.

N5 G9679 Retract the grinding wheel from the

bore and move to the “Retract” posi-
tion on the X axis. From now on all
cycles are treated as external grind-
ing cycles until G9678 is pro-
grammed again.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-29 Programming example, G9678

100116038/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 377
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example
Approach using the set up approach position (point 1) and a special
approach position (point 2)

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to grinding wheel 3 (internal); at

the same time start wheel 3 and cool-
ant for wheel 3.

N2 G9678 X-15 Z10 Move the grinding wheel into the

bore via the approach position.
Select internal grinding.

N4 G9202 X-20. Z-10. T1. A0.5 Plunge with oscillation.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1 I2. J500.

G9678 X137 Z5; Move the grinding wheel into the

bore via the new approach position
(point 2). Select internal grinding.

N3 G9201 X135. Z-30. T1. A0.5 Plunge without oscillation. Note the
B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2 sign of the nominal dimension X in
F0.1
accordance with the grinding direction
and position of the grinding wheel
(behind or in front of the centre line of
the workpiece: also see the example on
the previous page).

G9679; Retract the grinding wheel from the

bore using the special approach
position (point 2) and move to the
“Retract” position on the X axis.
Internal grinding has finished. From
now on all cycles are treated as
external grinding cycles until G9678
is programmed again.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-30 Programming example, G9678

100116038/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 378 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.84 G9679 Retract

 Retract Grinding Wheel from the Workpiece to the ”Home”-Position 1 mm in

front of the Software Stop.

Fanuc  Move the Wheel out of the Bore to a special Retract Position.
Siemens

Parameter G9679 Unit Mode a)

B Deactivate end of program 0 = No / 1= Yes

D Disengage when turning 0 = No / 1= Yes O (S242)

X Special retract position X mm (inch)

Z Special retract position Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

B If B1 has been programmed, then after retracting the grinding wheel protection, the
coolant, workhead spindle and grinding wheel are not switched off.

D If a turning tool is to be disengaged, then D=1 must be programmed. If D=0 or D is

not programmed, the machine is not disengaged. It must then be manually disen-
gaged.
Exception: If parameter E=1 is programmed for a turning tool (G9610), then it
always disengages.

X, Z If both parameters are not programmed then the machine retracts to 2 mm in front
of the software limit switch in X. An internal grinding wheel will be switched off.
Parameters [X] and [Z] are used to program a special retract position. Therefore,
this function can also be used to move around an obstacle. The internal grinding
wheel will not be switched off.
E
E.84.1 Programming Cycle G9679

 G9679 will de-select the Internal Grinding Mode. If Internal Grinding is to be

continued, G9678 must be programmed to again select the Internal Grinding
Mode.
 If a Special Retract Position is programmed in Internal Grinding, then the ID-
Wheel moves to this Special Retract Position via the active Bore Approach Posi-
tion. Internal Grinding is deselected.
 An Internal Grinding Wheel is never switched off if a Special Retract Position is
programmed.
 Pushing the <Cycle-stop> button automatically calls and executes cycle G9679.
Parameters [X] and [Z] are ignored. The X axis moves to the retract position, 2
mm in front of the software limit stop. If <Cycle stop> is actuated in an active
turning tool, then it will only disengage if parameter E=1 was programmed for
the turning tool (G9610) in order to prevent the turning tool from colliding with
the workpiece.

100116038/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 379
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.84.2 Programming example grinding cycle G9679

N2004 G9679
External grinding:
The grinding wheel retracts to the return position.
Internal grinding:
The grinding wheel moves to the retract position via the active bore
approach position. External grinding mode is set.

N2004 G9679 X200 Z10

External grinding:
The OD grinding wheel moves first in X to 200mm and then in Z to
10mm.
Internal grinding:
The grinding wheel moves to the special retract position via the
active bore approach position.
The internal grinding wheel will not be switched off. External grinding
mode is set.

WARNING!
Leaving the Bore with G9679
If internal grinding is stopped with the <Reset> key, then it will be necessary to
leave the bore by using cycle G9679 in MDI-mode. If the bore is left in jog-mode
then the machine control does not know that the wheel is no longer inside of the
bore. Dressing, moving the wheelhead to the swivel position e.t.c would still be
carried-out via the bore approach position.

100116038/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 380 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

Programming example
Move to Home-Position without Special Retract Position

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel to wheel 1 (external); at the

same time starting of wheel 1 and
opening of coolant valve for wheel 1.

N2 G9201 X50. Z0. T1. A0.5 Plunge without oscillation.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N3 G9600 T3. A180. Swivel to Wheel 3 (Internal)

N4 G9678 X-15 Z10. Move to bore approach position.

Select internal grinding.

N5 G9202 X-25. Z-10. T1. A0.5 Plunge with oscillation.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1 I2. J500.

N6 G202 A1.5 B1.2 C1. Dressing on switch-over points in cycle

G9201. Approach and withdrawal are
carried out automatically via the posi-
tion registered at set-up.

N7 G9201 X-20. Z-30. T1. A0.5 Plunge without oscillation.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1

N8 G9679 Move grinding wheel out of the bore

via bore approach position and then
to retract position. Internal grinding
has finished. From now on all cycles
are treated as external grinding
cycles until G9678 is programmed
again.
E
M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-31 Programming example, G9679

Move to ”Home”-
Position with Spe-
cial Retract Posi-
tion

100116038/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 381
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Programming example
Retraction with special retraction position

0100 (EXAMPLE) Program number (name).

N3 G9600 T3. A180. Swivel to Wheel 3 (Internal)

N4 G9678 X-15 Z10. Move to bore approach position. Select

internal grinding.

N5 G9202 X-25. Z-10. T1. A0.5 Plunge with oscillation.

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2
F0.1 I2. J500.

N8 G9679 X60. Z10. Move grinding wheel out of the bore

via the active bore approach posi-
tion [X], [Z] and then to the special
retract position. Internal grinding
has finished. From now on all cycles
are treated as external grinding
cycles until G9678 is programmed
again.

N7 G9201 X-20. Z-30. T1. A0.5 Plunge without oscillation on outer

B0.15 C0.06 Q3. D0.4 E0.2 diameter.
F0.1

G9679 Retract to return position.

M30; Program end.

Tab.: E-32 Programming example, G9679

E.85 G9680 Activate customer correction

Fanuc This cycle enables a correction to be defined outside a grinding cycle. The correc-
Siemens tion value or channel of the external measurement value is defined in the fit-specific
corrections. The cycle must have a block number between 1001 and 1032 in order
to appear there.
The correction is valid until the next tool selection or until the next fit-specific correc-
tion is activated.

Parameter G9680 Unit Mode a)

X Correction factor X

Z Correction factor Z

C Correction factor C

F Only read the correction value 0=No / 1= Yes

a) O=Option / E=Expert

100116038/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 382 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.86 G9825 Autom. cylindricity correction (optional)

This cycle enables an automatic cylindricity correction on the tailstock. The correc-
tion value for correcting the tailstock is calculated in relation to the measured length,
the diameter difference and the clamping length.

Fanuc
Siemens
If using post process measurement control, then a tolerance can be specified using
parameter T so that the correction is only carried out if the calculated travel motion
is greater than the tolerance. If T is not programmed, the correction will always be
carried out.

Applications:
 Direct input of the tailstock cylindricity adjustment (zero position)
 Correction using the fit-specific corrections or post-process values.

Parameter G9825 Unit Mode a)

X Cylindricity adjustment

W Clamping length mm (inch)

Z measured length mm (inch)

T Tolerance for correction mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

X The zero setting on the tailstock is programmed using parameter X.

W The clamping length is the length of the whole workpiece.

Z The distance between the two measuring points is indicated by parameter Z

The traversing motion is always carried out in a positive direction. If correcting must E
be carried out in a negative direction, then a certain amount is first overrun and
afterwards fed in a positive direction in order to balance any possible play.

E.86.1 Programming cycle G9825

If the correction has to be entered using fit-specific corrections or if post process

measurement control is being used, then the cycle must be programmed with a
block number between 1001 and 1032. The measuring or clamping length must be
defined so that the fit-specific correction can be applied. The measured length must
be entered with the correct sign, otherwise the correction will be carried out
inverted.
If a specific correction is entered and post process measurement control is being
used, then the corrections will be added.
D.2 "Corrections for specific fits",  D-167

NOTE!
If the calculated correction exceeds the available adjustment range, then an error
message will be displayed.

100116038/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 383
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
E.86.1.1 Programming example grinding cycle G9825

N1001 G9825 X0 W125 Z45 T0.0005

The diameter difference is entered in the corrections to the fit. The travel motion on
the tailstock is only carried out if the calculated travel path on the tailstock is larger
than 0.5µm.

Fig. E-63 corr_partial_cylcorr

N2007 G9825 X0.015 W125 Z45 T0

The diameter difference must be entered with the correct sign for corrections to the
fit.
The tailstock is moved into the starting position (0.015 mm). Parameters W and Z
are not taken into account.

100116038/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 384 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.87 G9826 Open and close NC barrel (option)

The W axis clamping device is set up and moved using the cycle G9826.

Fanuc The function is used internally for setting up or actuating the clamping pedal and
must only be programmed if the clamping conditions in the grinding program need
to be changed.

Parameter G9826 Unit Mode a)

T 0 = Clamping
1 = Opening
2 = Modify clamping force
3 = Write positions

W Position of W axis during registering mm (inch) E

A Open position mm (inch) E

B Minimum clamping position mm (inch) E

C Maximum clamping position mm (inch) E

F Clamping force N (lb) E

a) O=Option / E=Expert

100116038/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 385
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.88 G9862 Coordination of program start (option)

Cycle G9862 is used to start the program required for simultaneous processing in
the desired CNC channel from the program which is running.

Siemens The function must be programmed for simultaneous operation.

Parameter G9862 Unit Mode a)

V Program number

C CNC channel number

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.89 G9863 Coordination of operation sequence /option

Cycle G9863 is used to achieve the cross-channel program coordination required

for simultaneous processing from the program which is currently running.

Siemens
The function must be programmed for simultaneous operation.

Parameter G9863 Unit Mode a)

F 1 = Coordination mark with

forward travel stop
2 = Coordination mark without
forward travel stop
3 = Coordination mark for
End of program

M Coordination mark number

C CNC channel number

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E.90 G9864 Program call (option)

Cycle G9864 is used to call a further subroutine when a program is running

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G9863 Unit Mode a)

V Program number
a) O=Option / E=Expert

100116038/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 386 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.91 MICRO-FUNCTIONS

E.92 Main features

Micro-functions extend the scope of application of today’s Studer CNC machines

significantly. In contrast to the grinding cycles, the functions include a single working
step and can be combined in almost any sequence.

With grinding cycles, the machining sequence is always given as a default from the
start position to the nominal size. The technological constraints can be adapted via
the parameters.

Advantages
 Simple programming
 Current state of the art, known in the market

Disadvantages
 Only functions specified in the grinding cycle can be programmed.
 Special grinding sequences cannot be programmed E

With the micro function, the processing sequence is specified in micro-steps. The
different functions can be combined, and different operation sequences can be pro-
grammed.

Advantages
 Flexible
 Special operation sequences can be programmed

Disadvantages
 More stringent requirements for the operator
 More extensive programming options

100116038/00

10035212 / 01 / de-German © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 387
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
As a side effect the micro-functions have the following additional purposes:
 Transfer of specialized programming expertise from the software specialist to
the experienced operator.
 Reduction of cost and effort for realization and maintenance of customer-spe-
cific programs
 Expansion of Studer CNC machine options

The micro-functions are not designed to

 Compete with current Studer grinding cycles. Most grinding tasks can still be
solved simply and safely and quickly with standard grinding cycles

E.92.1 Operating and programming principles

Workpiece programming with micro functions calls for more in depth knowledge on
the part of the operator or programmer, as the programs become more complex. But
if the operator has had sufficient practice, the micro functions offer a flexible exten-
sion to the regular Studer grinding cycles. Specific grinding problems can be
resolved with greater precision.
In order to keep the programming effort as small as possible, all cycle parameters
are saved globally. This means that once the parameters have been programmed
they will be retained until they are redefined or the program comes to an end.
The advantages of this global data management is explained here using the exam-
ple of the “traverse grinding” function:

Programming without global data management

N2000 G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel grinding wheel to working posi-

tion

N2001 G9700 A0.5 B0 T1 R11 Approach the start position with grind-
W100 X20 Z0.01 ing wheel reference point T1.

N2002 G9702 A0.01 T1 X20 Z0 Approach the workpiece with Sensitron

N2003 G9706 A0.1 D0.02 E0.02 Traverse grinding up to X20.10 (rough

F0.2 J1000 S90 T1 R11 W100 grinding)
X20 Y0 Z0

N2004 G9706 A0.01 D0.008 Traverse grinding up to X20.01 (fine

E0.008 F0.15 J800 S90 T1 R11 grinding)
W100 X20 Y0 Z0

N2005 G9706 A0 D0.004 E0.004 Traverse grinding on X20.00 (fine

F0.1 J600 S90 T1 R11 W100 X20 grinding)
Y0 Z0

N2006 G9703 D0 E0 I4 J600 T1 Spark-out 4 strokes

R11 W100 X20 Y0 Z0

N2007 G9704 A0.5 E0 Lift 0.5mm from workpiece

N2008 G9679 B0 Disengage to retract position

M30 End of program

Without global data retention, the same parameters must be programmed repeat-
edly. This results in the following disadvantages:

 Waste of time

100116038/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 388 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
 Liability to error in connection with corrections

Programming with global data management

N2000 G9600 H1 T1 A0 Swivel grinding wheel to working posi-

tion

N2001 G9700 A0.5 B0 T1 R11 Approach the start position with grind-
W100 X20 Z0.01 ing wheel reference point T1.

N2002 G9702 A0.01 Approach the workpiece with Sensitron

N2003 G9706 A0.1 D0.02 E0.02 Traverse grinding up to X20.10 (rough

F0.2 J1000 grinding)

N2004 G9706 A0.01 D0.008 Traverse grinding up to X20.01 (fine

E0.008 F0.15 J800 grinding)

N2005 G9706 A0 D0.004 E0.004 Traverse grinding on X20.00 (fine

F0.1 J600 grinding)

N2006 G9703 D0 E0 I4 Spark-out 4 strokes

N2007 G9704 A0.5 E0 Lift 0.5mm from workpiece

N2008 G9679 B0 Disengage to retract position

M30 End of program

With the first micro function for starting up the workpiece, the parameters are the
same as in the standard cycle. With further micro functions, only the changes will be
defined, such as the dimensions and any modification of the technology data.

100116038/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 389
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.92.2 The grinding direction principle

Studer CNC machines come with a range of different grinding direction configura-
tions. In many cases the grinding direction has to be changed during machining of a
workpiece, particularly during internal grinding. In order to resolve this problem, the
infeed direction is defined relative to the so-called unit circle.

If no grinding directions are programmed, the directions specified in the machine

configuration are used.
Note:
The grinding wheel is always dressed in the direction in which it is defined.
Constraint:
For machining in angular plunge grinding mode (diameter, shoulder) 85 degrees per
quadrant are permitted in the unit circle.

100116038/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 390 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.93 G9700 Approaching the Start Position

The starting point of a machining operation is approached via this function.

Fanuc The approach strategy is as follows:

Siemens
 Current position in X, >= start position:
The start position is approached first in Z and then in X [ACTUAL_1,
ACTUAL_2].
 Current position in X <= start position:
The start position is approached first in X and then in Z, [ACTUAL_3,
ACTUAL_4]. Obstacles between the current position and the start position can
be programmed with parameter D, so as to bypass them [ACTUAL_4].

In addition to the approach, the future working field is also defined. This is useful
when the next machining operation is to be carried out in angular plunging mode. In
this case the missing component is calculated at start position X or Z and the infeed
angle. The grinding direction can be determined internally by reference to the infeed
angle.

Programmed values Calculated value

Start position X [X]; Infeed angle (S]  Start position Z (Z]

Start position Z [Z]; Infeed angle (S]  Start position X [X]

Start position X [X]; Start position Z [Z]  Infeed angle (S]

Application exam-
ple:

Parameter G9700 Unit Mode a)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Shoulder machining 0 = diameter

1 = shoulder

C Start angle C-axis Degrees

D Bypass diameter mm (inch)

E Retract past start position 0 = diameter

1 = shoulder

F Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

K Overrun position 1 mm (inch)

M Overtravel position 2 mm (inch)

S Infeed angle position 1 Degrees

100116053/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 391
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Parameter G9700 Unit Mode a)

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch)

V Infeed angle position 2 Degrees

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Y Taper angle Degrees

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

E For angular X-axes the approach and departure strategies are basically not carte-
sian. This means that during retracting using G9679 (e.g. cycle stop) a collision can
occur if the grinding wheel is on the left of the workpiece and the wheel contour
touches the workpiece in such a way that it is not possible to retract below the angle
of the angular axis. In order to avoid a possible collision, first make an interpolated
move back to the G9700 start position and then release below the X-axis angle.

NOTE!
Parameter E
This strategy does not work if, for example, the grinding wheel was moved manu-
ally into the above described position, and is then to be released using Cycle
Stop.

Programmed val-  #100 Position value of X axis (absolute)

ues:  #101 Position value of Z axis (absolute)
 #102 position value of C axis (absolute)

100116053/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 392 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.94 G9701 Plunging

This function serves to carry out plunge grinding from the current position up to a
certain measurement.

Fanuc
Siemens

Application exam-
ple:

Parameter G9701 Unit Mode a)

A Remaining allowance mm (inch)

B Cancellation signal ot the measure- O

ment control

F Infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

S Infeed angle position 1 Degrees

T T number position 1
E
X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

B Cancellation signal:

B=4 Changeover point (pre-roughing / roughing)

B=3 Changeover point (roughing/finish grinding)
B=2 Changeover point (finish/super finish grinding)
B=1 Zero signal (nominal size)

If B is not programmed, cancellation signal from of the measurement control will not
be taken into account.

Feedback value:  #100 Position value of X axis (absolute)

 #101 Position value of Z axis (absolute)
 #102 position value of C axis (absolute)
 #103 Position value of X axis (skip position)
 #104 Position value of Z axis (skip position)
 #105 position value of C axis (skip position)

100116054/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 393
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.95 G9702 Approaching the workpiece with Sensitron

This function serves to approach the workpiece from the current position with the
defined speed until the contact-detection signal exceeds the defined limit.

Fanuc
Siemens
Precondition: Sensitron was previously with G200 activated.

Application exam-
ple:

Parameter G9702 Unit Mode a)

A Security position mm (inch)

F Infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

S Infeed angle Degrees

T T number position 1

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A, F If the values are not programmed, the settings/default values for the grinding cycles
will be applied.

Feedback values:  #100 Position value of X axis (absolute)

 #101 Position value of Z axis (absolute)
 #102 position value of C axis (absolute)
 #103 Position value of X axis (skip position)
 #104 Position value of Z axis (skip position)
 #105 position value of C axis (skip position)

100116055/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 394 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.96 G9703 Spark-out

Reduction of the grinding wheel pressure in which the grinding wheel:

Fanuc  Remains at the same place for a defined time (plunge grinding).
Siemens  Carries out a defined number of oscillating movements without an infeed move-
ment taking place.
 Carries out a defined number of travel movements (form grinding / contour
grinding), without an infeed movement taking place.
Application example:

a)
Parameter G9703 Unit Mode

C Spark-out revolutions

D Spark-out contour cycle

E Spark-out to changeover point

H Subroutine number

I Spark-out strokes

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

E
K Overtravel position 1 mm (inch)

M Overtravel position 2 mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time sec.

R T number position 2

T T number position 1

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch)

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Y Taper angle Degrees

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

H This parameter is defined if moving along a contour or shape is required (subroutine

number 6000 - 6999)

Feedback values:  #100 Position value of X axis (absolute)

 #101 Position value of Z axis (absolute)
 #102 position value of C axis (absolute)

100116056/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 395
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.97 G9704 Lifting from the workpiece

The grinding wheel moves away from the workpiece at 180° to the infeed direction
As a result, previously automatically defined values are reset. (e.g. grinding with
measurement control)

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G9704 Unit Mode a)

A Reset Value X/Z mm (inch)

B M Command 1

C M Command 2

D M Command 3

E Retract during machining

F Lifting Speed mm/min (inch/min)

T T number position 1

X Lifting Position X mm (inch)

Z Lifting Position Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A If the reset value is not programmed, then the relevant basic parameter is used

B, C, D M commands which are executed during lifting.

E If lifting takes place during machining (at the switch-over point, before dressing), this
parameter must be set to 1 so that the global data are not reset and travel can con-
tinue from the same point.

F If the lifting speed is not programmed, then lifting will take place at maximum speed.

100116057/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 396 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.98 G9705 Multi Plunging

A workpiece section is machined with multi plunging. The infeed direction for the
first plunge (Position 1) and the final plunge (position 2) can be programmed. The
other plunges are always carried out perpendicular (vertically) to angle Y.

Fanuc
Siemens

Application exam-
ple:

Parameter G9705 Unit Mode a)

A Remaining allowance mm (inch)

B Measurement control cancellation

signal

F Infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

E
J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

Q Spark-out time sec.

S Infeed angle position 1 Degrees

T T number position 2

R T number position 2

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch)

V Infeed angle position 2 Degrees

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Y Taper angle Degrees

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

J If parameter J is not programmed, then the relevant basic parameter will be used.

100116058/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 397
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
Feedback values:  #100 Position value of X axis (absolute)
 #101 Position value of Z axis (absolute)
 #102 position value of C axis (absolute)
 #103 Position value of X axis (skip position)
 #104 Position value of Z axis (skip position)
 #105 position value of C axis (skip position)

100116058/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 398 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.99 G9706 Oscillating Grinding

Machining a workpiece section using oscillating grinding. This function essentially

corresponds to the current longitudinal grinding.

Fanuc
Siemens

Application exam-
ple:

Parameter G9706 Unit Mode a)

A Remaining allowance mm (inch)

B Measurement control cancellation

signal

D Infeed amount at position 1 mm (inch)

E
E Infeed amount at position 2 mm (inch)

F Infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

K Overrun at position 1 mm (inch)

M Overrun at position 2 mm (inch)

Q Spark-out time after infeed stroke sec.

S Infeed angle position 1 Degrees

T T number position 1

R T number position 2

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch)

V Infeed angle position 2 Degrees

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch)

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Y Taper angle Degrees

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

100116059/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 399
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
a) O=Option / E=Expert

Feedback values:  #100 Position value of X axis (absolute)

 #101 Position value of Z axis (absolute)
 #102 position value of C axis (absolute)
 #103 Position value of X axis (skip position)
 #104 Position value of Z axis (skip position)
 #105 position value of C axis (skip position)

100116059/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 400 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.100 G9708 Transition radii

This micro function enables a radius with a vertex (X/Z), the angle of the start tan-
gent (angle 1) and the end tangent (angle 2) to be machined. The start and end
coordinates are calculated in the function using the input parameters.

Fanuc The angle definitions for parameters [I] and [J] must be defined in the unit circle.
Siemens
Parameter G9708 Unit Mode a)

X Drawing coordinates in X mm (inch)

Z Drawing coordinates in Z mm (inch)

A Grinding stock allowance in X mm (inch)

B Type of dimensioning

C Radius mm (inch)

D Grinding wheel radius mm (inch)

E Number of feeds

F Infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

H Type of infeed

I Angle 1 Degrees

J Angle 2 Degrees

T T number position 1
a) O=Option / E=Expert

Parameter description:
E

B Type of dimensioning
B = 0 (or vacant)

Fig. E-64 G9708_Para_B0

100116060/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 401
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
B=2

Fig. E-65 G9708_Para_B2

Programming example

Fig. E-66 G9708_Werkstueck

057 (EXAMPLE);

G9600 A0 T1;

G9708 A0 B2 C1 D0 E6 F.5 H0 I180 J-15 T1;

G9679;

M30;

100116060/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 402 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.101 G9710 Contour grinding

This function makes it possible for any contour defined in an ISO program to be
executed. Programming is carried out directly on the ISO controls or on the external
programming place using StPROFIL.

Fanuc

Application exam-
ple:

Parameter Unit Mode a)

A Remaining allowance mm (inch) E

B Measurement control cancellation sig-
nal

D Infeed amount mm (inch)

F Infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

H SUBROUTINE NUMBER

K Speed factor

M Spark-out time after infeed stroke sec.

S Infeed angle Degrees

T T number position 1

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Y Nominal size Z mm (inch)

Z Infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

100116041/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 403
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

Feedback values:

#100 Position value of X axis (absolute)

#101 Position value of Z axis (absolute)

100116041/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 404 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.102 G9740 Approach thread start position (option)

The function has the following properties:

Fanuc  Approaching the starting position for thread grinding

 Preparation of the subsequent thread grinding functions such as thread plung-
ing (G9741), thread traverse grinding (G9746) and approaching threads with
Sensitron (G9742)
 Afterwards, any number of cycles of G9741 or G9746 can be programmed

Parameter G9740 Unit Mode a)

A Grinding stock allowance mm (inch)

B Thread pitch mm (inch)

C Start angle C-axis Degrees

D Subroutine directory E

F Subroutine file number E

H Thread direction

K Overtravel Z position 1 mm (inch)

M Overtravel Z position 2 mm (inch)

T T number position 1

U Nominal size X position 2 mm (inch)

V Subroutine number Degrees

W Nominal size Z position 2 mm (inch) E

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Y Taper angle Degrees

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

Only the parameters needed for the subsequent operations have to be pro-
grammed.

B If the thread pitch is not programmed, then this is taken from the subroutine [V]

C The C axis position must not be programmed if the thread was previously positioned
using G9261

H Thread direction: H=0 right hand, H=1 left hand.

K In a programmed overtravel position 1, the C axis carries out a compensating move-

ment so that the C axis is at the programmed starting position for nominal size Z

U If parameter [U] is programmed, then parameter [W] must also be programmed so

that the taper angle in the cycle can be calculated

W If traverse grinding is programmed after this, then parameter W must also be pro-
grammed

100116061/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 405
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN
X If the thread diameter is not programmed, this will be read from the subroutine [V]

Y The taper angle is entered as an angle in the unit circle. If parameter Y is pro-
grammed, then parameter U is ignored.

E.102.1 Programming examples, Thread microfunctions, Plunging

Thread plunging Example 1

G9600 T1 A0 H1 Select grinding wheel.

G9740 Z-20 V6000 Approach start position for thread grinding.

A0.1 Only the required parameters are programmed. T7 is set by
the cycle, the thread pitch and diameter are taken from the
subroutine O6000.

G9741 A0.2 B2.2 S5 Thread plunging to 0.2 mm before nominal size, 2.2 rota-
J400 tions to infeed depth, 5 infeeds,
Feed C/Z 400°/min

G9741 D0.02 J350 Thread plunging infeed 0.02 mm,

Feed C/Z 350°/min

G9679 Disengage

M30 End of program

Thread plunging Example 2

G9600 T1 A5 H1 Select grinding wheel.

G9740 Z-20 X20 T7 Approach start position for thread grinding.

V6000 A0.1 B1.25 C30 Start position C axis 30° plus/minus compensating move-
H1 K3 Y-5 ment overtravel 3 mm, taper angle -5°, left hand thread with
1.25 mm pitch

G9742 A0.1 J800 Approach thread using Sensitron to 0.1 mm before nominal
size, feed C/Z 800°/min

G9741 A0.2 B-2.2 S5 Thread plunging to 0.2 mm before nominal size, -2.2 rota-
J400 tions to infeed depth, 5 infeeds,
Feed C/Z 400°/min

G203 Dressing

G9741 A0.05 S2 Grind with two strokes up to 0.05 mm before nominal size

G9741 D0.02 Grind to nominal size with 0.02 mm infeed.

G9741 S1 Spark-out stroke to nominal size

G9679 Disengage

M30 End of program

100116061/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 406 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.102.2 Programming examples thread microfunctions traverse grinding

Thread traverse grinding Example 1

G9600 T1 A0 H1 Select grinding wheel.

G9740 Z-20 V6000 Approach start position for thread grinding.

A0.1 W0 Only the required parameters are programmed. T7 is set by
the cycle, the thread pitch and diameter are taken from the
subroutine O6000.

G9746 A0.2 S5 J5000 Thread traverse grinding to 0.2 mm before nominal size, 5
infeeds, feed C/Z 5000°/min

G9746 D0.02 J350 Thread plunging infeed 0.02 mm, feed C/Z 350°/min

G9679 Disengage

M30 End of program

Thread traverse grinding Example 2

G9600 T1 H1 Select grinding wheel.

G9740 Z-20 X20 T7 Approach start position for thread grinding. T

V6000 A0.1 B1.25 C30
H1 K3 M2

G9742 A0.2 J500 Z-15 Approach thread using Sensitron to 0.2 mm before nominal
size

G9746 A0.3 B1 D0.2 Traverse grinding in both directions to 0.3 mm before nomi-
J4000 nal size with 0.2 mm infeed

G9746 B0 S2 Grind to nominal size with two strokes, only grind in one E
direction

G9746 S1 Carry out a spark-out stroke to nominal size

G9679 Disengage

M30 End of program

100116061/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 407
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.103 G9741 Thread plunging (option)

This function is used to grind a thread with plunge grinding

Fanuc In order to use the cycle, G9740 must be programmed first.

Parameter G9741 Unit Mode a)

A Remaining allowance mm (inch)

B Number of revolutions

D Infeed amount mm (inch)

E Approach angle Degrees

F Retract angle Degrees

J Thread grinding feed C/Z Degrees/min.

S Number of feeds
a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Travel to nominal size plus remaining allowance.

B After each infeed the workpiece spindle rotates by +/- the value defined in parame-
ter B * 360 degrees. If nothing is programmed, then 1.2 revolutions are carried out.

E If the approach angle is not programmed, then the approach is made with 60°.

F If the retract angle is not programmed, then the retract is made with 10°.

S If the number of infeeds is programmed, then parameter D is ignored.

If grinding has already been carried out previously to the nominal size or to the
same allowance (grinding stock allowance), then the number of feeds is executed
as spark-out strokes.
All parameters are active again in the next cycle, but can be changed by reprogram-
ming.

100116062/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 408 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.104 G9742 Approaching threads with Sensitron (option)

This function is used for approaching a pre-machined thread with Sensitron.

The approach position is saved and in the subsequent thread grinding cycle is taken
as grinding allowance.

Fanuc In order to use the cycle, G9740 must be programmed first.

Parameter G9742 Unit Mode a)

A Security position mm (inch)

J Thread grinding feed C/Z Degrees/min.

E Approach angle Degrees

F Retract angle Degrees

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Machining is only carried out to the nominal size plus safety position. This prevents
the thread from becoming too small during approach.

E If the approach angle is not programmed, then the approach is made with 60°.

F If the retract angle is not programmed, then the retract is made with 10°.

Z If the Z start position is not to be approached, then parameter Z can be used to

specify another position. The C axis is automatically positioned at the correct posi-
tion.

100116062/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 409
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.105 G9746 Thread traverse grinding

This function is used to grind a thread with traverse grinding.

Fanuc In order to use the cycle, G9740 must be programmed first so that the working
Siemens space is defined. If this is not done, then an error message is issued.

Parameter G9746 Unit Mode a)

A Remaining size mm (inch)

B Grinding in both directions 0=No / 1= Yes

D Infeed amount mm (inch)

E Approach angle Degrees

F Retract angle Degrees

H Approach without pitch 0=No / 1= Yes

I Retract without pitch 0=No / 1= Yes

J Thread grinding feed C/Z Degrees/min.

K Approach speed factor

M Retract speed factor

S Number of feeds
a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Grind to nominal size plus remaining size. If A is not programmed then grinding to
nominal size is carried out

B If B1 is programmed then grinding takes place in both directions until B0 is pro-

grammed in a subsequent cycle

H, I When approaching/retracting only X/C are interpolated, the Z axis does not travel

K, M When approaching/retracting the thread grinding feed is multiplied by this factor.

S If the number of infeeds is programmed, then parameter D is ignored.

If grinding has previously already been carried out to the nominal size or to the
same allowance, then the number of feeds is executed as spark-out strokes.
All parameters except for S, D and A are active again in the next cycle, but can be
changed by reprogramming.

100116064/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 410 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.106 G9750 Start / Stop Oscillation

This function starts/stops an oscillation movement of the defined axis. During oscil-
lation, no other traversing motions can be programmed for this axis. With Parameter
B = 0 all oscillation movements will be stopped and the oscillation axis moves back
to the starting position.

Fanuc
Siemens

Application exam-
ple:

Fig. E-67 G9750.tif

Parameter G9750 Unit Mode a)

B Axis number 0=OFF / 1= X / 2= Z

I Oscillating stroke mm (inch)

J Oscillating speed mm/min (inch/min)

a) O=Option / E=Expert
E
I The direction of oscillation is defined by the preceding sign.

100116064/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 411
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.107 G9752 Start / Stop workpiece spindle

This is used to start / stop the workpiece spindle. Harmonic oscillations on the sur-
face can also be eliminated if [H] = 1. The speed is then changed to a random value
in the tolerance band [Y] after a time interval [T].

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G9752 Unit Mode a)

S Number of revolutions 1/min

M Sense of rotation

F Peripheral speed m/s

A RPM factor

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

W for the whole workpiece

C Spindle number

H Anti-harmonic

Y Tolerance band 1/min

T Cycle time sec.

B Synchronous function WHS tailstock sec.

on
a) O=Option / E=Expert

S The rotational speed of the workpiece spindle. With synchronous spindles, [B] must
be selected.

M M=3 / M=4. If nothing is defined, the standard direction of rotation is adopted.

F Only when [S] is not defined

The peripheral speed is calculated with [X]

X Only when [S] is not defined

For calculating the rotational speed. When not defined, the current X position is
adopted.

W With [W] = 1, the definition of G9752 remains active until M30 or Reset.

C When not defined [C] = 1

H Enables the function for anti-harmonic speed to be switched on / off.

Y Only if [H] = 1
Refers to the speed [S]. The speed changes randomly within this tolerance band.

T Only if [H] = 1
The speed changes at this time interval within the tolerance band [Y].

100116066/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 412 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

B With [B] = 1, the definitions are implemented on both spindles.

E.108 G9753 Positioning C axis

Travel of the C axis to the programmed position. if the reference point has not yet
been approached, only a reference will be given in advance.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G9753 Unit Mode a)

C Start angle C-axis Degrees

F Positioning speed C-axis Degrees/min.

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

C By contrast with M19, the position is approached in absolute coordinates (all correc-
tions being taken into account). E

100116066/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 413
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.109 G9754 Programmed stop

The machine interrupts processing, moves to the disengagement position and cre-
ates a safety technological status in which the door can be opened. Now e.g. the
workpiece can be measured and a correction carried out. With cycle start, machin-
ing can then be continued.

Fanuc
Application example:

Parameter G9754 Unit Mode a)

S Axis number

T T number position 1

X Special retract position in X mm (inch)

Z Special retract position in Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

X, Z If X and/or Z have not been defined, the grinding wheel travels on the X axis to 2
mm in front of the software limit switch.

100116068/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 414 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING

E.110 G9756 Measurement Control Compensation

In order for the measurement system to be calibrated at the end of the machining
process, function G9756 must be programmed after diameter/shoulder grinding.
This function ensures that the start position always remains the same in relation to
the nominal dimension. The difference between the in-process gauging abort posi-
tion and the programmed nominal dimension is offset.

Fanuc
Siemens Parameter G9756 Unit Mode a)

A COMPENSATION PROCESS 0 = No / 1= Yes E

GAUGING
a) O=Option / E=Expert

A Must be set with applications where the process involves 2 measuring heads (X +
Z).

E.111 G9770 Clamping force regulation

This function can be used to define the clamping force of various clamping devices.

Fanuc
Parameter G9770 Unit Mode a)

A Clamping force N (lb)

B MAGNET FORCE LEVEL

C Clamping force %
a) O=Option / E=Expert
E
A Is used for the W axis S242 (NC barrel),
Input range 0 to 5000 Newton.

B Used for a magnetic chuck with various force levels (Wagner).

Input range 1 - 16.

C Used for hydraulic barrels with proportional valves,

Input range 1 to 100%.

100116068/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 415
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

E.112 G9771 Plunge grinding with measurement control

This cycle can be used to grind a workpiece in the defined infeed direction in the
plunge process with and without measurement control.

Siemens The special feature is the simultaneous measurement-controlled machining of a

diameter and a shoulder.
The workpiece must be ground clean so as to ensure that the plunge angle [S] is
calculated correctly by means of measured values when grinding with measurement
control.
The programmed infeed angle is employed for calculation of the grinding allowance
only.
It is possible to grind only the diameter in measurement-controlled mode, both by
means of angular plunge grinding and at an angle of 90 degrees.

Application exam-
ple:

Parameter G9771 Unit Mode a)

A Allowance in X mm (inch)

F Infeed speed mm/min (inch/min)

R Feed function selection

S Infeed angle position 1 Degrees

T T number position 1

U Function selection - Grinding with

measurement control

X Nominal size X mm (inch)

Z Nominal size Z mm (inch)

a) O=Option / E=Expert

R Feed

R=0 Path feedrate

R=1 X is feed master
R=2 Z is feed master

The necessary feed rate is calculated via trigonometric functions according to the
axis selected for the feed function [R].
The X or Z feed rate remains constant and corresponds to parameter F.

U Function selection:

U=0 Grind diameter and shoulder with measurement

control

100116070/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

E - 416 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / PROGRAMMING
U=1 Grind only diameter with measurement control
U=2 Grind only shoulder with measurement control (not
yet implemented)

Feedback values:  #100 Position value of X axis (absolute)

 #101 Position value of Z axis (absolute)
 #103 Position value of X axis (skip position)
 #104 Position value of Z axis (skip position)

E.113 Special Grinding Wheel Shapes

E.113.1 Programming the special grinding wheel shape

If the desired grinding wheel shape cannot be dressed using the standard grinding
wheel shapes, then the shape can be specially programmed with an ISO program.
This form is only restricted by the geometry of the dessing tool.
To use a free grinding wheel form, when defining the grinding wheel form 10 must
be used.
E.2 "Define workpiece",  E-196
It should be noted that for each specified dressing tool a custom subroutine must be
created.
A combination of standard form and special form for the left and rights sides is a
possible option.

100116072/00

10035212 / 01 / de-German © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 E - 417
PROGRAMMING / STUDERWIN

100116072/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / de-German

E - 418 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTINGS

F Settings

In Settings various definitions, assignments and machine settings can be made.

Depending on the machine options, the “Settings” menu can contain more or less
items:

 Settings of the machine

 Initialization values
 F.1 "Initialization values",  F-420
 PCU function key assignment
 F.2 "PCU Function key assignment",  F-423
 Switch-on timer
 F.3 "Start-up timer",  F-425
 Safety settings
 F.4 "Safety settings",  F-427

 Options editor
 F.5 "Options Editor",  F-428

 Definition of the high frequency spindles

 F.6 "Defining the High-frequency Spindles",  F-429

 Assigning the high-frequency spindle

 F.7 "Assigning the high-frequency spindle",  F-431

 Definition of the clamping devices

 F.8 "Definition of the clamping devices",  F-432

 System backup
 F.9 "System backup",  F-433

Fig. F-1 settings_mainmenu

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 F - 419
SETTINGS / STUDERWIN

F.1 Initialization values

The behavior of the grinding cycles is primarily determined by the grinding cycle
parameters. In order to reduce the number of these parameters and thus simplify
the programming, some of the cycle functions are controlled by these basic values.

Fig. F-2 settings_technology_grind

Retraction amount The grinding wheel is lifted from the workpiece by this amount when the cycle stop
X/Z key is pressed or dressing takes place outwith the grinding cycle.

Overlapping multi- In multi-plunging the wheel moves by the amount of the grinding wheel width minus
plunge the overlap to the next plunge.

Retraction speed This speed is used for lifting during shoulder grinding G9208 and for the micro func-
tion programmed stop G9754.

Radius speed The radius is machined with this speed for the shoulder grinding G9208.
[O9208]

Infeed speed The infeed amount is carried out with this speed in the length and transverse grind-
ing cycles.

Z speed Multi- Moving to the next plunge is carried out with this speed for multi-plunging G9205
plunging and G9705.

Spark-out revolu- The number of spark-out revolutions defines the minimum number of revolutions the
tions workpiece still makes if the grinding wheel is at the nominal dimension.

Inching speed The workpiece turns with this rotational speed when the E9 key on the PCU is
pressed  A.9 "Description of the control elements",  A-18

100116073/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

F - 420 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTINGS

Fig. F-3 settings_technology_balancing

Balancing active Enables balancing to be activated / deactivated.

Balance after time After the grinding wheel has been started via Start Screen > Energies, the imbal-
when starting ance is rechecked after this time and if necessary balancing is carried out with the
grinding wheel next wheel selection. This time is executed repeatedly until for the first time no
imbalance is detected, then the time “Balance after time” starts to run.

BALANCING BY Can be edited only by the operator, and is only visible when balancing with Hydro-
TIME balance.

Balancing before Enables balancing to be enforced before, alternatively after, the dressing operation.
dressing
Balancing after
dressing
F

100116073/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 F - 421
SETTINGS / STUDERWIN

Fig. F-4 settings_technology_aux

Search path The length positioning probe has to react within this search path, otherwise the error
message 1606 is displayed.

Search speed This is the speed at which positioning i.e. measurement takes place with the length
positioning probe.

Positioning speed This is the speed with which the shoulder or diameter is approached.

Retraction dis- After positioning, the probe lifts up by this amount in order to measure with search
tance speed.

Safety position X/Z If grinding is being carried on with Sensitron, the machine switches over in all cases
in this position before the nominal size to the programmed feed.
This prevents the grinding wheel from traveling at the approach speed up to the
nominal dimension and the workpiece from possibly being damaged.

Approach speed X/ The workpiece is moved to the relevant axis at this speed, until the Sensitron signal
Z/C switches over to the grinding feed.

Sensitivity If parameter B is not programmed in the cycle G200, then this value is imported as a
base.

Pick-up channel If parameters A or D are not programmed, then this channel is activated in the cycle
number G200.

Search path Within this search path, when length positioning with Sensitron, the Sensitron must
react otherwise the error message 1566 is displayed.

Undersize When grinding with activated in-process measurement control, the grinding wheel
moves to a maximum of this value below the nominal size of the cycle. If no zero
signal is received from the measurement control, then the error message 1656 is
displayed.

100116073/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

F - 422 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTINGS

F.2 PCU Function key assignment

M commands can be assigned to the function keys on the PCU (Process Control
Unit). This enables machine functions to be activated directly using the PCU key-
board Particularly when machine functions are required frequently, it is a good idea
to assign these to a function key.
Various configurations can be stored. This enables a quick assignment of com-
mands e.g. for machine or loader commands.
If a command is changed and the Input / Enter key pressed, then the command is
stored and the cursor jumps to the next command.

Fig. F-5 settings_pcu

Main menu Back to “Settings” main page

F
Open Opening a stored configuration:

Fig. F-6 settings_pcu_open

The configuration to be opened can be selected from the list of saved configura-
tions. The relevant M commands are displayed in the overview

100116073/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 F - 423
SETTINGS / STUDERWIN
Save Saves a modified configuration under the current name.

Previous The cursor jumps to the previous M command.

Next The cursor jumps to the next M command.

Display com- An overview of the M commands is displayed:

mands

Save as The current configuration can be saved under another name.

100116073/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

F - 424 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTINGS

F.3 Start-up timer

Every tool machine only reaches thermal stability after a certain operating period. In
order for the machine to be thermally stable from the start of operation it can be
started automatically using the start-up timer.
The program to be started needs to be programmed by the operator. The required
movements and functions can be executed continuously using the appropriate pro-
gramming.
The date and time for starting the machine as well as the program required should
be entered here.

Fig. F-7 settings_timer

Main menu Back to “Settings” main page

F
Standby Power supplies are switched off.
The machine is now in the rest position. It will switch on again at the selected time
and will then work off the defined program.

Set Start The time entered is set as the switch-on time. A machine with an automatic loading
system cannot be switched off using the “Standby” Softkey in certain circumstances,
because the machine is meant to keep running. After production has finished, in
order to switch off the energies despite this, this can be programmed with the M
command M601.

Stopping the The start-up timer is disabled.

start-up timer

100116073/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 F - 425
SETTINGS / STUDERWIN

F.3.1 Program

Attention must be paid to the following points so that the program runs correctly:
 End of program with M99
 Check to make sure that no collision can occur.
 Start the grinding wheel drive and open the coolant valve. This ensures that the
machine is thermally stable.
 Check that the power supplies can be switched on in such a way that no errors
arise (without RESET button). If, after switching on the power supplies, an error
message arises which has to be deleted using RESET, then it is not possible to
start a program.

The choice of commands for programming can be selected as required. It is recom-

mended that the X and Z axes are moved in this program.

CAUTION!
Do not start any program which has not previously been checked!

NOTE!
The warm-up program is not started if power is not switched off when the switch-
on time is reached.

100116073/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

F - 426 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTINGS

F.4 Safety settings

The safety settings can be used to restrict access to various operating functions.
The access level is principally influenced by the position of the key switches AUX
and EDIT.

Access level 0: Both key switches are in position 0

Access level 1: The AUX key switch is in position 1
Access level 2: The EDIT key switch is in position 1
The following access privileges can be granted:

Basic Operator: Basic functions for the production of parts. These comprise cycle start and correc-
tions but no program modifications.

Basic Basic functions for the programming of machining programs and definition of tools.
Programming

Basic Setup Basic functions for set-up of the machine.

Advanced Extended operating functions, like settings and program corrections.

Operator:

Advanced Extended programming functionality, like modification of default values.

Programming:

Advanced Setup: Extended set-up functions.

Maintenance: Functions for diagnosis and setting of machine options.

Fig. F-8 settings_security

Main menu Back to “Settings” main page

Save Saves the changes

100116073/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 F - 427
SETTINGS / STUDERWIN

F.5 Options Editor

The Options Editor serves for the management of machine options.

CAUTION!
Changing the machine options can result in erratic behavior of the machine.
Machine options should therefore only be changed by properly trained mainte-
nance staff.

Fig. F-9 settings_options

Close Back to “Settings” main page

Search Searches for a term in the machine configuration.

Set all: Resets all machine options.

NOTE!
After setting the machine options, the machine needs to be set up again.

Set object: Sets only the selected machine option.

Edit:

Fig. F-10 settings_options_sk2

Restore original Restores the machine’s factory settings as at time of delivery.

state:

Modify Modifies a selected machine option. This function is only available to service per-
sonnel.

100116073/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

F - 428 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTINGS

F.6 Defining the High-frequency Spindles

This is where the high-frequency spindles for dressing and internal grinding are
defined. As a machine is often supplied with more than one spindle, several spin-
dles can be defined. The mounted spindle must then be assigned under “Assigning
high frequency spindles” in the “Settings” menu, so that the frequency converter dis-
plays the correct data for the spindle such as frequency, current or voltage.

The following data must be defined:

 Spindle type
 Spindle manufacturer
 Max. rpm
 Run-up time
 Braking time
 Nominal current
 Characteristic data
 Number of poles
 Lubrication system

The data should be taken from the spindle datasheet or obtained from the manufac-
turer.
In order to edit a spindle configuration, the appropriate file on the left must be
selected.

Fig. F-11 settings_spindle_def

Main menu Back to “Settings” main page

New Creating a new internal grinding spindle.

New Creating a new dressing spindle.

100116073/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 F - 429
SETTINGS / STUDERWIN
Save Saves the entries

Delete Deletes the selected spindle definition

100116073/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

F - 430 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTINGS

F.7 Assigning the high-frequency spindle

In order to be able to work with a mounted spindle, the machine has to be informed
which spindle is currently mounted.

Fig. F-12 settings_spindle_assing

Main menu Back to “Settings” main page

Data Sets only the selected machine option.

Update:

Assign In order to assign a spindle to a grinding head position, the relevant position must
be highlighted (yellow bar). After pressing the “Assign” softkey, the following window
opens:
F

Fig. F-13 settings_spindle_open

The mounted spindle can be selected from the list and assigned using “OK”.

Delete Deletes the spindle assignment.

Define: This softkey is used to call the menu  F.6 "Defining the High-frequency Spindles",
 F-429.
100116073/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 F - 431
SETTINGS / STUDERWIN

F.8 Definition of the clamping devices

Definition of the clamping devices is used in order to define automatic and super-
vised clamping devices.

CAUTION!
The definition or modification of the clamping device configurations can lead to
erratic behavior of the machine. The configurations should therefore only be
changed by properly trained personnel.

The configuration to be changed can be selected in the list on the left. When setting
up, the configuration can be assigned to the workhead or the tailstock.

Fig. F-14 settings_clamp_def

Close Back to “Settings” main page

New Creating a new clamping device configuration.

When creating from new, templates can be used. The number in front of the tem-
plate file corresponds to the number in the picture in front of the clamping-device
icon.

Description: A detailed description can be entered for the clamping device.

Save Saves the selected configuration.

Copy Copies the selected configuration and opens it as a new configuration.

Delete Delete configuration.

100116080/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

F - 432 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / SETTINGS

F.9 System backup

With system backup you can create a complete data backup of all customer data
and machine configurations.

NOTE!
It is advisable to create a data backup from time to time, to avoid complete loss of
data in case of failure of the control systems.

Fig. F-15 backup_selectdir

For data backup the “StuderWIN Backup Tool” should be used. As a first step, you
must specify the place where the data backup is to be saved. Create an empty
folder for the data backup to be saved to. Give the folder a clear name, e.g. the date
of the backup.
Now hit the [OK] key to create the backup.

Fig. F-16 backup_finish

Hit the [OK] key again to complete and exit the backup tool.
100116080/00

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 F - 433
SETTINGS / STUDERWIN

100116080/00

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

F - 434 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / DIAGNOSIS

G Diagnosis

The diagnosis area serves for the display of error messages and status information
about individual machine components.

 Messages from CNC and PMC/PLC  G.1 "Messages",  G-436

 Status screens (see SDE Electrics service documentation).
 Status of the machine configuration
 Analysis tool for checking the machine configuration
 Read of CNC and PMC variables

Fig. G-1 diag_mainmenu

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 G - 435
DIAGNOSIS / STUDERWIN

G.1 Messages

The messages screen displays all messages of the CNC and PMC/PLC which have
been received by the controls. These include the following message types:

 Error messages (red): These messages prevent a program start and must be
dealt with before putting the machine into operation.

 Information messages (green): These messages give status information about

the machine.

 Confirmation messages: These messages call for confirmation by the operator

(“Confirm” softkey).

Fig. G-2 diag_messages

Close Back to “Diagnosis” main page

Update data Updates the messages.

Help Displays online operating instructions for the selected message.

More information This shows additional information related to the selected message.

Confirm Confirm a message.

Delete PS Deletes system error 100 “Parameter can be overwritten” (only for Fanuc control
Alarm 100 system).

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

G - 436 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

H M commands / B/H commands for machine

M and B/H commands can be programmed to initiate machine functions. These

commands are explained in detail here.

H.1 Index of all M and B/H commands

Acknowledgement: coolant collector tank empty M610

Activate custom output 1 M611
Activate custom output 2 M612
Activate custom output 3 M613
Activate custom output 4 M614
Activate servo off after M5 M708
Activating balancing channel 1 M201
Activating balancing channel 2 M203
All grinding drives and dressing drives off M130
All head wheel guards 1-3 closed M149
Axes in tool change position B27
C-axis active M358
C-axis inactive M359
C-axis to free-reeling mode M640
Clamp finished part gripper, handling station 00 M852
Clamp power clamping device C2 [MDI] M382
Clamp power clamping device C2 [MEM] M392
Clamp raw part gripper, handling station 00 M850
Clamp workpiece on grinding machine, handling station 02 M854
Close 'retract' window B50
Close window 'dressing using key' B35
Close window 'reverse using key' B39
Control measurement M505
Coolant 7 off M585
Coolant 7 on M584
Coolant 8 off M583
Coolant 8 on M582
Coolant nozzle move-in M27
Coolant nozzle retract M28
Coolant pressure circuit 1 off M647
Coolant pressure circuit 1 on M646
Coolant pressure circuit 2 off M649
Coolant pressure circuit 2 on M648
Coolant system off M605
Coolant system on M604
Coolant valve off / channel 1 M191
Coolant valve off / channel 10 M660
Coolant valve off / channel 11 M661
Coolant valve off / channel 12 M662 H
Coolant valve off / channel 13 M663
Coolant valve off / channel 14 M664
Coolant valve off / channel 15 M665
Coolant valve off / channel 16 M666
Coolant valve off / channel 17 M667

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 437
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

Coolant valve off / channel 18 M668

Coolant valve off / channel 19 M669
Coolant valve off / channel 2 M192
Coolant valve off / channel 20 M680
Coolant valve off / channel 21 M681
Coolant valve off / channel 22 M682
Coolant valve off / channel 23 M683
Coolant valve off / channel 24 M684
Coolant valve off / channel 25 M685
Coolant valve off / channel 26 M686
Coolant valve off / channel 27 M687
Coolant valve off / channel 28 M688
Coolant valve off / channel 29 M689
Coolant valve off / channel 3 M193
Coolant valve off / channel 30 M695
Coolant valve off / channel 31 M696
Coolant valve off / channel 32 M697
Coolant valve off / channel 4 M194
Coolant valve off / channel 5 M195
Coolant valve off / channel 6 M196
Coolant valve off / channel 9 M164
Coolant valve on / channel 1 M151
Coolant valve on / channel 10 M650
Coolant valve on / channel 11 M651
Coolant valve on / channel 12 M652
Coolant valve on / channel 13 M653
Coolant valve on / channel 14 M654
Coolant valve on / channel 15 M655
Coolant valve on / channel 16 M656
Coolant valve on / channel 17 M657
Coolant valve on / channel 18 M658
Coolant valve on / channel 19 M659
Coolant valve on / channel 2 M152
Coolant valve on / channel 20 M670
Coolant valve on / channel 21 M671
Coolant valve on / channel 22 M672
Coolant valve on / channel 23 M673
Coolant valve on / channel 24 M674
Coolant valve on / channel 25 M675
Coolant valve on / channel 26 M676
Coolant valve on / channel 27 M677
Coolant valve on / channel 28 M678
Coolant valve on / channel 29 M679
Coolant valve on / channel 3 M153
Coolant valve on / channel 30 M690
Coolant valve on / channel 31 M691
Coolant valve on / channel 32 M692
Coolant valve on / channel 4 M154
Coolant valve on / channel 5 M161
Coolant valve on / channel 6 M162
Coolant valve on / channel 9 M163
Coolant valves 1-32 off M159
Coolant volume control valve 1 B20
Coolant volume control valve 2 B21

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 438 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

Coolant volume control valve 3 B22

Coolant volume control valve 4 B23
Cycle stop if no acknowledgement B130
Cycle stop if no workpiece detected M370
Cycle stop if no workpiece detected 2 M371
Cycle stop if no workpiece recognized (check until M30 / Reset) M380
Cycle stop if no workpiece recognized (check until M30 / Reset) 2 M381
De-activating balancing channel 1 M200
De-activating balancing channel 2 M202
Deactivate custom output 1 M621
Deactivate custom output 2 M622
Deactivate custom output 3 M623
Deactivate custom output 4 M624
Deactivate measurement head wheelguard locking B151
Divisor 10 for feed override switch M782
Dresser 1 retract M581
Dresser 1 swivel-in M580
Dresser 1+2 retract M596
Dresser 2 retract M595
Dresser 2 swivel-in M594
Dresser drive, power off 1 M593
Dresser drive, power off 2 M589
Dresser drive, power off 3 M579
Dresser drive, power on 1 M591
Dresser drive, power on 2 M588
Dresser drive, power on 3 M578
Enclosure hatch/door closed M609
Enclosure hatch/door open M608
End of program w/o reset M2
End of program with reset M30
End of subroutine M99
External grinding 1 head 1 off; (Drive 1 H1OD1) M131
External grinding 1 head 1 on; (Drive 1 H1OD1) M121
External grinding 1 head 2 off; (Drive 15 H2OD1) M150
External grinding 1 head 2 on; (Drive 15 H2OD1) M140
External grinding 1 head 3 off; (Drive 24 H3OD1) M331
External grinding 1 head 3 on; (Drive 24 H3OD1) M321
External grinding 2 head 1 off; (Drive 2 H1OD2) M132
External grinding 2 head 1 on; (Drive 2 H1OD2) M122
External grinding 2 head 2 off; (Drive 16 H2OD2) M170
External grinding 2 head 2 on; (Drive 16 H2OD2) M160
External grinding 2 head 3 off; (Drive 25 H3OD2) M332
External grinding 2 head 3 on; (Drive 25 H3OD2) M322
External grinding 3 head 1 off; (Drive 6 H1OD3) M133
External grinding 3 head 1 on; (Drive 6 H1OD3) M123
External grinding 3 head 2 off; (Drive 17 H2OD3) M190
External grinding 3 head 2 on; (Drive 17 H2OD3) M180
External grinding 3 head 3 off; (Drive 26 H3OD3) M333
External grinding 3 head 3 on; (Drive 26 H3OD3) M323 H
Gauge slide 1 approach M466
Gauge slide 1 retract M468
Gauge slide 2 approach M464
Gauge slide 2 retract M465
Gauge slide 3 / lp-activ 1 approach M469

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 439
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

Gauge slide 3 / lp-activ 1 retract M470

Gauge slide 4 / lp-activ 2 approach M501
Gauge slide 4 / lp-activ 2 retract M502
Grinding-cycle finished B11
Holding force for clamping device, level 0-15 (max. 15) B78
Home position, handling station 03 M857
Home position, handling station 04 M859
Home position, handling station 05 M861
Home position, handling station 06 M863
Home position, handling station 07 M865
Home position, handling station 08 M867
Home position, handling station 09 M869
Home position, handling station 10 M871
Home position, handling station 11 M873
Home position, handling station 12 M875
Home position, handling station 13 M877
Home position, handling station 14 M879
Home position, handling station 15 M881
Home position, handling station 16 M883
Home position, handling station 17 M885
Home position, handling station 18 M887
Home position, handling station 19 M889
Home position, handling station 20 M891
Home position, handling station 21 M893
Home position, handling station 22 M895
Hydraulic steady approach M356
Hydraulic steady retract M357
Hydraulics and power on M600
Hydraulics off M601
Inbalance-check balancing channel 1 M197
Inbalance-check balancing channel 2 M199
Internal grinding 1 head 1 off; (Drive 3 H1ID1) M134
Internal grinding 1 head 1 on; (Drive 3 H1ID1) M124
Internal grinding 1 head 2 off; (Drive 18 H2ID1) M184
Internal grinding 1 head 2 on; (Drive 18 H2ID1) M144
Internal grinding 1 head 3 off; (Drive 27 H3ID1) M334
Internal grinding 1 head 3 on; (Drive 27 H3ID1) M324
Internal grinding 2 head 1 off; (Drive 7 H1ID2) M135
Internal grinding 2 head 1 on; (Drive 7 H1ID2) M125
Internal grinding 2 head 2 off; (Drive 19 H2ID2) M185
Internal grinding 2 head 2 on; (Drive 19 H2ID2) M145
Internal grinding 2 head 3 off; (Drive 28 H3ID2) M335
Internal grinding 2 head 3 on; (Drive 28 H3ID2) M325
Internal grinding 3 head 1 off; (Drive 8 H1ID3) M136
Internal grinding 3 head 1 on; (Drive 8 H1ID3) M126
Internal grinding 3 head 2 off; (Drive 20 H2ID3) M186
Internal grinding 3 head 2 on; (Drive 20 H2ID3) M146
Internal grinding 3 head 3 off; (Drive 29 H3ID3) M336
Internal grinding 3 head 3 on; (Drive 29 H3ID3) M326
Internal grinding 4 head 1 off; (Drive 10 H1ID4) M137
Internal grinding 4 head 1 on; (Drive 10 H1ID4) M127
Internal grinding 4 head 2 off; (Drive 21 H2ID4) M187
Internal grinding 4 head 2 on; (Drive 21 H2ID4) M147
Internal grinding 4 head 3 off; (Drive 30 H3ID4) M337

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 440 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

Internal grinding 4 head 3 on; (Drive 30 H3ID4) M327

Internal grinding 5 head 1 off; (Drive 11 H1ID5) M138
Internal grinding 5 head 1 on; (Drive 11 H1ID5) M128
Internal grinding 5 head 2 off; (Drive 22 H2ID5) M188
Internal grinding 5 head 2 on; (Drive 22 H2ID5) M168
Internal grinding 5 head 3 off; (Drive 31 H3ID5) M338
Internal grinding 5 head 3 on; (Drive 31 H3ID5) M328
Internal grinding 6 head 1 off; (Drive 12 H1ID6) M139
Internal grinding 6 head 1 on; (Drive 12 H1ID6) M129
Internal grinding 6 head 2 off; (Drive 23 H2ID6) M189
Internal grinding 6 head 2 on; (Drive 23 H2ID6) M169
Internal grinding 6 head 3 off; (Drive 32 H3ID6) M339
Internal grinding 6 head 3 on; (Drive 32 H3ID6) M329
Ip-gauge zeroing M483
Ipg system E39 activate M500
Keep servo on after M5 M709
Lift ISS tool turret M107
Lift selected gauge probe M472
Logging workpiece data: new batch M804
Lower ISS tool turret M108
Lower selected gauge probe M471
Machine outside collision range 1 B32
Machine outside combined collision range B8
Measuring head wheel guard, output {AMES-A} in working position M760
Measuring head wheel guard, output {AMES-R} in home position M761
Modified position of sliding door M63
Move back gauge slide 5 M503
Move into home position 12 M722
Move into home position 13 M723
Move into home position 14 M724
Move into home position 15 M725
Move into working position 12 M712
Move into working position 13 M713
Move into working position 14 M714
Move into working position 15 M715
Move out gauge slide 5 M504
Move steady rest 2 back / Clamp [MDI] M386
Move steady rest 2 back / Clamp [MEM] M376
Move steady rest 2 out/ Release [MDI] M387
Move steady rest 3 back / Clamp [MDI] M406
Move steady rest 3 back / Clamp [MEM] M396
Move steady rest 3 out/ Release [MDI] M407
Move steady rest back / Clamp [MDI] M366
Move steady rest out/ Release [MDI] M367
Move steady rest out/ Release [MEM] M377
Move steady rest out/ Release [MEM] M397
Normal operation for feed override switch M783
Oil-mist lubrication off M603
Oil-mist lubrication on M602 H
Open 'retract' window B49
Open window 'dressing using key' B34
Open window 'reverse using key' B38
Opening the wheel guards on the head 1 M141
Opening the wheel guards on the head 2 M142

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 441
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

Opening the wheel guards on the head 3 M143

Optional stop M1
Partially open measuring head wheel guard M762
Programmed stop M0
Read lp-passive value off M489
Read lp-passive value on M488
Read passive-value and transmit to CNC M476
Red. position value for measuring head wheelguard B145
Release power clamping device C2 [MEM] M393
Release power clamping device C2 [MDI] M383
Request actual correction value M510
Roller drive, power off M598
Roller drive, power on M597
Sliding door close M61
Sliding door open M60
Sliding door partial open M62
Sliding door, activate M64
Sliding door, de-activate M65
Spindle 3 (tool drive) clockwise rotation M33
Spindle 3 (tool drive) counterclockwise rotation M34
Spindle 3 (tool drive) stop M35
Subroutine call without parameter M98
Switch off CS contour mode M767
Switch off swarf conveyor M765
Switch on CS contour mode M766
Switch on swarf conveyor M764
Synchronous function workhead spindle RS off M645
Synchronous function workhead spindle RS on M644
Tailstock close [MDI] M364
Tailstock close [MEM] M374
Tailstock open [MDI] M365
Tailstock open [MEM] M375
Tailstock partial open [MDI] M361
Thermal machine stabilisation off M607
Thermal machine stabilisation on M606
Tray flushing coolant valve off M167
Tray flushing coolant valve on M166
Unclamp finished part gripper, handling station 00 M853
Unclamp raw part gripper, handling station 00 M851
Unclamp workpiece on grinding machine, handling station 02 M855
Wheel-drives to safety-rpm M120
Wheelhead lift/release M100
Wheelhead lower/clamp M101
Workhead Q-axis clamp M11
Workhead Q-axis release M10
Workhead spindle ccw M4
Workhead spindle cw M3
Workhead spindle positioned M19
Workhead spindle stop M5
Working position, handling station 03 M856
Working position, handling station 04 M858
Working position, handling station 05 M860
Working position, handling station 06 M862
Working position, handling station 07 M864

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 442 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

Working position, handling station 08 M866

Working position, handling station 09 M868
Working position, handling station 10 M870
Working position, handling station 11 M872
Working position, handling station 12 M874
Working position, handling station 13 M876
Working position, handling station 14 M878
Working position, handling station 15 M880
Working position, handling station 16 M882
Working position, handling station 17 M884
Working position, handling station 18 M886
Working position, handling station 19 M888
Working position, handling station 20 M890
Working position, handling station 21 M892
Working position, handling station 22 M894
Workpiece clamp [MDI] M362
Workpiece clamp [MEM] M372
Workpiece counter +1 M51
Workpiece counter reset M52
Workpiece feed: call HS18 with read-in stop M810
Workpiece feed: call HS18 without read-in stop M811
Workpiece feed: call HS5 with read-in stop M806
Workpiece feed: call HS5 without read-in stop M807
Workpiece is scrap B12
Workpiece spindle 2 clockwise rotation M13
Workpiece spindle 2 counterclockwise rotation M14
Workpiece spindle 2 stop M15
Workpiece unclamp [MDI] M363
Workpiece unclamp [MEM] M373

H.2 M-Commands

M0 Programmed stop
The program currently running will be stopped. The program is not terminated. If the
cycle is started again the program will be run from this point.
(Cycle interrupt key is M00)

M1 Optional stop
=> See M00\
However the M1 ACTIVE key must be selected.

M2 End of program w/o reset

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 443
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M3 Workhead spindle cw
The workhead spindle will be started. The Rpm's are defined with an S parameter.
=> Example: M3 S200 (rpm 200).
M5 and M30 will stop the workhead spindle.
The spindle speed is limited to 30 rpm when the doors are open. M03 turns the work
spindle in clockwise direction, as seen from the workhead looking in the direction of
the tailstock. Make sure to switch the Workhead Spindle off (M5) before inserting
the M4 command.

If there are several spindles on the machine (synchronous spindle, powered turning
tools etc.) then function M3 can be used to select the following as well:
=> M3 S = rpm H = spindle number to be started B = synchronous mode on
(1) / off (0)

M4 Workhead spindle ccw

There is an option to disable this function (Message 1716)
=> see M03 and M30

M5 Workhead spindle stop

The workhead spindle will be stopped.
The program is not halted while the workhead spindle is slowed down.

If there are several spindles on the machine (synchronous spindle, powered turning
tools etc.) then function M5 can be used to select the following as well:
=> M5 H = spindle number to be stopped

M10 Workhead Q-axis release

Use cycle G9500 instead of this command.

M11 Workhead Q-axis clamp

Use cycle G9500 instead of this command.

M13 Workpiece spindle 2 clockwise rotation

Workpiece spindle 2 is started. Use Sxxx H2 instead of M13 = M3 (for spindle 2)

M14 Workpiece spindle 2 counterclockwise rotation

Workpiece spindle 2 is started. Use Sxxx H2 instead of M14 = M4 (for spindle 2)

M15 Workpiece spindle 2 stop

Workpiece spindle 2 is stopped. Use H2 instead of M15 = M5 (for spindle 2)

M19 Workhead spindle positioned

(This function cannot be defined on a PCU function key.)nThe workpiece spindle is
positioned on a reference point. M19 can be started with rotating or stationary spin-
dle. The program is stopped during this procedure.
=> see Ch. D.6.18 Circumferential positioning of workhead spindle M19

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 444 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M27 Coolant nozzle move-in

The front hydraulic coolant nozzle is moved into the working position. The coolant is
not switched on. This can be programmed along with a traverse command (simulta-
neous retracting and traversing).
=> Example G00 X150 Z50 M27;

M28 Coolant nozzle retract

The front hydraulic coolant nozzle is moved out. The coolant is switched off. Can be
programmed along with a traverse command (simultaneous retracting and travers-
ing).

M30 End of program with reset

The workpiece program is finished and prepared for a new start. The workhead
spindle is stopped.

M33 Spindle 3 (tool drive) clockwise rotation

The tool drive C3 is started. Use Sxxxx H3 instead of M33 = M3 (for spindle 3).

M34 Spindle 3 (tool drive) counterclockwise rotation

The tool drive C3 is started. Use Sxxxx H3 instead of M34 = M4 (for spindle 3).

M35 Spindle 3 (tool drive) stop

The workpiece drive C3 is stopped. Use H3 instead of M35 = M5 (for spindle 3).

M51 Workpiece counter +1

The external workpiece counter is increased by one. PMC Output {AZAELI}. The
Fanuc workpiece counter can be defined using parameter #6700.

M52 Workpiece counter reset

The external workpiece counter is set to zero. PMC output {AZAELR}.

M60 Sliding door open

The automatic operating doors are unlocked and opened. If no tool drive is running
then the maintenance doors are also unlocked. This is identical to the "Release
doors" key.

M61 Sliding door close

The automatic operating doors are closed and locked.

M62 Sliding door partial open

The automatic operating doors are unlocked and partially opened. If no tool drive is
running then the maintenance doors are also unlocked.

M63 Modified position of sliding door H

Move open operating doors manually to the desired partially open position, then
confirm this position with M63.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 445
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M64 Sliding door, activate

The automatic operating doors are activated and can be controlled using M com-
mands.

M65 Sliding door, de-activate

The automatic operating doors are deactivated and can be operated manually.

M98 Subroutine call without parameter

This code is used to transfer to a subroutine.

M99 End of subroutine

This code indicates the end of the subroutine. M99 returns control to the main pro-
gram.

M100 Wheelhead lift/release

The wheelhead is lifted.
Use cycle G9600 instead of this command. (selection of grinding wheel).

M101 Wheelhead lower/clamp

The wheelhead is lowered.
Use cycle G9600 instead of this command. (grinding wheel selection).

M107 Lift ISS tool turret

M108 Lower ISS tool turret

The grinding drive is switched on when the start-up conditions are met. During
acceleration the workpiece program is stopped at the first movement which is not a
rapid traverse. Start-up conditions for a grinding tool are:
the doors are closed
the control system, hydraulics and emergency stop circuit are operational
the grinding head is lowered.

M120 Wheel-drives to safety-rpm

Rotating outer grinding tools with frequency converter are slowed down to the spec-
ified safety speed.

M121 External grinding 1 head 1 on; (Drive 1 H1OD1)

The grinding drive is switched on when the start-up conditions are met. During
acceleration the workpiece program is stopped at the first movement which is not a
rapid traverse.
Start-up conditions for a grinding tool are:
the doors are closed
the control system, hydraulics and emergency stop circuit are operational
the grinding head is lowered.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 446 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M122 External grinding 2 head 1 on; (Drive 2 H1OD2)

see M121

M123 External grinding 3 head 1 on; (Drive 6 H1OD3)

see M121

M124 Internal grinding 1 head 1 on; (Drive 3 H1ID1)

see M121

M125 Internal grinding 2 head 1 on; (Drive 7 H1ID2)

see M121

M126 Internal grinding 3 head 1 on; (Drive 8 H1ID3)

see M121

M127 Internal grinding 4 head 1 on; (Drive 10 H1ID4)

see M121

M128 Internal grinding 5 head 1 on; (Drive 11 H1ID5)

see M121

M129 Internal grinding 6 head 1 on; (Drive 12 H1ID6)

see M121

M130 All grinding drives and dressing drives off

M131 External grinding 1 head 1 off; (Drive 1 H1OD1)

M132 External grinding 2 head 1 off; (Drive 2 H1OD2)

M133 External grinding 3 head 1 off; (Drive 6 H1OD3)

M134 Internal grinding 1 head 1 off; (Drive 3 H1ID1)

M135 Internal grinding 2 head 1 off; (Drive 7 H1ID2)

M136 Internal grinding 3 head 1 off; (Drive 8 H1ID3)

H
M137 Internal grinding 4 head 1 off; (Drive 10 H1ID4)

M138 Internal grinding 5 head 1 off; (Drive 11 H1ID5)

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 447
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M139 Internal grinding 6 head 1 off; (Drive 12 H1ID6)

M140 External grinding 1 head 2 on; (Drive 15 H2OD1)

see M121

M141 Opening the wheel guards on the head 1

M142 Opening the wheel guards on the head 2

M143 Opening the wheel guards on the head 3

M144 Internal grinding 1 head 2 on; (Drive 18 H2ID1)

M145 Internal grinding 2 head 2 on; (Drive 19 H2ID2)

M146 Internal grinding 3 head 2 on; (Drive 20 H2ID3)

M147 Internal grinding 4 head 2 on; (Drive 21 H2ID4)

M149 All head wheel guards 1-3 closed

M150 External grinding 1 head 2 off; (Drive 15 H2OD1)

M151 Coolant valve on / channel 1

As long as the start-up conditions are not fulfilled the command remains stored and
as soon as they are met it is executed. If the operating doors are open then the
accept key has to be pressed and the M command carried out again. A coolant noz-
zle will be moved into position automatically beforehand if available.

M152 Coolant valve on / channel 2

=> see M151

M153 Coolant valve on / channel 3

=> see M151

M154 Coolant valve on / channel 4

=> see M151

M159 Coolant valves 1-32 off

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 448 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M160 External grinding 2 head 2 on; (Drive 16 H2OD2)

see M121

M161 Coolant valve on / channel 5

=> see M151

M162 Coolant valve on / channel 6

=> see M151

M163 Coolant valve on / channel 9

=> see M151

M164 Coolant valve off / channel 9

=> see M151

M166 Tray flushing coolant valve on

M167 Tray flushing coolant valve off

M168 Internal grinding 5 head 2 on; (Drive 22 H2ID5)

see M121

M169 Internal grinding 6 head 2 on; (Drive 23 H2ID6)

see M121

M170 External grinding 2 head 2 off; (Drive 16 H2OD2)

M180 External grinding 3 head 2 on; (Drive 17 H2OD3)

M184 Internal grinding 1 head 2 off; (Drive 18 H2ID1)

M185 Internal grinding 2 head 2 off; (Drive 19 H2ID2)

M186 Internal grinding 3 head 2 off; (Drive 20 H2ID3)

M187 Internal grinding 4 head 2 off; (Drive 21 H2ID4)

H
M188 Internal grinding 5 head 2 off; (Drive 22 H2ID5)

M189 Internal grinding 6 head 2 off; (Drive 23 H2ID6)

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 449
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M190 External grinding 3 head 2 off; (Drive 17 H2OD3)

M191 Coolant valve off / channel 1

M192 Coolant valve off / channel 2

M193 Coolant valve off / channel 3

M194 Coolant valve off / channel 4

M195 Coolant valve off / channel 5

M196 Coolant valve off / channel 6

M197 Inbalance-check balancing channel 1

Stops read-in to check imbalance of the assigned grinding wheel, followed where
necessary by a balancing operation.
Only for maintenance work.
For grinding heads with more than one external grinding spindle in particular, the
command G9334 must be used.

M199 Inbalance-check balancing channel 2

=> see M197

M200 De-activating balancing channel 1

Balancing channel messages are ignored and a potential balancing request from
the balancing channel is suppressed.
There is therefore no balancing during the initial acceleration of the assigned grind-
ing wheel.

M201 Activating balancing channel 1

The balancing channel which was deactivated using M200 is enabled again.

M202 De-activating balancing channel 2

=> see M200

M203 Activating balancing channel 2

=> see M201

M321 External grinding 1 head 3 on; (Drive 24 H3OD1)

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 450 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M322 External grinding 2 head 3 on; (Drive 25 H3OD2)

M323 External grinding 3 head 3 on; (Drive 26 H3OD3)

M324 Internal grinding 1 head 3 on; (Drive 27 H3ID1)

M325 Internal grinding 2 head 3 on; (Drive 28 H3ID2)

M326 Internal grinding 3 head 3 on; (Drive 29 H3ID3)

M327 Internal grinding 4 head 3 on; (Drive 30 H3ID4)

M328 Internal grinding 5 head 3 on; (Drive 31 H3ID5)

M329 Internal grinding 6 head 3 on; (Drive 32 H3ID6)

M331 External grinding 1 head 3 off; (Drive 24 H3OD1)

M332 External grinding 2 head 3 off; (Drive 25 H3OD2)

M333 External grinding 3 head 3 off; (Drive 26 H3OD3)

M334 Internal grinding 1 head 3 off; (Drive 27 H3ID1)

M335 Internal grinding 2 head 3 off; (Drive 28 H3ID2)

M336 Internal grinding 3 head 3 off; (Drive 29 H3ID3)

M337 Internal grinding 4 head 3 off; (Drive 30 H3ID4)

M338 Internal grinding 5 head 3 off; (Drive 31 H3ID5)

H
M339 Internal grinding 6 head 3 off; (Drive 32 H3ID6)

M356 Hydraulic steady approach

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 451
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M357 Hydraulic steady retract

M358 C-axis active

Corresponds to an M5 command except that the ISO program is halted during
deceleration. The C axis can then be moved based on a software command.

M359 C-axis inactive

M361 Tailstock partial open [MDI]

M362 Workpiece clamp [MDI]

M363 Workpiece unclamp [MDI]

M364 Tailstock close [MDI]

M365 Tailstock open [MDI]

M366 Move steady rest back / Clamp [MDI]

M367 Move steady rest out/ Release [MDI]

M370 Cycle stop if no workpiece detected

M371 Cycle stop if no workpiece detected 2

M372 Workpiece clamp [MEM]

M373 Workpiece unclamp [MEM]

M374 Tailstock close [MEM]

M375 Tailstock open [MEM]

M376 Move steady rest 2 back / Clamp [MEM]

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 452 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M377 Move steady rest out/ Release [MEM]

M380 Cycle stop if no workpiece recognized (check until M30 / Reset)

M381 Cycle stop if no workpiece recognized (check until M30 / Reset) 2

M382 Clamp power clamping device C2 [MDI]

M383 Release power clamping device C2 [MDI]

M386 Move steady rest 2 back / Clamp [MDI]

M387 Move steady rest 2 out/ Release [MDI]

M392 Clamp power clamping device C2 [MEM]

M393 Release power clamping device C2 [MEM]

M396 Move steady rest 3 back / Clamp [MEM]

M397 Move steady rest out/ Release [MEM]

M406 Move steady rest 3 back / Clamp [MDI]

M407 Move steady rest 3 out/ Release [MDI]

M464 Gauge slide 2 approach

The measuring probes are lifted and the gauge slide moved into position. Using
M465 or RESET the gauge slide will move out again.
With integrated measurement control the measurement is activated with the gauge
slide in position.\ nUse function G204 or G205 instead of this command.\ nIf there is
a coolant nozzle, this must first be moved back. If there is a loader, this must be out-
side the collision range.

H
M465 Gauge slide 2 retract
The measuring probes are lifted while moving out.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 453
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M466 Gauge slide 1 approach

The measuring probes are lifted and the gauge slide moved into position. Using
M468 or RESET the gauge slide will approach again.
With integrated measurement control the measurement is activated with the gauge
slide in position.\ nUse function G204 or G205 instead of this command.\ nIf there is
a coolant nozzle, this must first be moved back. If there is a loader, this must be out-
side the collision range.

M468 Gauge slide 1 retract

The measuring probes are lifted while moving out.

M469 Gauge slide 3 / lp-activ 1 approach

The arm of the active length positioning probe is swiveled into the measuring posi-
tion.
Use function G206 instead of this command.

M470 Gauge slide 3 / lp-activ 1 retract

The arm of the active length positioning probe is swiveled back into the home posi-
tion again.

M471 Lower selected gauge probe

The gauge slide must be moved back.
Use function G200 or G205 instead of this command.

M472 Lift selected gauge probe

The gauge slide must be moved back.
Use function G200 or G205 instead of this command.

M476 Read passive-value and transmit to CNC

Single transfer.
Use cycle G205 for length positioning passive and G208 for postprocess applica-
tions instead of this command.

M483 Ip-gauge zeroing

Function selection before M500 so that the selected measuring probe is adjusted to
zero as soon as the measuring probes are lowered.
Use function G204 or G205 instead of this command.

M488 Read lp-passive value on

Continuous transfer for set-up.
Use function G204 or G205 instead of this command.

M489 Read lp-passive value off

M500 Ipg system E39 activate

Use function G204 or G205 instead of this command

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 454 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M501 Gauge slide 4 / lp-activ 2 approach

The arm of the second active length positioning probe is swiveled into the measur-
ing position.
Use function G206 instead of this command.

M502 Gauge slide 4 / lp-activ 2 retract

The arm of the second active length positioning probe is swiveled back into the
home position again.

M503 Move back gauge slide 5

M504 Move out gauge slide 5

M505 Control measurement

Selection of measuring function before M500 for checking "measurement too large"
or "too small".
Use function G204 or G205 instead of this command.

M510 Request actual correction value

Only for systems with postprocess gauging with trend correction.
The actual correction is requested for the next grinding cycle from the postprocess
measuring device.

M578 Dresser drive, power on 3

M579 Dresser drive, power off 3

M580 Dresser 1 swivel-in

M581 Dresser 1 retract

M582 Coolant 8 on

M583 Coolant 8 off

M584 Coolant 7 on

H
M585 Coolant 7 off

M588 Dresser drive, power on 2

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 455
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M589 Dresser drive, power off 2

M591 Dresser drive, power on 1

M593 Dresser drive, power off 1

M594 Dresser 2 swivel-in

M595 Dresser 2 retract

M596 Dresser 1+2 retract

M597 Roller drive, power on

M598 Roller drive, power off

M600 Hydraulics and power on

The hydraulics can be switched on using M600 as soon as the control system is
ready and there is no emergency stop signal present.
Identical to "Power on" key.

M601 Hydraulics off

The hydraulic system is switched off.

M602 Oil-mist lubrication on

The oil-mist extraction system for the internal grinding spindle is switched on.

M603 Oil-mist lubrication off

The oil-mist extraction system for the internal grinding spindle is switched off.

M604 Coolant system on

The coolant supply system or the main valve are switched on.

M605 Coolant system off

The coolant supply system or the main valve and all coolant valves are switched off.

M606 Thermal machine stabilisation on

After switching on the machine or after M606 the valve for the machine temperature
control is automatically deactivated i.e. as soon as the coolant supply system is
switched on and a grinding drive is running the valve is switched on and switched off
again.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 456 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M607 Thermal machine stabilisation off

Automatic switching on or off of machine temperature control is suppressed.
=> see M606

M608 Enclosure hatch/door open

M609 Enclosure hatch/door closed

M610 Acknowledgement: coolant collector tank empty

M611 Activate custom output 1

Custom output 1 (AAUX_1), defined in machine schematics sheet 989, is switched
on.

M612 Activate custom output 2

Custom output 2 (AAUX_2), defined in machine schematics sheet 989, is switched
on.

M613 Activate custom output 3

Custom output 3 (AAUX_3), defined in machine schematics sheet 989, is switched
on.

M614 Activate custom output 4

Custom output 4 (AAUX_4), defined in machine schematics sheet 989, is switched
on.

M621 Deactivate custom output 1

Custom output 1 (AAUX_1), defined in machine schematics sheet 989, is switched
on.

M622 Deactivate custom output 2

Custom output 2 (AAUX_2), defined in machine schematics sheet 989, is switched
off.

M623 Deactivate custom output 3

Custom output 3 (AAUX_3), defined in machine schematics sheet 989, is switched
off.

M624 Deactivate custom output 4

Custom output 4 (AAUX_4), defined in machine schematics sheet 989, is switched
off.
H
M640 C-axis to free-reeling mode
The C axis or work spindle is switched to free-wheeling mode when the doors are
closed.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 457
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M644 Synchronous function workhead spindle RS on

M645 Synchronous function workhead spindle RS off

M646 Coolant pressure circuit 1 on

M647 Coolant pressure circuit 1 off

M648 Coolant pressure circuit 2 on

M649 Coolant pressure circuit 2 off

M650 Coolant valve on / channel 10

M651 Coolant valve on / channel 11

M652 Coolant valve on / channel 12

M653 Coolant valve on / channel 13

M654 Coolant valve on / channel 14

M655 Coolant valve on / channel 15

M656 Coolant valve on / channel 16

M657 Coolant valve on / channel 17

M658 Coolant valve on / channel 18

M659 Coolant valve on / channel 19

M660 Coolant valve off / channel 10

M661 Coolant valve off / channel 11

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 458 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M662 Coolant valve off / channel 12

M663 Coolant valve off / channel 13

M664 Coolant valve off / channel 14

M665 Coolant valve off / channel 15

M666 Coolant valve off / channel 16

M667 Coolant valve off / channel 17

M668 Coolant valve off / channel 18

M669 Coolant valve off / channel 19

M670 Coolant valve on / channel 20

M671 Coolant valve on / channel 21

M672 Coolant valve on / channel 22

M673 Coolant valve on / channel 23

M674 Coolant valve on / channel 24

M675 Coolant valve on / channel 25

M676 Coolant valve on / channel 26

M677 Coolant valve on / channel 27

H
M678 Coolant valve on / channel 28

M679 Coolant valve on / channel 29

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 459
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M680 Coolant valve off / channel 20

M681 Coolant valve off / channel 21

M682 Coolant valve off / channel 22

M683 Coolant valve off / channel 23

M684 Coolant valve off / channel 24

M685 Coolant valve off / channel 25

M686 Coolant valve off / channel 26

M687 Coolant valve off / channel 27

M688 Coolant valve off / channel 28

M689 Coolant valve off / channel 29

M690 Coolant valve on / channel 30

M691 Coolant valve on / channel 31

M692 Coolant valve on / channel 32

M695 Coolant valve off / channel 30

M696 Coolant valve off / channel 31

M697 Coolant valve off / channel 32

M708 Activate servo off after M5

M709 Keep servo on after M5

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 460 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M712 Move into working position 12

M713 Move into working position 13

M714 Move into working position 14

M715 Move into working position 15

M722 Move into home position 12

M723 Move into home position 13

M724 Move into home position 14

M725 Move into home position 15

M760 Measuring head wheel guard, output {AMES-A} in working position

The measuring head wheel guard closes when the traversing conditions have been
met.

M761 Measuring head wheel guard, output {AMES-R} in home position

The measuring head wheel guard opens when the traversing conditions have been
met.

M762 Partially open measuring head wheel guard

The measuring head wheel guard moves into the restricted opening position when
the traversing conditions have been met. The position (in mm) can be set using
B145.xxxx.

M764 Switch on swarf conveyor

The chip conveyor system is switched on.

M765 Switch off swarf conveyor

The chip conveyor system is switched off.

M766 Switch on CS contour mode

The workpiece spindles C1 and C2 are switched into axis mode (feed control)
H
M767 Switch off CS contour mode
The workpiece spindles C1 C2 are switched into spindle mode (speed control)

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 461
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M782 Divisor 10 for feed override switch

The feed override switch responds in the rapid traverse (G0) in 0.1% step sizes

M783 Normal operation for feed override switch

The feed override switch responds in the rapid traverse (G0) in 1% step sizes

M804 Logging workpiece data: new batch

M806 Workpiece feed: call HS5 with read-in stop

M807 Workpiece feed: call HS5 without read-in stop

M810 Workpiece feed: call HS18 with read-in stop

M811 Workpiece feed: call HS18 without read-in stop

M850 Clamp raw part gripper, handling station 00

M851 Unclamp raw part gripper, handling station 00

M852 Clamp finished part gripper, handling station 00

M853 Unclamp finished part gripper, handling station 00

M854 Clamp workpiece on grinding machine, handling station 02

M855 Unclamp workpiece on grinding machine, handling station 02

M856 Working position, handling station 03

M857 Home position, handling station 03

M858 Working position, handling station 04

M859 Home position, handling station 04

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 462 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

M860 Working position, handling station 05

M861 Home position, handling station 05

M862 Working position, handling station 06

M863 Home position, handling station 06

M864 Working position, handling station 07

M865 Home position, handling station 07

M866 Working position, handling station 08

M867 Home position, handling station 08

M868 Working position, handling station 09

M869 Home position, handling station 09

M870 Working position, handling station 10

M871 Home position, handling station 10

M872 Working position, handling station 11

M873 Home position, handling station 11

M874 Working position, handling station 12

M875 Home position, handling station 12

H
M876 Working position, handling station 13

M877 Home position, handling station 13

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 463
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

M878 Working position, handling station 14

M879 Home position, handling station 14

M880 Working position, handling station 15

M881 Home position, handling station 15

M882 Working position, handling station 16

M883 Home position, handling station 16

M884 Working position, handling station 17

M885 Home position, handling station 17

M886 Working position, handling station 18

M887 Home position, handling station 18

M888 Working position, handling station 19

M889 Home position, handling station 19

M890 Working position, handling station 20

M891 Home position, handling station 20

M892 Working position, handling station 21

M893 Home position, handling station 21

M894 Working position, handling station 22

M895 Home position, handling station 22

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 464 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHI-

H.3 B/H-Commands

B8 Machine outside combined collision range

B11 Grinding-cycle finished

B12 Workpiece is scrap

B20 Coolant volume control valve 1

The coolant volume can be defined in the program as follows:

 N40 B20.0050; => Valve 50% open

 N40 B20.0080; => Valve 80% open

B20 is only activated if the coolant volume setting is not selected using the PCU
handwheel.

B21 Coolant volume control valve 2

B22 Coolant volume control valve 3

B23 Coolant volume control valve 4

B27 Axes in tool change position

An X or B axis movement disables tool change release.

B32 Machine outside collision range 1

B34 Open window 'dressing using key'

B35 Close window 'dressing using key'

B38 Open window 'reverse using key'

B39 Close window 'reverse using key'

H
B49 Open 'retract' window

B50 Close 'retract' window

Acknowledgement - retract program started.

10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG

Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 H - 465
M COMMANDS / B/H COMMANDS FOR MACHINE /

B78 Holding force for clamping device, level 0-15 (max. 15)
The magnetic clamping devices equipped with this function can set the holding
force in 16 steps.\ nB78.0000 smallest level\.nB78.0015 largest level
Use function G9770 in the program.

B130 Cycle stop if no acknowledgement

B145 Red. position value for measuring head wheelguard

B151 Deactivate measurement head wheelguard locking

If a traversing condition is not fulfilled, this can be enabled using B151 for G6211. If,
for example, with the gauge slide moved back the wheel guard needs to be moved
(for a following gauge slide), the traversing conditions can be enabled using
B151.0004. This release only applies to the cycle G6211 and not to the M command
to open or close the wheel guards.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

H - 466 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

I Messages

I.1 Studer Messages

XXXX ELEMENT IDENTIFIER IN STUDER ELECTROHYDRAULIC, COOLANT AND

PNEUMATIC DIAGRAMS

1500 Error: Emergency stop active

Emergency stop circuit is interrupted

 Contact switch actuated

 An axis limit switch has been actuated
 An element in the emergency stop circuit has been actuated (=> see electric
diagram, sheet 50)

Correction:

 Release emergency stop switch

 check the elements in the emergency stop circuit

1501 Error: Lasermeasurement out of toleranz

Cause:

 The diameter measurement with the laser has only produced values which are
outwith the programmed tolerance.

Correction:

 Reduce approach speed

 Select measurement type "Exact measurement"
 Increase tolerance.

1502 Error: Air-pressure too low

The pressure switch in the pneumatics circuit did not respond:

 Insufficient air pressure

 Compressed air valve not triggered
 Pressure switch not actuated (switch faulty, broken cable)

Correction:

 Switch on air pressure

 Check pressure switch and cable

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 467
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1503 Error: Grinding wheel must be turning

Cause:
A command was entered which requires a rotating grinding wheel, e.g.:

 Turn on the coolant

Correction:

 Switch on the grinding wheel

1504 Error: Switch coolant system on

You have entered a command which requires coolant, e.g.:

 Switch on the Coolant for a Grinding Wheel

 Switch on the Coolant for a Dressing Tool
 Start-up an ID-Spindle
 Start-up of a Grinding Wheel with Auto-Balancer DITTEL
 No coolant temperature stabilization valve

1505 Error: Drain coolant tank => confirm with command M610
The oil/water mix needs to be emptied.
Cause:

 After operating the water spray extinguishing system, the grinding oil is contam-
inated with water.

Correction:

 Cleaning the collection tank

 confirm by pressing M610 (operating mode MDI)

1506 Message: Wheel-spindle drive being accelerated 1

The grinding wheel drive has not yet reached the nominal RPM.
Effect:

 the CNC Program will be stopped at the first movement which is not at rapid
speed

1507 Message: Wheel-spindle drive being accelerated 2

=> see message 1506

1508 Message: Wheel-spindle drive being accelerated 3

=> see message 1506

1509 Message: Wheel-spindle drive being accelerated 4

=> see message 1506

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 468 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1510 Error: Ref.point not yet approached X

The CNC axis reference points have not yet been approached.
Effect:

 Cycle start not possible

 The CNC axes cannot be moved at rapid speed

Correction:

 Select REF and cycle start

1511 Error: Ref.point not yet approached Z

=> see message 1510

1512 Error: Ref.point not yet approached B

=> see message 1510

1513 Message: C-axis free running

Cause:

 the C axis was switched to free running using M640

 M708 was programmed, after M5 the C axis is freewheeling

Correcton:

 the C axis is switched to normal operation using M3, M19, M358 or the jog key

1514 Message: Temperature hydraulic too high

The hydraulic oil thermoswitch has been activated
Cause:

 Hydraulic oil temperature too high

 Cooling incorrect
 too little oil in the tank

Correction:

 refill oil
 check cooling system

1515 Message: Prealarm hydraulic unit

The Pressure Switch after the Filter or the Differential Pressure Switch before the
Filter has triggered.

 Filter dirty

The hydraulic oil radiator has an error:

 Temperature too high

 Protective motor switch

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 469
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1516 Error: No hydraulic pressure

The hydraulic pressure switch (general hydraulics or B axis hydraulics) has not
responded.
Cause:

 too little hydraulic oil

 pressure release open

Correction:

 Check the monitoring system

 Refill oil
 close pressure release

1517 Error: Temperature in operating panel too high

The temperature switch in the control cabinet is activated.
Cause:

 Temperature too high

 Switch faulty (cable break)

1518 Error: Temperature in electrical cabinet is too high

The temperature switch in the equipment cabinet is activated.
Cause:

 Temperature too high

 Switch faulty (cable break)

1519 Error: Overcurrent detected on wheel-spindle motor number 1

The overcurrent monitor on the grinding wheel drive is activated.
Cause:

 Infeed speed was too fast

 General drive fault

Correction:

 Reduce infeed speed

 Check grinding wheel drive

1520 Error: Overcurrent detected on wheel-spindle motor number 2

=> see message 1519

1521 Error: Overcurrent detected on wheel-spindle motor number 3

=> see message 1519

1522 Error: Drive dressing tool not ready 2

The dressing tool drive signals an error.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 470 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1523 Error: Sensitron could not be activated

The Sensitron could not be activated.
Cause:

 Sensitron is not connected

 Fault in Sensitron
 Sensitron microfuse is faulty
 Cable break

Correction:

 Check Sensitron for correct installation

 Change microfuse

1524 Message: lack of pieces in supply

Cause:

 there are no more parts on the part feed

 the monitoring system is not correctly adjusted and does not recognize the parts

Correction:

 place parts on feed

 adjust monitoring system so that the parts are recognized

1525 Error: Acceptance button actuated for more than three minutes
Cause:

 the accept key was pressed for more than 3 minutes

Correction:

 Release accept key and press again

1526 Message: Protection door not closed or not locked

The contact protection doors (sliding doors) are open.
Effect:

 Program start is prevented

 Grinding drive start is prevented

Correction:

 Close contact protection doors

1527 Message: Maintenance/loader door not closed

One of the Maintenance Doors is not closed
=> see also message 1526

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 471
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1528 Error: Coolant for dressing tool missing

The flow controller has responded.
Cause:

 Not enough coolant

 Hose leak
 Fault in coolant system
 Flow controller faulty (cable break)

Correction:

 Increase quantity of coolant (nozzle)

 Check the coolant system

1529 Error: Replace filter fleece roll

Cause:

 The coolant system is low on coolant fleece roll.

 The switch on the coolant fleece roll is faulty (cable break)

Correction:

 Replace the coolant fleece roll

 Check the switch and cable and replace if necessary

1530 Error: Error tailstock barrel position CH1

A fault has occurred with the tailstock barrel.
Cause:

 The end position could not be reached (jammed)

 The limit stop switch did not respond (faulty switch, cable break)
 the tailstock is not correctly set up

Correction:

 Check the tailstock

 Reset if necessary

1531 Error: No workpiece detected

The workpiece presence monitor could not detect a workpiece.
Cause:

 Workpiece not correctly positioned

 Workpiece is too small
 Driver not engaged
 No workpiece is present
 Workpiece monitor is faulty

Correction:

 Load workpiece correctly

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 472 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1532 Error: Error spindle-oil cooler

A Fault has occured in the Spindle Oil Cooling Unit

1533 Error: Spindle-oil for grinding spindle missing

The spindle oil flow controller responded.
Cause:

 Not enough spindle oil

 Hose leak
 Faulty switch / cable break

Correction:

 Increase quantity of spindle oil

 Check cable

1534 Error: Error hinged dressing tool 1

Explanation:

 An error has occurred in the swiveling dressing tool.

Cause:

 Plug not correctly connected

 the end position could not be reached (jammed)
 the limit stop switch did not respond (faulty switch, cable break)
 Referencing is only allowed in idle position.

Correction:

 Check plug
 mechanical check of the swiveling mechanism
 Move the swiveling mechanism to the rest position

1535 Error: Invalid M-command

Cause:

 the programmed M command is not available (Options). e.g. automatic dressing

device is not connected.

1536 Error: Error tool-guard number 1

A fault has occurred in the grinding wheel tool guard.
Cause:

 the end position could not be reached

 the limit stop switch did not respond (faulty switch, cable break, not correctly
adjusted)
 Faulty valve
 Option has been deselected and monitoring functions have not been set to logic
1.
 the tool guard is mechanically obstructed

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 473
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1537 Error: Error tool-guard number 2

=> see message 1536

1538 Error: Error tool-guard number 3

=> see message 1536

1539 Error: Error tool-guard number 4

=> see message 1536

1540 Error: Studer options not set

The Studer options are not set.
Cause:

 the PMC was reloaded

 "Delete memory completely" was executed (<reset>+<delete>)
 a "Delete RAM module in the PMC" was executed (<x>+<o>)

If the programs were deleted, then the Studer cycles, the machine parameters and
the options file must be reloaded into the control system from the machine floppy
disks. The floppy disks can be found in the electrical cabinet.
Afterwards the options can be set in the set-up dialogue (=> see Operating Instruc-
tions). If controlled clamping devices are in the machine these must be saved again.
After setting the options the control system must be switched off and then switched
on again.

1541 Message: Servo shut down

The drives are without power.
Cause:

 The operation doors or maintenance doors are open

 The accept key is not activated

Correction:

 Close the operation or maintenance doors

 Press the accept key

1542 Message: Cnc-axes ready

The servo drives are power-up (=> see also message 1541)

1543 Message: Incorrect workpiece rpm

Cause:

 The RPM monitor detected a wrong workpiece spindle speed.

Correction:

 Switch off the RPM monitor using M631

 Check min. RPM on the monitoring device
 Check initiator for RPM detection

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 474 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1544 Message: Workpiece correctly clamped

Monitoring of the active Clamping Device signals that the Workpiece is correctly
clamped.

1545 Error: Incorrect clamping device CH2

The active clamping device (channel 2,3,4 or 5) is either not correctly clamped or
not correctly released.
Cause:

 Faulty initiator
 the permitted clamping time was exceeded

Correction:

 clamp or release correctly

1546 Message: Rotation no. 19 detected

The internal grinding tool changer is plugged into the machine.

1547 Error: Error rotation no. 19

The current tool storage position number does not correspond with the desired posi-
tion.
Cause:

 The magazine was turned manually or a position monitoring initiator is faulty.

Correction:

 Set the disk to the correct position

 read in the options again.
 Manually load the CURRENT value from the PMC counter no. 14 with the cur-
rent disk position

1548 Error: Loader movement must not be executed, lock is active

The current number of the tool storage position does not correspond with the
desired position.
Cause:

 The conditions defined in the Options program for carrying out the active move-
ment have not been met.

Correction:

 Check the active movement in the easyLoad status screen.

 Check the end position of the movement

1549 Error: Emergency stop of position switch on axis 5

Cause:

 the software limit switch has been overrun.

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 475
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1550 Error: Emergency stop of position switch on axis X

Cause:

 the software limit switch has been overrun.

1551 Error: Emergency stop of position switch on axis Z

Cause:

 the software limit switch has been overrun.

1552 Error: Emergency stop of position switch on axis 4

Cause:

 the software limit switch has been overrun.

1553 Message: Workpiece driver incorrect

1554 Message: Wheel-balancing in progress

Cause:

 Balancing has been called for by the balancing unit

 Balancing has been requested by the operator

Effect:

 the grinding wheel is being balanced.

 the CNC program will be stopped during balancing

1555 Error: Coolant missing 1

The flow controller has responded.
Cause:

 Not enough coolant

 Hose leak
 Fault in coolant system
 Flow controller faulty (cable break)

Correction:

 Increase quantity of coolant (nozzle)

 Check the coolant system

1556 Error: Coolant missing 2

=> see message 1555

1557 Error: Coolant missing 3

=> see message 1555

1558 Error: Coolant missing 4

=> see message 1555

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 476 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1559 Error: Pre-alarm coolant supply system

A fault has occurred in the coolant system.
Cause:

 a motor protection device was triggered

 the temperature monitor responded
 too little coolant filter roll or the coiling winch is full
 Cable break

Correction:

 acknowledge fault in coolant system

1560 Message: Wrong grinding tool data program number!

Cause:
the program number for the grinding wheel or the grinding wheel contour is not per-
mitted.
Correction:
Assign correct program number for the current range.

1561 Error: In-process gauging not in automatic mode

The measurement control is not set to automatic mode
Cause:

 the switch on the measuring unit is not set to automatic.

 Faulty switch (cable break)

Correction:

 Switch measurement control to automatic mode

1562 Message: Pedal for clamping device is selected

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 477
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1563 Error: Min.wheel diameter reached! cycle start or reset

The CNC Program has been stopped for an Operator Input.
Cause:

 After the following Dressing Operation the Grinding Wheel Diameter will be
smaller than the programmed Minimum Wheel Diameter.

Action:

 The dressing operation will be carried out by pushing "CYCLE-START"

 The workpiece program is terminated with "RESET"

Correction:
This Message will repeatedly be displayed before Dressing until either or both of the
following Modifications are made:

 Define a smaller minimum grinding wheel diameter

 Set-up a new grinding wheel with a larger diameter than the programmed mini-
mum diameter

1564 Error: Min.wheel width reached! cycle start or reset

The CNC Program has been stopped for an Operator Input.
Cause:

 After the following Dressing Operation the Grinding Wheel-Width will be smaller
than the programmed Minimum Wheel-Width.

Action:

 The dressing operation will be carried out by pushing "CYCLE-START"

 The workpiece program is terminated with "RESET"

Correction:
This Message will repeatedly be displayed before Dressing until either or both of the
following Modifications are made:

 Define a smaller Minimum Grinding Wheel-Width

 Set-up a new Grinding Wheel with a larger Width than the programmed Mini-
mum Width

1565 Error: Gauge slide did not reach target position

Cause:

 A measuring sole is locked mechanically

 An initiator is defective or the cable is broken
 The measuring probes are not lifted up
 The conditions set by the software for WSS have to be respected
 Softkey "WSS MUST NOT TURN" is set.

Correction:

 Check the distance of traverse for obstacles and check the initiators
 Check the lift off of the probe

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 478 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1566 Message: No or invalid AE-signal (Acoustic Emission)

Explanation:

 The contact signal has not exceeded the switching threshold, the wheel has not
established contact in the defined search path.

Reaction:

 Program stop

Remedy:

 End with reset. Check whether the grinding wheel has established contact and
check the setting parameters for the Sensitron.

1567 Message: Input stop/infeed stop pending

Cause:

 The control is processing an M- or B-command (not completed)

 An error message is pending

1568 Error: B-axis:lowering position not allowed

For mechanical reasons, lowering the wheelhead in the current B axis position is
not permitted:
Cause:
Hydraulic B axis:

 it could not be stopped within +/- 2 degrees

 Air in the hydraulic system
 Position decoder set incorrectly
 Positioning speed too fast
 Both position limit switches are covered (swivel B axis to the limit stop)

1569 Message: Wheelhead raised/released

The B axis (grinding head) is raised/released
Cause:

 M100 was executed

 Program was terminated during swiveling

Correction:

 swivel grinding head to correct position using M102 Ax Tx

 Lower the grinding head again using M101

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 479
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1570 Message: Energies switched off

All power is switched off:
Cause:

 Emergency stop activated

 after switching the machine on

Correction:

 Clear emergency stop

 Press <Power on> on the machine control panel

1571 Error: Safety switch is off S0610

Cause:

 the safety switch (beside the main power switch) is switched off.

Effect:

 No movements can be carried out on the machine

 The Accept key is disabled.

1572 Error: Length positioning measuring probe out of range

The doors remain closed until Message is acknowledged.
The passive length positioning probe is out of its range of +/- 2 mm
Cause:

 The Positioning Probe was not set-up in the Middle-Position.

 Workpiece Shoulder deviates too much from the set-up Shoulder.
 Possible defective Length Positioning Probe.

Correction:

 Set-up the Length Positioning System again.

 If the Difference between Workpiece Shoulders from part to part (i.e. Center
depth variations are too big) is greater than the Measuring Range of +/- 2 mm
(0.080") use Active Length Positioning or Positioning with Sensitron (If Options
are available).

1573 Message: Workhead spindle blocked

The workpiece spindle is locked:
Cause:

 Clamping device is open

 Workpiece is not correctly clamped
 Gauge slide is in working position (defined when setting up the gauge slide)
 Loader is in collision area

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 480 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1574 Error: Measuring probe below limit

The doors remain locked until acknowledgement.
Cause:

 Workpiece pre-machined until too small

 No workpiece clamped
 Measurement control incorrectly set up
 Measuring probe damaged

Correction:

 Press <RESET> key

 Reset measuring probe

1575 Error: Entered wheelhead angle is invalid

Cause:

 The entered Angle is smaller than the possible minimum Angle

 The entered Angle is bigger than the possible maximum Angle
 Only Angles tthat are Multiples of the B-Axis Resolution are acceptable.

Correction:

 Enter a different Angle

1576 Error: No workhead connected

Cause:

 No workpiece spindle head mounted

 Workpiece spindle not connected electrically
 Cable break

Correction:

 Connect workpiece spindle head

1577 Error: Dressing not completed

Cause:

 The dressing of the grinding wheel was cancelled too early.

 A required dressing e.g. reprofiling, overmeasure was not machined off.

Correction:

 Call dressing manually

 Set up the grinding tool again

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 481
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1578 Message: No dressing-tool defined!

Cause:

 0/1 Diatronic gauge head

Correction:

 Define the selected dressing tool.

1579 Error: Error hinged dressing tool 2

=> see message 1534

1580 Error: Guard does not reach target position

No end position reached in max. movement time.
Cause:

 Wheel guard is mechanically obstructed

Correction:

 Check wheel guard

1581 Error: Temperature of grinding-wheel motor too high 1

1582 Error: Temperature of grinding-wheel motor too high 2

1583 Message: No risk of wheel collision in x ?

Cause:

 Internal grinding is carried-out and the call for wheel dressing was not initiated
through a studer grinding cycle

Purpose of the Message:

 To prevent Collisions
 The Operator must put the Grinding Wheel in a Position from which the Dress-
ing Tool can be approached in X without risk of Collision. Dressing can then be
carried out by pushing "Cycle-Start

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 482 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1584 Message: Lubricating oil pressure not correct

The lubrication oil pressure switch or the differential pressure switch on the filter
(hydrostatics) has triggered.
Cause:

 Filter is dirty
 Pump is faulty
 Plug, cable or pressure switch is faulty
 too little oil in tank

Correction:

 Change filter
 Fill up oil
 Check pump, plug, cable or pressure switch

1585 Error: A closed tool-guard blocks the x-axis

In automatic mode the X axis can only be moved with opened contact guard.
(Option)
Correction:

 Open contact guard

1586 Error: Temperature of grinding wheel motor too high CH 1

The temperature sensor in the external grinding motor has been actuated.
Cause:

 Cooler is set incorrectly or is faulty

 Motor cooling system is clogged
 Hose or pipe is ruptured
 Cable break
 Motor is faulty

1587 Error: Temperature of grinding wheel motor too high CH 2

=> see message 1586

1588 Error: Alarm coolant system

Fault in coolant system:
Cause:

 the coolant level is too high or too low

 the coolant level sensor is faulty or not connected
 an overcurrent switch has triggered
 Interruption in electrical cable
 The start in water-cooled tool drives is prevented (option)

Correction:

 correct coolant level

 check system

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 483
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1589 Error: Temperature of grinding wheel motor too high CH 3

=> see message 1586

1590 Error: Grinding mist is not being extracted

The oil mist is not being extracted from the grinding room.
Cause:\- The extraction system is faulty

 the extraction system is not connected

 the grinding mist extraction system sensor is faulty
 The fire damper did not open
 the monitoring system is not connected
 The cable is faulty

Correction:

 Connect extraction system

 Check extraction system

1591 Message: Pre-alarm from grinding mist extraction unit

1592 Error: Temperature of grinding wheel motor too high CH 4

=> see message 1586

1593 Error: Temperature of grinding wheel motor too high CH 5

=> see message 1586

1594 Message: No second workpiece recognized

Second workpice recognition: Input {EWSTE2} is zero

1595 Error: No registered wheel-angle.wheel-correction values are wrong

The grinding wheel was swiveled to an angle which was not set up.
Effect:

 The correction values of the grinding wheel are no longer correct.

Correction:\- Swivel grinding wheel to angle which is set up

1596 Error: Emergency stop of position switch on axis 6

Cause:

 the software limit switch has been overrun.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 484 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1597 Message: Feed override switch is set to 0%

The Override Switch on the PCU or Machine Control Panel is set to 0 Percent:

 The Axis can not be moved

 The Electronic Handwheel is inactive
 The current Program is stopped. (when traverse commands are given)
 Traversing to the Reference Points is stopped

Correction:

 Open Override Switch

1598 Error: Coolant missing 9

=> see message 1555

1599 Message: Key-switch is set to the 0-position

The key switch is set to the 0 position.
Effect:
The following inputs will be disabled:

 Tool corrections, zero offsets

 Setting data, macro variables, preset for absolute coordinates
 Input of workpiece programs
 Set up

1600 Error: Coolant missing 10

=> see message 1555

1601 Error: Fire detection system signals a fire

The fire detection system registers a fire.
Effect:

 Cycle stop will be activated

1602 Error: Ref.point not yet approached Q

=> see message 1510

1603 Message: Workhead raised/released

The Q axis (workpiece spindle head) has been raised/released.
Cause:

 M11 was executed

 The program was aborted during swiveling

Correction:

 lower/clamp Q axis again using M10

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 485
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1604 Message: Loading system is locking doors

The loader issues the signal to lock the doors of the machine.
Correction:

 Move the loader out of the danger zone.

 Switch loader to manual mode

1605 Error: Length positioning not set up

Cause:

 Length Positioning is not set-up

Correction:

 Length Positioning must be set-up after a Workpiece has been newly registered

1606 Error: Length positioning probe not responding

Cause:

 No shoulder was found after traversing the entire length of the search path

Correction:

 Check the measurement control system

 Check the workpiece
 Adjust the search path

!!! Warning, danger of collision !!!

1607 Error: Start wheel in Basic page / Energies

The data for the selected grinding tool have not been defined.
Cause:

 The machine was switched off

 a maintenance door was opened

Correction:

 Select basic view, select power and grinding wheel softkeys

1608 Error: Motor cooling circuit level not correct

Cause:

 The motor cooling system coolant level is too low or too high.
 Cable, connector or level switch are faulty.

Correction:

 Correct coolant level

 Check system

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 486 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1609 Error: Temperature of linear drives too high

Explanation:

 The temperature monitoring unit of linear drives signals an error.

Reaction:

 Emergency stop is initiated.

Remedy:

 Check the cooling of the axis drives.

1610 Message: Temperature Kommunikator/IPC too high

1611 Error: Axis lubrication not correct

Cause:

 Cable, connector or pressure switch are faulty.

 Incorrectly set pressure switch.

1612 Error: Combin. clamping device not allowed

1613 Message: Axis not in test position 6

Travel to safe position with 6th axis.

1614 Error: The feed master [R] refers to an axis which is not involved in the move-
ment
Cause:

 Axis selected in G9771 does not carry out any movement

Correction:

 Select axis which is part of movement.

1615 Message: Program interrupt from clamping device CH 1

1616 Message: Program interrupt from clamping device CH 2

1617 Message: Program interrupt from clamping device CH 3

1618 Message: Set-up procedure is disabled by the key switch

Set-up mode is locked if the key switch is set to 0.
Correction:

 Set the key switch to 1

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 487
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1619 Error: Define grinding wheel number

Grinding Wheel Number must be entered.

 Swiveling:
 G9600 H<Grinding wheel> T<Grinding wheel no.> (R<Turret position>)
A<Angle>

Swiveling without starting wheel:

Software release C/D:

 M102 A <Angle> T <Grinding wheel no.>

Software release F:

 G9600 H<Grinding wheel> T<Grinding wheel no.> (R<Turret position>)

A<Angle> M1

1620 Error: Alarm - tool turret drive

Cause:

 Tool turret drive indicates an error. See separate instructions.

Correction:

 Press reset
 Switch control unit off/on
 Carry out reference run with B142.0009.

1621 Error: Grinding wheel number not allowed

Cause:

 the grinding wheel number entered is not allowed.

Correction:

 Enter another grinding wheel number

 Check Studer options if necessary

1622 Message: C-axis active

The C axis has been activated using the M command
Effect:

 The C axis functions can be used

 C axis can be switched to the spindle mode using the M command "Deactivate
C axis" or using M3/ M4/ M5

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 488 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1623 Error: One or several axis reach software limit switches

Error message for angular axis transformation
Cause:
The end position of one or more axes is located behind that of the software limit
switch.
Correction:

 Check machining program.

1624 Error: Gauge slide must not approach

The gauge slide may not approach as there is danger of a collision:
Interlock for approach to workpiece:

 The Coolant Nozzle (Option) must be moved-in before the Gauge Slide
 The Loader (Option) is still in the Danger Zone

Possible Causes of the Fault:

 The IPG-System is not switched-on or is defective

 Cable Break between IPG-System and Fanuc Control
 Plugs not correctly connected

1625 Error: Coolant missing 11

=> see message 1555

1626 Error: Coolant missing 12

=> see message 1555

1627 Message: Reading external correction value

Cause:

 External correction values are read in using G208.

 Possible error in measurement control system.

Correction:

 Abort using Reset and check why G208 is not executed.

1628 Error: Coolant missing 13

=> see message 1555

1629 Error: Coolant missing 14

=> see message 1555

1630 Error: Coolant missing 15

=> see message 1555

1631 Error: Coolant missing 16

=> see message 1555
I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 489
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1632 Error: Danger of collision loader-machine => emergency stop

The Workpiece Change Position of the Machine was lost during Loading or Unload-
ing [MEM-Mode].
Cause:

 One ore more Axis were moved during Loading or Unloading

 A position controlled device on the machine left its initial position

1633 Error: Crash detection responded!!!

Cause:

 The contact detection crash limit has been overrun (e.g. Dittel AE6000).

Correction:

 Establish and eliminate cause.

 Repair any damage

1634 Error: Correction value out of range

Cause:

 A correction value was calculated or entered in cycle G9825 which was too
large.

Correction:

 Check cylindricity settings of WH and tailstock

 Check correction value and correct if necessary

1635 Error: PCU fault

A PCU Fault has occurred:

 The PCU is not connected.

 The cable is defective (inform Studer customer service)
 The PCU is defective (inform Studer customer service)

1636 Error: Coolant high-pressure missing

=> see message 1555

1637 Error: Coolant for tray rising is missing

=> see message 1555

1638 Error: Circumferential positioning passive not set up:

Cause:

 The function "circumferential positioning with passive probe" G9233, was called
without the probe being set up.

Correction:

 Set up probe under Set-up - Accessories - Measurement control

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 490 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1639 Message: Internal grinding spindle is being pre-lubricated

The internal grinding spindle is being pre-lubricated. This will take approximately 5
minutes:
Effect:

 The spindle may not be started during this time.

Correction:

 Please wait until the pre-lubricating process has been concluded

1640 Error: Fault in the internal grinding spindle service unit

The central monitoring system in the internal grinding spindle maintenance unit has
signaled a fault.
Cause:

 Oil level is not correct

 Air pressure is not correct
 Coolant pressure is not correct (Coolant system is switched off)
 Cable break

Correction:

 Check oil level

 Check air pressure
 switch on coolant system

1641 Message: B18:auxiliary started

Studer System Message: B18 was dropped

1642 Message: B19:executer waiting for auxiliary

Studer System Message: B19 was set (Waiting for Auxiliary-Acknowledgment)

1643 Error: Error synchronization aux-exe

Swiveling of the B-Axis was terminated at a critical time.
Correction:

 Repeat the last manipulation

1644 Error: Wheelhead swivel position not set up

The wheelhead swivel position has not yet been determined.
Correction:

 Set-up the swivel-position.

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 491
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1645 Error: Alarm from Profibus drive guard

Cause:

 Drive error message displayed

Correction:

 Carry out reset

1646 Message: Guard must not run

Cause:

 Traverse command for measuring head cover (M760, M761 or M762) pending
but traverse conditions not OK.

Correction:

 Clear traverse conditions (e.g. enter gauge slide)

1647 Error: Max. motor rpm not defined

The maximum motor speed of the wheel drive was not defined.
Correction:

 The maximum Wheel Rpm's are defined in the Options Program 09999
 Reset Options

1648 Error: Dressing is only possible in automatic mode

Dressing may only be carried out in Automatic Mode.
This Limitation is necessary because the Tool Nose Radius or Cutter Compensation
is only functional in this Mode..

1649 Error: B-axis indexing pins not released

one of the indexing bolts is not in the released position.

1650 Error: Q-axis clamping mechanism not released

Not enough hydraulic pressure to release the mechanical spring clamp.

1651 Error: Drive dressing tool not ready

The dressing tool drive signals an error.

1652 Message: Circumferential positioning active not set up

The programmed peripheral speed of wheel can no longer be attained.
Cause:

 The max. circumferential speed of the other grinding wheel with the same drive
motor has been exceeded
 The programmed peripheral speed of wheel can no longer be attained.

Correction:

 Reduce the circumferential speed of the grinding wheel

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 492 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1653 Message: Axis not in test position 5

Travel to safe position with 5th axis.

1654 Error: The clamped workpiece is scrap

Also contains the information: not clamped correctly.
Cause:

 No valve triggered, i.e. after power-off

 No end-position could be reached

1655 Message: Loader in danger zone

Cause:

 The loader signals that it is in the machine danger zone

Correction:

 Move the loader out of the danger zone.

1656 Error: Workpiece ground below size

The CNC-program is stopped. No offset calculations are made.
Cause:

 Workpiece too small

 In-Process Gauging not set-up or set-up incorrectly

Action:

 The workpiece program is continued with "Cycle-start".

 The workpiece program is terminated with "RESET"

Correction:

 Set-up IPG again

1657 Message: Axis not in test position 7

Travel to safe position with 7th axis.

1658 Message: Axis not in test position 8

Travel to safe position with 8th axis.

1659 Message: No free position on changer

Cause:

 An attempt was made to place a grinding quill in the grinding quill changer. It
was established that there was no space available.

Correction:

 First remove a grinding quill from the changer.

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 493
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1660 Error: Coolant overheated

Cause:

 the coolant unit indicates that the coolant is overheated

Correction:

 Check the coolant valve, change if necessary

1661 Error: Spindle ejector not released

=> see message 1650

1662 Error: Fault mandrel/tool clamping

1663 Message: Tool released

1664 Message: No mandrel/tool detect

1665 Message: Workpiece presence control selected

Surveillance can be un-selected in the set-up program.

1666 Error: The calculated plunge angle doesn't correspond to the evaluated quad-
rant
Cause:

 The measurement control measurement values produced an incorrect result

when calculating the plunge angle

Correction:

 Check measurement control, reset if necessary

1667 Error: Approach with G9678

Internal grinding can be carried out only if approach cycle G9678 is used.
Cause:

 ID-Grinding selected without approach cycle

Correction:

 Approach with cycle G9678

1668 Message: Pre-alarm motor cooling system

1669 Error: Alarm motor cooling system

For a standard contour 8 reference points are created.

 Overvoltage trigger of the coolant pump of the motor cooling circuit

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 494 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1670 Error: Grinding wheel is not set up

Cause:

 The selected grinding wheel is not completely set up

Correction:

 Set up grinding wheel

1671 Error: Invalid taper angle

Cause:

 A taper angle was entered in function G9700 which is invalid.

Correction:

 Alter the taper angle in the range from -85° to +85° in relation to the type of
operation

1672 Error: Swivel angle not defined

The swivel angle in the swivel command for the grinding spindle system has not
been programmed.

 G9600 A<Angle>T<Grinding wheel number>\swiveling without wheel start:

 M102 A<Angle> T<Grinding wheel number>

1673 Error: Start too close to the ref.point

Cause:

 the reference point traversing was started too close to the reference cam

Effect:

 reference point traversing will be stopped

Correction:

 move the axis away from the restricted close range zone and start again.

1674 Error: Door does not reach target position

Cause:

 Door Drive blocked mechanically

 Defective Proximity Switches
 Cable break

Correction:

 Check Path for Obstructions

 Check Proximity Switches

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 495
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1675 Error: Door drive reports fault

Cause:

 Door Drive blocked mechanically

 Defective Proximity Switches
 Cable break

Correction:

 Check Path for Obstructions

 Check Proximity Switches

1676 Message: Hydraulic high pressure is on

Cause:

 the hydraulic high pressure circuit is switched on.

It is used for ejecting the grinding arbor and lifting the Q axis.

1677 Error: Hydraulic high pressure not correct

The hydraulic high pressure used for ejecting the internal grinding spindle and for
lifting the Q axis is not correct
Cause:

 Pressure detected when the high pressure pump is switched off

 Wiring to the pressure switch is faulty
 Pressure switch has been set incorrectly or is faulty

Correction:

 Check wiring
 Check pressure switch

1678 Message: Workpiece spindle turning:door locked

Cause:

 The workpiece spindle is rotating

Effect:

 the doors remain locked

Correction:

 Stop workpiece spindle using M command M5 or M19

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 496 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1679 Error: Door encounters resistance

Cause:

 Door drive is jammed

 an obstacle is obstructing the way

Correction:

 check path for obstructions

1680 Error: Ref.point not yet approached W

(W-Axis may be Extending Oscillating Wheel Spindle)
The W-Axis Movements can be switched-off via the Options Program O9999. The
W-Axis can only be moved with the Spindle switched-on.

1681 Message: Axis blocked, see status view 6

Cause:

 The 6th axis is disabled due to the position of the wheel guard.

Correction:

 Close wheel guard or move it to minus.

1682 Error: The measuring probes may not be lowered yet

During high-speed form grinding the measuring probes may not be lowered before
the cycle call.
Reason: For a new form the entire sequence is simulated beforehand. During this
simulation the probes may not be lowered.

Correction:
For function G204, remove parameters A and K or set to zero.

1683 Error: Alarm - chip conveyor system

Cause:

 e.g. water tank at max. level

Effect:

 Program is aborted and the grinding wheel moved into a clear position

Correction:
=> see operating instructions for swarf conveyor

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 497
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1684 Error: Pre-alarm - chip conveyor system

Cause:

 Swarf conveyor error

Effect:

 new cycle start is prevented

Correction:
=> operating instructions for swarf conveyor

1685 Message: Inadmissible program number

Cause:

 the program number shown on the display cannot be started as a main pro-
gram. The program number is within the blocked range.

Correction:

 Delete message with Reset

 Select valid program number

1686 Error: Error active loader function

This error message is displayed by the loading / unloading system.\
Cause:
the workpiece transfer or a power-monitored movement has failed.
Correction:
check the appropriate operational sequence.

1687 Error: Wrong station number programmed

This error message is displayed by the loading / unloading system.
Cause:

 incorrect workpiece gripper number or workpiece station number.

Correction:

 Check the processing program in the loading / unloading system.

1688 Error: Loader station is occupied. Action not possible

This error message is displayed by the loading / unloading system.
Cause:

 a workpiece gripper or a handling station is busy.

Correction:

 Check the processing program for the loading / unloading system or empty the
system manually.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 498 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1689 Error: Wrong position programmed

This error message is displayed by the loading / unloading system.
Cause:

 Incorrect position has been programmed in the loading / unloading system with I
gripper arrangement.

Correction:

 Check the processing program in the loading / unloading system.

1690 Message: jam of pieces in discharge

1691 Error: Studer options not set correctly: door locked.

1692 Message: Runing axis: operating door locked

Explanation:

 Access to the machine room cannot be granted due to running axes.

Effect:

 Operating doors remain locked.

Correction:

 Stop the axes movements.

1693 Error: Error balancing system

The Balancing System signals a Fault.
Cause:

 The Control Unit is switched off

 Coolant Pressure is too low
 Coolant Chambers in the Wheel Adapter are full
 Acceleration pick-up is defect
 RPM Pick-up is defect
 Cable break
 Excessive Wheel Imbalance (Limit 2 triggered)

Correction:

 Acquisition method
 Traverse the grinding wheel in the x-direction toward the wheel dresser.

1694 Message: Coolant pressure circuit on.

1695 Message: Error in Sensitron flow sensor

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 499
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1696 Error: Coolant drain clogged

Not enough coolant is coming out of the machine.
Cause:

 the discharge strainer is clogged

 quantity of coolant is too high
 Float switch is faulty
 Float switch not connected correctly
 Break in electrical cable

Correction:

 Check the discharge

 Reduce quantity of coolant

1697 Message: Wheel hoist is released.

1698 Error: Error in-process gauging

Cause:

 The measurement control displays an error

Correction:

 Check description of measurement control system

1699 Error: Fault: fire detection system

The fire detection system indicates a fault.
Cause:

 System faulty or triggering connection interrupted

 Wire breakage or missing supply
 Operating or system doors not closed

Correction:

 Close operating or system doors

 Check system

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 500 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1700 Error: Frequ.converter not ready 1

The frequency converter for the drive (x) has signaled an unspecified/composite
error.
Cause:

 Acceleration or braking time set too short. Electronic motor current relay has
triggered (setting: 1.1 x nominal drive current)
 Fault in the converter
 Cable break

Correction:

 Press "Reset" and start up drive again,

 Check whether signals from converter arrive correctly at control system
 Check whether another drive motor or larger grinding wheel were installed
 Determine time of error message: does the error message arise during acceler-
ation, during deceleration, grinding or when the converter was switched-off?
 Contact Studer Service Department

1701 Error: Frequ.converter not ready 2

=> see message 1700

1702 Error: Frequ.converter not ready 3

=> see message 1700

1703 Error: Frequ.converter not ready 4

=> see message 1700

1704 Error: Lubrication oil level too low

The oil-level in the central lubrication system or the hydraulics is too low.
Cause:

 Not enough oil

 Oil level sensor or cable are faulty

Correction:

 Fill oil
 Check level sensor and cable

1705 Message: Axis not in test position X

Cause:

 the axis is not in the specified window

Correction:

 move the axis to 2 mm before the plus end position

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 501
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1706 Message: Axis not in test position Z

Cause:

 the axis is not in the specified window

Correction:

 move the axis to 2 mm before the plus end position

1707 Message: Axis not in test position C

Move the C axis to a safe position.

1708 Error: Subroutine number out of range

Cause:

 Subroutine number is outwith the permitted range

Correction

 select Subroutine which lies in the range O1 - O5999

1709 Error: Code of the active spindle has changed

The Spindle Identification Code of the active Spindle has suddenly changed.
Cause:

 Broken Cable
 Loose Contact
 Contacters defect

Correction:

 Compare spindle-code from electrical schematics with coding on cable

 Check-out spindle cable

1710 Message: G1-stop active

A Function is active in the Background which prohibits the Execution of NC-Blocks
containing G1. As soon as this Function in the Background is completed, normal
Execution of NC-Blocks containing G1 will continue.

1711 Message: Test position reached, press Cycle Start to start.

Cause:

 all axes are in a safe position for the safety check

Correction:

 start safety check using cycle start

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 502 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1712 Error: ! spindle code will be updated => reset => restart via custom
The Identification-Code of the actual Spindle is different from the Code that was
present at this Spindle Position when the Machine was last switched-off.
Cause:

 A new spindle with different spindle-code was installed at this position. (re-
check coding data !)
 The spindle identification code changed while the spindle was switched-off.

Error:

 Cable Break/Short circuit in Electrical Cable

 Loose Electrical Contacts
 Error in Coding (Coolant has entered the Plug)
 Contacters defect

Correction:

 Compare Spindle-Code from Electrical Schematics with Coding on Cable

 Check-out Spindle Cable

1713 Error: Arbor deflection compensation must not be swiveled in bore to zero.
Cause:

 According to CNC internal information, the grinding wheel is still in the bore.

Correction

 Move manually out of the bore, next disengage using cancel cycle and then
repeat the set-up step.

1714 Error: Length positioning probe cannot swivel in

Cause:

 the clamping device or the workpiece are not correctly clamped.

Correction:

 Clamp clamping device

1715 Message: B axis released/blocked B

Explanation:

 this message will be displayed until the movement is acknowledged (either an

initiator or by a pressure switch).

Cause:

 A command for lifting or lowering was ??? (M100, M101).

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 503
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1716 Message: M4 blocked

The M command M4 is not available on this machine (option).
Cause:

 For mechanical reasons the workpiece spindle head must not be operated in
the M4 direction.

1717 Error: Emergency stop of position switch on axis 8

Cause:

 the software limit switch has been overrun.

1718 Message: Balancing channel not active 1

Balancing Channel 1 with the respective Grinding Wheel is inactive. I.e. the balanc-
ing system has been reduced a 1-spindle-system. The messages from the balanc-
ing channel are disregarded and the long-term timer as well as a possible balancing
demand by spindle 1 suppressed.
Grinding Wheel 1 will also not be balanced when started for the first time via Cus-
tom.

1719 Message: Balancing channel not active 2

=> see message 1718

1720 Message: Tool turret raised / released

The turning tool turret is not clamped.
Cause:

 Swivel command pending

Correction:

 the turret is reclamped using the M command M107P

1721 Error: Hydraulic pressure incorrect B-Achse

Cause:

 Incorrect hold-down pressure or clamping pressure on B axis

1722 Message: Automatic mode loader - machine is active

1723 Error: Circumferential positioning in keyway not set-up

Cause:

 Circumferential Positioning in Keyway with Active Probe was not set-up

Correction:

 Set-up circumferential positioning in keyway

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 504 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1724 Error: Coolant missing 6

Explanation:

 Insufficient coolant at coolant valve Y.

 => see message 600104

1725 Message: Data transfer in progress

Data Transfer between the External Measuring Station and In-Process Gauging
System is in progress.

1726 Error: Too many empty places on the feed.

1727 Error: Gauge slide not connected

This message serves as a reminder for the machine operator
Cause:

 One of the Gauge Slides (1-5) is not connected

 Both Proximity Switches (Gauge Slide IN or OUT) are defect

Correction:

 Connect Gauge Slides

 Check Proximity Switches

1728 Error: Error reading program

Cause:

 The grinding wheel data have not been copied into the CNC memory.

Correction:

 Program M99 or M17 at the end of the grinding wheel program.

1729 Message: Drive locks turret

Cause:

 The tool drive is not in the coupling position.

Effect:

 the tool turret cannot be swiveled

Correction:

 Move the tool drive to 0°. Start tool drive using M33 and stop again using M35.

1730 Message: Steady-rest does not reach target position! CH4

=> see message 1739

1731 Message: Steady-rest does not reach target position! CH5

=> see message 1739
I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 505
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1732 Message: Incorrect clamping device CH6

1733 Error: Coolant flow monitoring not possible.several coolant valves are open
Cause:

 Coolant Flow Monitoring is not possible. More than one Coolant Valve is acti-
vated

Correction:

 Select only one Coolant Valve

1734 Error: Error coolant-flow monitor

The coolant flow monitoring device signals a fault.
Cause:

 The flow monitor indicates coolant flow even though the shut-off valve is not
open.

Correction:

 Check-out the Flow-Monitor Device, possibly clean or replace.

1735 Error: Error coolant flow for grinding drives

An error has been detected with the coolant flow monitoring for the wheel drives.
Cause:

 Not enough Coolant, broken Coolant Hose or broken Wire

 Error in Coolant Filtration System
 Defect Coolant Flow Monitor (permanently set to locig 1 or 0)

1736 Message: Pre-alarm air pressure / sealing air

1737 Message: Pre-alarm multi-circuit cooling system

Cause:

 The temperature is incorrect

 The compressor pressure is incorrect

1738 Error: Error multi-circuit cooling system

Cause:

 The temperature is incorrect

 The compressor pressure is incorrect

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 506 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1739 Message: Steady-rest does not reach target position! CH3

Cause:

 the steady-rest is mechanically obstructed.

 End position signal is interrupted.

Correction:

 Check initiators
 check whether the steady-rest can travel

1740 Message: Overpressure scale error

Cause:

 Air pressure incorrectly set

 Cable, connector or pressure switch are faulty
 Incorrectly set pressure switch

Correction:

 Adjust air pressure or pressure switch correctly

 Replace cable, connector or pressure switch

1741 Message: Overpressure spindel error

=> see message 1740

1742 Message: Wheelguard open:door locked

Cause:

 a tool is turning when the contact guard is open

Effect:

 the doors remain locked

Correction:

 Close guard or turn off the tool.

1743 Error: fault gripper, no workpiece

THE GRIPPER COULD NOT CLAMP THE WORKPIECE.

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 507
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1744 Message: Please wait!! wheel drives are slowing down

Cause:

 one or more grinding drives are coming to rest and a command to open the
doors has been entered

Effect:

 as long as the grinding drive is slowing down, the doors remain locked

Correction:

 wait until the grinding drives come to a standstill.

1745 Message: Grinding wheel rotating:door locked

Explanation:

 if an internal grinding drive is switched on the doors are locked.

Correction:

 Issue the switch-off command for the rotating internal tool or M command M139
"Switch off all internal grinding drives".

1746 Error: Grease level spindle screw too low

Monitoring of the spindle nut lubrication indicates a fault.
Cause:

 Not enough grease

 Switch, plug or cable is faulty
 Lubricating device is faulty

Correction:

 Replenish grease
 Check lubricating device

1747 Error: Oil level drip-feed lubrication of air too low

The oil level monitor in the central oil-mist lubrication device indicates a fault:
Cause:

 Oil level too low

 Switch, plug or cable faulty

Correction:

 Fill up oil
 Check oil-mist lubrication

1748 Error: Row type of the loader feeder / discharger is not defined.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 508 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1749 Message: Energies running up

Hydraulics and pneumatics have been switched on, but the operating pressure has
not yet been attained (in some systems it may take a few seconds until the pressure
is attained)
Cause:

 Pressure faulty
 Pressure switch not set correctly
 Cable break
 Unit is faulty

Correction:

 Check hydraulics and pneumatics

1750 Error: Hydraulics oil level not ok

The hydraulic oil level is too high or too low
Cause:

 Water in hydraulic oil

 Oil level sensor faulty

Correction:

 Check whether foreign substances have entered the central lubrication

 check for a leak if necessary
 fill up oil

1751 Error: Clamping device selection not stored

Cause:

 when setting the options, for safety reasons the current workpiece clamping
device selection was deleted

Correction:

 Save the clamping device selection

1752 Error: Lubrication oil level too high

The oil level in the central lubrication system or the hydraulics is too high
Cause:
- Water in hydraulic oil

 Oil level sensor faulty

Correction:

 Check whether foreign substances have entered the central lubrication

 check for a leak if necessary

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 509
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1753 Error: Axis lubrication not correct X

Cause:

 the flow-monitoring device of the axis lubrication system is not responding

Correction:

 Add oil
 Check lube lines
 Check pressure switch
 Check flow controller
 Check lubrication pump

1754 Error: Axis lubrication not correct Z

See Error Message 1753 (Z-Axis)

1755 Error: Grinding wheel not selected and / or in wrong working position
Cause:

 The wheel in working position is not correct selected or is not set-up for "LP with
sensitron"

Correction:

 Use G9600 to bring the correct Wheel into Working Position

1756 Error: Different wheel than used for set-up

Cause:

 the set-up of the "assisted manual mode" was carried out with a different grind-
ing wheel.

Correction:

 swivel to the correct grinding wheel

 Set up the "assisted manual mode" with the current wheel

1757 Error: Different b axis angle than used for set-up

Cause:

 the current B axis angle does not correspond to the one set up.

Correction:

 swivel to the correct angle

 set up the "assisted manual mode" with the desired angle

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 510 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1758 Error: Manual mode:not set-up < -- >Z

Cause:

 the positions for the manual cycle (oscillating in Z) have not been set up.

Correction:

 Set up the positions (see Operating Instructions "Assisted manual mode")

1759 Error: Manual mode:not set-up <=>X

Cause:

 the positions for the manual cycle (oscillating in X) have not been set up.

Correction:

 Set up the positions (see Operating Instructions "Assisted manual mode".

1760 Error: Fault with automatic protection flap retraction

A coolant nozzle can be mounted on the protection flap.
Cause:

 The required end position could not be reached.

 Limit-switch did not trigger (switch defect, cable break, not correctly adjusted)

1761 Error: Fault service/lubricating unit:internal grinding spindle 1

The ID-spindle lubricating/service-unit has signaled an fault:
Cause:

 The oil amount for the ID-high frequency spindle 1 is not correct
 Oil level is not correct
 Air pressure is not correct

Correction:

 Add lubricating oil

 Check flow monitoring device and electrical plugs
 Check electrical and pneumatic hoses

1762 Error: Fault service/lubricating unit:internal grinding spindle 2

=> see message 1761

1763 Error: Fault service/lubricating unit:internal grinding spindle 3

=> see message 1761

1764 Error: Fault service/lubricating unit:internal grinding spindle 4

=> see message 1761

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 511
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1765 Error: Error FANUC servo drive

Cause:

 one or more axis drives (driver) have been powered down without the doors
being opened or the accept key being released.

the maximum power-up time of an axis drive has been exceeded.

Correction:

 Delete error message and switch on power again

1766 Message: Loading door not closed !

1767 Error: Loading door repots fault !

1768 Message: Loading hatch must not be opened !

1769 Error: In-process gauging not in setup mode

Cause:

 the measurement control system is not in the set-up mode

 Switch on measuring device is not set to set-up
 Faulty switch (cable break)

Correction:

 adjust the measurement control system to set-up mode

1770 Error: In-process gauging not in automatic or setup mode

Cause:

 the measurement control system is not set to automatic or set-up mode:

 Switch on measuring device is not set to automatic or set-up mode
 Faulty switch (cable break)

Correction:

 adjust the measurement control system to automatic or set-up mode

1771 Error: Axis lubrication not correct 4.ACHSE

=> see message 1753

1772 Error: Ref.point not yet approached 5.AXIS

=> see message 1510

1773 Error: Loader operation is not defined.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 512 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1774 Message: Set rpm bigger than maximum spindle rpm

The value of the calculated rpm's of the grinding wheel is greater than the maximum
possible rpm's of the wheel spindle drive motor.
Cause:

 The wheel diameter has become too small

 The programmed surface speed of the grinding wheel is too big
 The value of the maximum possible rpm's of the wheel spindle motor is too
small

Correction:

 Change the Grinding Wheel if it is too small

 Adapt the programmed Surface Speed
 Change the Wheel Spindle Drive

1775 Error: Monitoring of secure wheel rpm detects a fault

Cause:

 Reaching of the safety rpm's is not detected

 The plausibility check recognized a possible fault

Correction:

 Check output FU on the converter (sheet no. 0010 in electrical schematics)

 Determine input from electrical schematics and check in status whether it
changes

1776 Message: Axis not in park-position X

Cause:

 The grinding wheel guards can only be closed on park position

Correction:

 Move the x-axis near the reference point

1777 Message: Servo running down

Cause:

 the axis drives are first switched off in the software and afterwards in the hard-
ware.

1778 Message: Servo running up

Cause:

 the axis drives are first switched on in the hardware and afterwards in the soft-
ware.

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 513
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1779 Error: Missing loader function

Cause:

 after issuing the M commands M241 or M242 in the NC program, the loader
must release the grinding process and start with the loader function within 5
seconds.

Correction:

 Repair loader fault

1780 Error: Fault workpiece change

Cause:

 the loading/unloading time of 20 seconds has been exceeded.

Correction:

 Repair loader fault

1781 Error: Ready to grind signal from loader is missing

Cause:

 missing grinding process release from the loader and pressing the cycle start
key at the same time.
 Correction:

?????

1782 Error: Basic position machine for workpiece change missing

Cause:

 a workpiece change was ordered using the M commands M241 or M242 in the
NC program without first approaching the basic machine position.

Correction:

 Approach basic machine position.

1783 Message: B axis released/blocked B2

Explanation:

 this message will be displayed until the movement is acknowledged (either an

initiator or by a pressure switch).

Cause:

 A command for lifting or lowering was ??? (M100, M101).

1784 Error: Quality of the workpiece is unknown.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 514 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1785 Error: Ref.point not yet approached 6.AXIS

=> see message 1510

1786 Error: dressing tool must not swivel!

1787 Message: Axis not in park-position Z

Cause:

 the grinding wheel contact guards can only be closed in the park position

Correction:

 move to park position with the axes

1788 Message: Dressing tool is running: door locked

Cause:

 dressing tool is rotating:

Effect:

 the doors remain locked

Correction:

 turn off the dressing tool with the appropriate M command.

1789 Message: Balancing system inactive

1790 Message: Axis not in test position >8

Cause:

 the >8 axes are not in a safe position

Correction:

 move to safe position with the >8 axes

1791 Message: Safety check by operator interrupted. Restart machine

1792 Error: Ref.point not yet approached 4.AXIS

=> see message 1510

1793 Error: Error customer-specific action 16

=> see message 1824

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 515
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1794 Error: Missing R-axis position

With selected R axis the gauge slide can only be approached in set mode(set-up)
without valid R axis position.
Cause:

 no valid position was specified for the R axis

Correction:

 the R axis must be length-positioned and the R axis position must be set relative
to the selected control edge number according to the workpiece drawing.
 the necessary control edge removal amounts must be stored in the input mem-
ory of the measurement control system before the start of the cycle.

1795 Error: R-axis is not selected

Cause:

 a position select B59 was defined for the available R axis without the R axis
being defined in the measurement control set-up screen.

Correction:

 Call the measurement control set-up screen and select the R axis.

1796 Error: Error R-axis

Cause:

 the desired R axis position could not be approached.

Correction:

 the R axis is not referenced. => Referencing

 R axis end limit approached => release
 Position value for axis number missing => define value
 Stepper motor drive is faulty

The cause of error is shown on the measurement control system and saved until the
fault has been remedied.

1797 Error: Macro interrupt formgrinding triggered

Cause:

 the form or unround grinding cycle has been terminated with M20.

Correction:

 the INTERRUPT is deleted with Reset or M30.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 516 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1798 Error: Inadmissible spindle code / configuration

The spindle code pending on the frequency converter is invalid.
Cause:

 Cable break
 uncoded spindle used
 Frequency converter issues wrong value

Correction:

 Check spindle configuration

 save spindle configuration again

1799 Error: Error customer-specific action 15

=> see message 1824

1800 Error: C - axis align

Cause:

 a traverse command for the C axis was issued without the C axis being set up

Correction:

 set up the C axis using NC program O7915.

1801 Error: Clamping device fault has caused a process stop

Cause:

 A fault occurred with an active clamping device

Correction:

 see status screen

1802 Error: T-number not allowed have been used. Allowed: T2..T10 and T12..T20
Cause:

 an incorrect number was programmed for parameter T in cycle G9400

Correction:

 select T between 2...10 or 12...20

1803 Error: X-axis not in second park-position

Cause:

 The second Park-Position depends on the Position of the Internal Grinding

Attachment (Swiveled-in or Swiveled-out)
 The wheel guard may only be closed in this second park-position

Correction:

 Move the X-axis close to the axis reference point

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 517
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1804 Message: Tool being balanced 1

The external grinding wheel on the tool holding fixture 1 is being balanced:

 The balancer requested a balancing process.

 The coolant must be switched on.
 The NC-program cannot be started while balancing.

1805 Message: Tool being balanced 2

=> see message 1804

1806 Message: Tool being balanced 3

=> see message 1804

1807 Message: Tool being balanced 4

=> see message 1804

1808 Error: Excessive balancing time #1

Explanation:

 the balancing unit signals an excessive balancing time on the tool holding fixture
1.

Cuase:

 Balancing chambers are full. => Switch off external grinding wheel on tool hold-
ing fixture 1 to drain the chambers
 no coolant available or coolant pressure is too low
 Coolant injector nozzles are clogged or valves faulty

Correction:

 Check balancing tool

1809 Error: Excessive balancing time #2

=> see message 1808

1810 Error: Excessive balancing time #3

=> see message 1808

1811 Error: Excessive balancing time #4

=> see message 1808

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 518 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1812 Error: Inadmissible out-of-balance condition #1

The integrated balancing system has detected an excessive out-of-balance condi-
tion on grinding wheel number 1. This unbalance can not automatically be corrected
for:

 Switch-off grinding wheel motor 1 immediately (danger of damage to spindle

bearings, possibly break-up of grinding wheel)
 The initial imbalance of the mounted grinding wheel is too big and cannot be
compensated for by the automatic balancing system
 Stationary (switched-off) grinding wheel may have gotten soaked with coolant
and is therefore heavily out-of -balance

1813 Error: Inadmissible out-of-balance condition #2

=> see message 1812

1814 Error: Inadmissible out-of-balance condition #3

=> see message 1812

1815 Error: Inadmissible out-of-balance condition #4

=> see message 1812

1816 Message: Automatic door drive inactive

Cause:

 The automatic door drive has been inactivated with command M65

Correction

 activate door drive again using M64. After the automatic doors have been acti-
vated all movements will take place at reduced speed until the referencing pro-
cedure is complete.

1817 Message: Tool imbalance check in progress

The preset time (5-120 min.) for an out-of-balance-check has been reached. Enter
the feeds (VXG, VXF and VXFF); a program then calculates the corresponding Q'
(QG, QF, QFF) and vice-versa.

 M241, M115 or M30 at end of program.

Used in looping programs, robot cycle or with M-function loader interfaces.

1818 Error: Compensation value in-process gauging too big

Cause:

 Difference between programmed nominal dimension [X] and measurement con-

trol zero signal is larger than parameter G204 [D]

Correction:

 Set-up measurement control again or program parameter G204 [D] to be larger

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 519
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1819 Error: External signal caused a cycle stop

Program sequence with longitudinal positioning Due to an external signal a process
stop with disengagement has been triggered via a PMC input (PMC symbol: {E-
STOP}).
Signal change from logic 1 to logic 0 = process termination. Cause see electrical
schematics sheet 057

1820 Error: External signal impedes a cycle restart

An external Signal triggered a Process Termination with Retract Move via PMC
Input (PMC-Symbol: {E-BLOK})
Signal Change from Logic 1 to Logic 0 = Process Termination. Cause see electrical
schematics sheet 057

1821 Message: Control measurement too big

The doors remain closed until Message is acknowledged.
Cause:

 Measurement control measured dimension is too large

Correction:

 Correct finishing dimension using correction screen (measurement control /

CNC control system)

1822 Message: Control measurement too small

The doors remain closed until Message is acknowledged.
Cause:

 Measurement control measured dimension is too small

Correction:

 Correct final measurement using correction screen (measurement control / CNC

control system)

1823 Message: Servo motor brake released

1824 Error: Error programmable coolant nozzle (action 11)

(Hydraulically actuated coolant nozzle:)
Different customer specific movements are also possible: Tailstock clamping, tail-
stock driver, air-cushion, flooding etc
Cause:

 The movement could not be carried-out due to mechanical jamming

 The end-position proximity switch is defect
 Cable break

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 520 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1825 Error: Error customer-specific action 12

(tailstock clamping:)
=> see message 1824

1826 Error: Error customer-specific action 13

(tailstock lifting: ERROR CUSTOMER SPECIFIC ACTION 14)
=> see message 1824

1827 Error: Error customer-specific action 14

(Tailstock driving: CUSTOMER SPECIFIC ACTION MUST NOT BE CARRIED-
OUT)
=> see message 1824

1828 Error: Customer specific action must not be executed.

A customer specific Action/Movement should approach or retract. The Conditions to
do so are not yet met. They will, however be carried-out as soon as all Conditions
are met.

1829 Message: Aux-key-switch in 0-position

The key switch marked 'AUX' on the machine control panel is in the 0 position.
Effect:

 The allocated functions are blocked.

1830 Error: Axis 4 blocked

The B-Axis is blocked through the AUX-Keyswitch. Raising or swivelling not
allowed.

1831 Error: No loader program defined

Cause:

 the definition page for loader programs is not complete

 the loading system attempts to load and start a program that is not defined.

Correction:

 complete the definition page for the loader programs

1832 Error: Workpiece position not correct

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 521
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1833 Error: Positioning probe has responded before approach movement

Positioning of a workpiece surface could not be executed because the probe signal
was issued before the approach movement was started.
Cause:

 Probe is faulty
 Cable break
 Probe is not mounted
 Probe was deflected by the workpiece when swiveling in

Correction:

 check probe and replace if necessary

 increase distance to workpiece

1834 Error: Diameter dimension outside of tolerance in relation to shoulder

Cause:

 The diameter dimension is outwith the defined tolerance when simultaneously

carrying out measurement controlled shoulder and diameter grinding with termi-
nation at the shoulder.

Correction:

 Check machining process incl. measurement control system or alter tolerance

in the initializing values.

1835 Error: Shoulder dimension outside of tolerance in relation to diameter

Cause:

 The shoulder dimension is outwith the defined tolerance when simultaneously

carrying out measurement controlled shoulder and diameter grinding with termi-
nation at the diameter.

Correction:

 Check machining process incl. measurement control system or alter tolerance

in the initializing values.

1836 Message: Feedrate definition by handwheel selected

Cause:

 the pushbutton to select the feedrate specification via the handwheel was actu-
ated. For G1 traverse commands the relevant axes now move simultaneously
with the handwheel i.e. the feedrate is determined by the rotational speed of the
handwheel.

Correction:

 this function is disabled by pushing the button again.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 522 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1837 Error: Option not available

Cause:

 the selected function cannot be executed because this option is not available.

Correction:

 Do not use this function

 Option is available from Studer

1838 Message: Hydraulic low pressure is on

1839 Error: Alarm servo auxiliary axis

Cause:

 Fault in Drive (b-Servo) of the Auxiliary Axis

 More Information can be found in the Status-Screen of the Auxiliary Axis

Correction:

 Ask for the Documentation (Error Messages) relating to the-b-Servo

1840 Error: Stroke end of auxiliary axis exceeded

Cause:

 One of the two stroke limits has been reached

 More information can be found in the status-screen of the auxiliary axis

Correction:

 In JOG move Axis away from Stroke Limit Switch.

 Cancel Alarm with <RESET>

1841 Message: One or more CNC-axis locked

Certain CNC-Axis must not move under certain circumstances.
Either there is danger for personnel or certain components could be damaged.

1842 Error: G9221 not available => use G9220 with G9245

1843 Error: Oil filter for oscillating spindle not correct

Cause:

 The oil filter monitor registers an error. See electrical schematics.

Correction:

 Check filter, replace if necessary

 Check switch and wiring

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 523
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1844 Error: Missing or incorrect transfer parameter A..Z

Cause:

 A transfer parameter was omitted or was defined using an incorrect value during
programming.

Correction:

 Check machining program.

1845 Error: Oscillating: feed axis parallel

Cause:

 Interpolated infeeding cannot take place during oscillation with an axis (X or Z).

Correction:

 Switch off oscillation or alter plunge angle parameter [S] and/or [V].

1846 Error: Parameter A inadmissible block-number

Cause:

 The system has a defined range of sentence numbers.

Correction:

 Parameter A must be programmed between 1 and 9999.

1847 Error: Coolant filter for wheel motor cooling polluted

1848 Error: Regenerate wheel data with StuderThread

Cause:

 Minimal grinding wheel diameter has been reached.

Correction:

 In order that the thread quality can be guaranteed, the thread profile must be
recalculated in StuderThread.

1849 Error: Circuit breaker in electrical cabinet has triggered

Due to an external signal a process stop with disengagement has been triggered via
a PMC input (PMC symbol: {E-STOP}).
Signal change from logic 1 to logic 0 = process termination. For cause see electrical
schematics sheet 057

1850 Error: X-axis not in safety position: door are locked

1851 Message: Change dressing roll

 The minimum dressing roll diameter has been reached.

 The diameter has been reset to maximum =>.

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 524 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1852 Error: Highspeed data incorrect

=> see Highspeed - cycle O9730

1853 Message: Entered value not admissible

Cause:

 The defined value cannot be processed in the SPS.

Correction:

 G9770 parameter B must be defined between 1 and 16.

1854 Message: Entered plunge angle is invalid

Cause:

 Parameter [S] and/or [V] programmed incorrectly.

Correction:

 For diameter machining: program +5 / +175 degrees or -5 / -175 degrees

 for shoulder machining: program +85 / -85 degrees or +95 / -95 degrees

1855 Error: Spindle: detected pole number different from defined pole number
Cause:

 Number of poles incorrectly programmed.

Correction:

 Compare number of poles with the spindle data sheet.

1856 Message: Maintenance service requested => see service screen

 see service screen

 The maintenance service must be carried-out at the next opportunity

1857 Error: Maintenance service must be carried-out => see service-screen

 see service screen

 The requested maintenance service must first be carried-out in order to con-
tinue grinding

1858 Error: Communicator not ready

1859 Error: Asi-master 1 fault

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 525
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1860 Error: Recalculate StuderForm data

Cause:

 Grinding wheel data out of range

 metric/imperial conflict
 wrong grinding direction

Correction:
Recalculate data in StuderForm

1861 Message: Initiator did not respond

The initiator for referencing the C axis has not responded
Cause:

 Initiator is faulty
 Initiator is not correctly adjusted

Correction:

 Correct the C axis offset

 Adjust initiator correctly

1862 Message: No negative X-values admissible when intern.grind. in direct.X+

Cause:

 G9400 Definition T number has negative X-values

Correction:

 Check X values and change into positive values.

1863 Message: Frequency converter could not be configured

Cause:

 Characteristic curve data are incorrect or spindle configuration is incorrectly

defined.

Correction:

 Correct the characteristic curve data or the spindle configuration table.

1864 Message: Highcom reports error

The file transmission CNC - PC via Highcom has detected an error.
Cause:

 data transmission takes too long

 the data are incorrect

Correction:

 Check connection
 Generate data again
 Restart HighCom

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 526 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1865 Error: Alarm oscillation axis

1866 Message: Data transfer RS232 in progress

The file transmission CNC-PC via RS232 is active

1867 Error: Error interface rs-232

The file transmission CNC - PC via RS232 has detected an error.
Cause:

 Data transmission takes too long

 the cable is not correctly connected
 the settings are incorrect

Correction:

 Check settings
 Connect or check cable

1868 Error: Function parameter [x] not available => use g9239
Cause:

 The parameter X is no longer valid from the software version MVB 208.

Correction:

 Use grinding function G9239 for run-in and run-out grinding

1869 Error: Grinding cycle not suitable for free threading

Cause:

 Free threading was selected under thread definition in StuderThread. However,

this cannot be machined with the grinding function G9236.

Correction:

 Check thread definition or select another grinding function.

1870 Message: Interpolated approach/retract

1871 Message: Ref.point not yet approached C

Cause:

 The reference position of the C axis has not yet been approached.

Correction:

 Referencing the C-axis with M19 or by starting the program O7915.

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 527
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1872 Error: Measuring probe is not set up

Cause:

 The measuring probe which should be used is not set up

Correction:

 Set up the relevant probe.

1873 Message: Wheel is not initialized for slow acceleration

1874 Error: Wrong arbor clamped

Cause:

 According to internal checks, an incorrect grinding quill is clamped on the grind-

ing spindle.

Correction:

 Clamp the correct grinding quill.

1875 Error: Position not set up

Cause:

 During dressing the return position is not set up

 The position is not yet set up when dressing the W axis

1876 Error: Angle tolerance exceeded

Cause:

 When using function G9603 with parameter 1=7 it was established that the
angular error is outside the maximum tolerance [parameter R].

Correction:

 Check the measuring probe and set up again if necessary.

 Check workpiece pre-machining.

1877 Message: Synchron function to 3.axis is with M645 inactiv! M644 = activ

1878 Error: Error from active loadermotion

Cause:

 The maximum movement time of the active loader movement has been
exceeded

Correction:

 Read the last active loader movement from the easyLoad status screen and
check its valves, initiators and fuses

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 528 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1879 Message: High speed not finished correctly; disengage undefined position
manually
For internal grinding at high speed, disengage can be blocked so that a collision can
be avoided. If the cycle is not finished correctly, then retraction must be done manu-
ally.

1880 Error: Error central lubrication Z

1881 Error: Error central lubrication X1

1882 Error: Error central lubrication PINOLE1

1883 Error: Error central lubrication X2

1884 Error: Error central lubrication PINOLE2

1885 Error: fault discharge indexing conveyor

1886 Error: Profibus diagnose

Cause:

 A configured slave indicates an error or was removed.

Correction:
=> see Profibus status screen

1887 Message: No signal workpiece is clamped

1888 Error: Coolant input pressure not ok

1889 Error: Motorcoolant input pressure not ok

1890 Message: Hydrostatic filter pre-alarm

1891 Error: Hydrostaticfilter not correct

1892 Message: Hydraulic filter pre-alarm

1893 Error: Hydraulic filter not correct

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 529
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1894 Error: STOP after no. of scrap parts

1895 Error: Overflow measuring head

Cause:

 During grinding with measurement control it was established that the active
measuring probe returns invalid results.

Correction:

 Check measuring probe and reset the measurement control if necessary.

1896 Error: The grinding wheel is in the bore : retraction with cycle-start
Cause:

 The previous machining program was terminated but the internal grinding wheel
remains in the bore.

Correction:

 Retract using cycle start and continue with program

1897 Message: Test stop active: operating door locked, F% >0 !no operator inputs!
Explanation:

 The safety functions are being checked.

Reaction:

 the operating doors remain locked.

Remedy:

 Drives have to be switched on

 Wait until the test stop is complete and the doors are released

1898 Error: fault supply indexing conveyor

1899 Message: Axis not in test position 4

Travel to safe position with 4th axis.

1900 Error: CS contour mode not available, workpiece spindles are not referenced.

1901 Error: Error phase synchronization of the workhead spindles.

1902 Error: Error while updating the wheel

1903 Error: Wrong turning device selection

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 530 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1904 Error: Referencing the workpiece spindle not possible, override switch at 0%.

1905 Error: No valid sister sister tool available:

Cause:

 No valid sister tool defined

All sister tools have exceeded their working life

Remedy:

 Define sister tool

 Change cutting plates and reset working life

1906 Error: Loader axes have to be disengaged manually

1907 Error: Options relevant to safety have been changed! Adaptation of the
options in Safety PMC required.
Options relevant to safety have been changed in PMC 1. Edit options in Safety PMC
too.
possible options:
doors, axes, spindle, drive channels, brakes

1908 Message: Loader is waiting for release of collision range

1909 Error: Hydrodynamic pressure axis lubrication fault

1910 Error: Hydrodynamic-axis lubrication pre-alarm

1911 Message: Backup battery in the CNC controls is discharged

Replace batteries within max. of one week

Procedure:

 Switch on the CNC and switch off again after approx. 30 seconds.
 Exchange battery
 Switch on control system again

!!! Procedure must not last more than 30 min !!!

1912 Error: Reprofiling was started without profiling allowance

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 531
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1913 Message: Calibration cycle executed

The calibration cycle has been started and executed.

1914 Error: Brake B-axis incorrect

1915 Message: Loader subject to emergency-stop

1916 Error: Error when transcribing parameter

An internal error has occurred when transcribing the parameter. The error code can
be taken from the variable M_PARAMSET_RETURN:
100 = Invalid index for the parameter set in the M_PARAMSET_SELECT variable
101 = Checksum error (set options again if necessary)

 1 - +8 = G314 error (Variable M_PARAMSET_PARAMFAILED = parameter

number where error has occurred)

1917 Message: Service mode active Movements can be carried out with open oper-
ating doors.

 Service Mode was selected by StuderWin Service user

 Emergency stop was triggered to ensure that all power is switched off
 Doors must be closed so that power can be switched on again

The following funct

1918 Error: Remove SPC part

1919 Error: Open door and remove part

1920 Error: Error in operation status of loader

1921 Error: No calibration part

1922 Message: Change workpiece

1923 Error: Workpiece not correct on support

1924 Error: Feedback circuit hardware not OK. Component fault

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 532 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1925 Message: B-axis locked. Lifting not permitted as long as external grinding
drive is turning.

1926 Error: Temperature exceeded workhead spindle 1

1927 Error: Temperature exceeded workhead spindle 2

1928 Message: Remove part => cycle start

1929 Message: close Handling door

1930 Error: Timeout while referencing of the workpiece spindles

1931 Message: Batch completed.

1934 Message: Remove SPC / scrap part, close drawer.

1935 Message: Level of air condensate collector maximum

1936 Error: A closed tool-guard blocks the Z-axis

1937 Error: Error in sign of life of peripheral loader

1938 Error: The option for high-speed skip signals was set incorrectly.

1940 Message: No access by hand! Doors closed until referenced! Bypass only w/
acknowledgement C1
The operating doors are kept closed for safety reasons as the axis/axes are not ref-
erenced and monitoring is not active.
Reference axes in the energies screen

Can be bypassed with acceptance device -> do not actuate manually

1941 Message: No access by hand! Doors closed until referenced! Bypass only w/
acknowledgement C2

1942 Error: Raw part shuttle doesn't reach end position

1943 Message: Test stop scheduled in less than 2 hours. Test can be enforced with
B143. Safe position required.
I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 533
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

1945 Error: Error in measurement control data transfer.

1947 Error: Invalid tool

1948 Error: Mains supply fault

1949 Message: Warning Fanuc spindle drive (see DGN 712)

1951 Error: Working life of turning tool reached Drehwerkzeug wechseln und Leb-
ensdauer rücksetzen

1952 Error: alarm lifting station

1953 Error: Tool not selected

1954 Error:

1955 Error: Wrong Skipclass selected

1956 Message:

1957 Error:

1958 Message: Bit0 : CPU Temperature Exceeds the Upper Limit Bit1 : CPU Fan
Failure Bit2 : HDD Fan Failure Bit3 : Case Fan Failure Bit4 : Ambient Tem-
perature Exceeds the Upper Limit(55deg.C) Bit5 : Ambient Temperature
Exceeds the Lower Limit(5deg.C) Bit6 : CMOS battery alarm Bit7 : (Not
used)
Bit0 : CPU Temperature Exceeds the Upper Limit
Bit1 : CPU Fan Failure
Bit2 : HDD Fan Failure
Bit3 : Case Fan Failure
Bit4 : Ambient Temperature Exceeds the Upper Limit(55deg.C)
Bit5 : Ambient Temperature Exceeds the Lower Limit(5deg.C)
Bit6 : CMOS battery alarm
Bit7 : (Not used)

1959 Error: Probe not responding

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 534 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

1960 Error: No radius for radius dresser defined

1990 Error: Setup stopped by cnc, please restart. Move the grindingwheel in Z free!

1999 Error: No spindle nose defined

2200 Error: Customer-specific error message 1

2201 Error: Customer-specific error message 2

2202 Error: Customer-specific error message 3

2203 Error: Customer-specific error message 4

2204 Error: Customer-specific error message 5

2205 Error: Customer-specific error message 6

2206 Error: Customer-specific error message 7

2207 Error: Customer-specific error message 8

2208 Message: Customer-specific warning 1

2209 Message: Customer-specific warning 2

2210 Message: Customer-specific warning 3

2211 Message: Customer-specific warning 4

2212 Message: Customer-specific warning 5

2213 Message: Customer-specific warning 6

2214 Message: Customer-specific warning 7

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 535
MESSAGES / STUDERWIN

2215 Message: Customer-specific warning 8

2216 Message: Customer-specific message 1

2217 Message: Customer-specific message 2

2218 Message: Customer-specific message 3

2219 Message: Customer-specific message 4

2220 Message: Customer-specific message 5

2221 Message: Customer-specific message 6

2222 Message: Customer-specific message 7

2223 Message: Customer-specific message 8

3500 Error: Error PROFIBUS drive

3501 Error: Error data transfer PROFIBUS drive

3502 Message: End position + reached, PROFIBUS drive

3503 Message: End position - reached, PROFIBUS drive

3504 Error: Temperature too high of tooldrive

3505 Error: Frequ.converter error from tooldrive

3506 Error: Coolant missing

=> see message 1555

3507 Error: Error on handling station

3508 Error: Frequ.converter not ready

© Fritz Studer AG 10035212 / 01 / en-English

I - 536 Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012
 STUDERWIN / MESSAGES

3509 Error: Temperature of grinding wheel motor too high

3532 Message: Accelerating tooldrive

4500 Message: Please pump down the coolant.

I
10035212 / 01 / en-English © Fritz Studer AG
Release ab 29 / 13.03.2012 I - 537